Forex Walkthrough

Introduction - Foreign Exchange

First Time Here? This is a step by step guide to currency trading, but you can jump around using the
left navigation bar. If you already have a general understanding, you might want to skip to Level 1. If
you already trade, you could jump to Advanced, or Trading Strategies.

What Is Forex?
Although it doesn't get as much media attention as the stocks or bonds markets, the foreign exchange
market (or "forex" for short) is the biggest financial market in the world, with over $4 trillion worth of
transactions occurring every day. Simply, forex is the market in which currencies, or money, are traded.
The forex market allows you to buy and sell money.

There is no one-stop shop for buying and selling currencies; trade is conducted through a lot of
individual dealers or financial centers. The forex market is open 24 hours a day, five days a week, and
currencies are traded worldwide among the major financial centers of London, New York, Tokyo,
Zürich, Frankfurt, Hong Kong, Singapore, Paris and Sydney. This means, at any time during the day
you can find a financial center that is buying and selling currencies.

With the constantly improving technology for trading, dealing in currencies is now more accessible
than ever. In the past, the foreign exchange market was the domain of government, or companies with
a lot of money. However, with the wide spread access to the internet, firms now offer any average Joe
the ability to open accounts to trade currencies. All you really need, in terms of hardware to get started,
is a computer and access to the internet.

Introduction - How Forex Is Unique

How is the forex market different from other markets?

1. Fewer Rules: Unlike the trading of stocks, futures or options, currency trading does not take place
on an exchange with rules, like the New York Stock Exchange. It is not controlled by any central
governing body, and there are no clearing houses to make sure the party you are buying the currency
from actually pays up. In fact, if you had exclusive information, and used it to make a lot of money,
legal issues would not arise, like they would it in the stock market.

2. No Commissions: There are no exchange, brokerage or clearing fees in the FX market. Instead,
brokers make money on the difference in price you pay to buy, or the amount you receive when you
sell, currencies.

3. Trade Whenever You Want: Forex markets are open 24 hours a day, so if you are a night owl or
early riser you can set your own trading schedule.

4. No Limit to How Much Currency You can Buy: If you had $1 billion U.S. dollars you wanted to sell,
you could do it! There's no limit to how much money you can buy or sell.

5. Easy to Get In and Out: You can buy and sell currencies with the click of a button, instantaneously.
The market is so large that you will never be stuck if you wanted to get rid of – or buy - your stockpile
of currency.

1 ZC
Introduction - Making And Losing Money
How People Make or Lose Money Doing It:
By converting your money into a different currency, you are hoping that the new currency increases in
value. When you convert back to your initial currency, ideally you will have more money than you
started with.

Let's take a look at a simple example of how someone can make money from a forex transaction.
Suppose you have $900 U.S. dollars and you exchange that for $1000 Canadian dollars. One week
later, the CAD/USD exchange rate goes up from 0.90 to 1.0, so the Canadian dolar which you own has
increased in value compared to the U.S. dollar. You could then exchange the $1000 CAD you have
back into U.S. dollars and you would receive $1000 USD.

So you started with $900 USD, you now have $1000 USD, a profit of $100 USD.

Your Decision CAD USD

You buy 1,000 CAD at the

+1000 -900
CAD/USD rate of 0.90

A week later, the CAD/USD rises to

1.00 and you exchange your 1,000 CAD -1000 +1000
back into U.S. dollars

Profit +100

Introduction - Buying And Selling

What are you really selling or buying in the currency market?
You are buying and selling money. In the forex market, think of money as a commodity, you are buying
a currency hoping that its value will increase, and if you are selling you are betting that it will decrease.
Like any other commodity, the price of currencies is displayed in quotes in the spot market, and traded
in currency pairs; like the US dollar and the Canadian dollar (USD/CAD) or the US dollar and
Japanese yen (USD/JPY).

Also, although you are buying another country's currency, you are not buying anything ‘physical', and
thus no physical exchange of money ever takes place. This can be confusing, but think of it like buying
shares of a publicly traded company where everything is done electronically inside your trading
account. But unlike the stock market, the forex market doesn't have a central exchange like the New
York Stock Exchange for instance. Instead the forex market is an interbank market, which means it's
all connected together in a network of banks and institutions.

You can also think of buying currencies as buying shares in a country, you are betting on the success
or failure of a particular country's economy. You'll learn more about reading a currency quote and the
economics that move currency rates in the upcoming Introduction to forex section.

2 ZC
Introduction - Currency Quotes
Currencies are quoted in pairs, for example the USD/EUR is the U.S. dollar/euro. Using this quotation,
the value of a currency is determined by its comparison to another currency. The first currency of a
currency pair is called the base currency, and the second currency is called the quote currency. The
currency pair shows how much of the quote currency is needed to purchase one unit of the base
currency.

For example, if the USD/EUR currency pair is quoted as being USD/EUR = 0.8000 and you purchase
the pair; this means that for every 0.80 euros you sell, you purchase (receive) US$1. If you sell the
currency pair, you will receive 0.80 euros for every US$1 you sell. The inverse of the currency quote is
EUR/USD, and the corresponding price would be EUR/USD = 1.25, meaning that US$1.25 would buy
1 euro.

Introduction - Most Traded Pairs

Although some retail dealers trade exotic (less popular) currencies such as the Thai baht or the Czech
koruna, the majority trade the seven most traded currency pairs in the world. The four most popular,
also known as "the majors" are:

EUR/USD (euro/dollar) – "euro"

USD/JPY (U.S. dollar/Japanese yen) – "gopher"
GBP/USD (British pound/dollar) - "cable"
USD/CHF (U.S. dollar/Swiss franc) – "swissie"

The three less popular commodity pairs are:

AUD/USD (Australian dollar/U.S. dollar) – "aussie"

USD/CAD (U.S. dollar/Canadian dollar) – "loonie"
NZD/USD (New Zealand dollar/U.S. dollar) – "kiwi"

These currency pairs, along with their various combinations (such as EUR/JPY, GBP/JPY and
EUR/GBP) account for more than 95% of all speculative trading in FX. Given the small number of
possible trades - only 18 pairs are actively traded - the FX market is much less broad than the stock
market.

Introduction - Brokers
The forex (FX) market has many similarities to the stock market, but there are some key differences.

Choosing a Broker
There are many forex brokers to choose from, just as in any other market. Here are some things to
look for:

Look for low spreads

The spread, calculated in pips, is the difference between the price at which a currency can be
purchased and the price at which it can be sold at any given point in time. Forex brokers don't charge a
commission, so this difference is how they make money. In comparing brokers, you will find that the
difference in spreads in forex is as great as the difference in commissions in the stock arena. (To learn
more, check out How To Pay Your Forex Broker.)

3 ZC
Make sure your broker is backed by a quality institution
Unlike stock brokers, forex brokers are usually tied to large banks or lending institutions because of the
large amounts of capital required to provide the necessary leverage for their customers (more on
leverage in a moment). Also, forex brokers should be registered with the Futures Commission
Merchant (FCM) and regulated by theCommodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC). You can find
this and other financial information and statistics about a forex brokerage on its website or on the
website of its parent company.

Find a broker who will give you what you need to succeed
Forex brokers offer many different trading platforms for their clients - just like brokers in other markets.
These trading platforms often feature real-time charts, tools to analyze these charts, real-time news
and data, and even support for trading systems themselves. Before committing to any broker, be sure
to request free trials to test different trading platforms. Find a broker who will give you what you need
to succeed!

Get the right account type

Many brokers offer two or more types of accounts. The smallest account is known as a mini
account and requires you to trade with a minimum of, say, $250, offering a high amount of leverage
(which you need in order to make money with so little down). The standard account lets you trade at a
variety of different leverages, but it requires a minimum initial investment of around $2,000. Finally,
premium accounts, which often require significant amounts of capital, let you use different amounts of
leverage and often offer additional tools and services. Make sure the broker you choose has the right
leverage, tools, and services relative to the amount of money you are prepared to invest. (For more,
see Forex Basics: Setting Up An Account.)

Things to Avoid
Sniping or Hunting
Sniping and hunting - or prematurely buying or selling near preset points - are shady acts committed
by brokers to increase profits. Obviously, no broker admits to committing these acts. Unfortunately, the
only way to determine which brokers do this is to talk to fellow traders; there is no blacklist or
organization that reports such activity. Talk to others in person or visit online discussion forums to find
out who is an honest broker. (For another broker tactic that can cut into your profits, read Price
Shading In The Forex Markets.)

Strict Margin Rules

When you are trading with borrowed money, your broker has a say in how much risk you take. As such,
your broker can buy or sell at its discretion, which can be a bad thing for you. Let's say you have a
margin account, and your position takes a dive before rebounding to all-time highs. Well, even if you
have enough cash to cover, some brokers will liquidate your position on a margin call at that low. This
action on their part can cost you dearly.

Talk to others in person or visit online discussion forums to find honest brokers. Signing up for a forex
account is much the same as getting an equity account. The only major difference is that, for forex
accounts, you are required to sign a margin agreement. This agreement states that you are trading
with borrowed money, and, as such, the brokerage has the right to interfere with your trades to protect
its interests. Once you sign up, simply fund your account, and you'll be ready to trade!

Introduction - What Moves A Currency?

Fundamental Analysis
If you think it's difficult to value one company, try valuing a whole country! Fundamental analysis in the
forex market is often very complex, and it's usually used only to predict long-term trends; however,
some traders do trade short term strictly on news releases. There are many different
fundamental indicators of currency values released at many different times.

4 ZC
Here are a few:
-Non-farm payrolls
-Purchasing Managers Index (PMI)
-Consumer Price Index (CPI)
-Retail sales
-Durable Goods

These reports are not the only fundamental factors to watch. There are also several meetings that
provide quotes and commentary, which can affect markets just as much as any report. These
meetings are often called to discuss interest rates, inflation and other issues that affect currency
valuations. Even changes in wording when addressing certain issues - the Federal Reserve chairman's
comments on interest rates, for example - can cause market volatility.

Simply reading the reports and examining the commentary can help forex fundamental analysts gain a
better understanding of long-term market trends and allow short-term traders to profit from
extraordinary happenings. If you choose to follow a fundamental strategy, be sure to keep a calendar
that highlights important dates so you know when these reports are released. Your broker may also
provide real-time access to such information.

5 ZC
Level 1 Forex Intro - Currency Trading
The foreign exchange market (forex or FX for short) is one of the largest, most exciting, fastest-paced
markets in the world. It seems to be easier to understand, compared to the stock market. Chances are
you've already tried it when you've gone on a trip to another country and exchanged some money.

Historically, only large financial institutions, corporations, central banks, hedge funds and extremely
wealthy individuals had the resources to participate in the forex market. However, now, with the
emergence and popularization of the internet and mainstream computing technology, it is possible for
average investors to buy and sellcurrencies with the click of a mouse from the comfort of their own
home.

If you follow the value of a currency, such as the American dollar (USD), you will know that daily
currency movements are usually very small. Most currency pairs, on average, move no more than 1
cent per day, which is less than a 1% change. Therefore, to make a respectable return, many currency
traders rely on the use of leverage (using margin) to increase their potential returns for small moves in
the exchange rate. In the retail forex market, leverage can be as high as 200:1 if you're trading with
less than $50,000 or as low as 50:1. For example, to trade $200,000 worth of currency, if the broker is
requiring 1% margin, you would only need $2,000 deposited to your account – giving you leverage of
100:1. This is not as risky as it sounds, because currencies don't fluctuate as much as stocks. (Learn
to cut out losses quickly, leaving profits room to grow, see Leverage's "Double-Edged Sword" Need
Not Cut Deep.)

The availability of leverage, and massive size of the market and the ease of making fast transactions
has increased the popularity of the forex market. Positions can be opened and closed instantaneously
at the exact price shown to you, and typically with no commission or transaction fees. Also, unlike the
stock market, in which one large buyer or seller can adversely move the stock price, currency prices
are much harder to manipulate because the sheer size of the market prevents any one player from
significantly moving the currency price. Currency prices are largely based on supply and demand.

Another reason why forex is so popular with traders is because the market is open 24 hrs, meaning
you can choose when you want to trade – regardless of whether you're a early bird or night owl. (For
more, see Where is the central location of the forex market?)

The very popular forex market also provides plenty of opportunity for investors. However, in order to
trade profitably in this market, currency traders have to take the time to learn about forex trading and
dedicate enough time to practice what they've learned.

This forex tutorial will provide new investors and traders with the knowledge needed to trade in the
forex market. This tutorial will cover the basics of the forex market and will slowly progress to more
advanced topics, such as forex strategies. For now, let's take a look at "pairs" and "quotes" in the next
section, and learn how to read them correctly.

Level 1 Forex Intro - Currencies

The majority of trading in forex is concentrated in the world's major financial centers, such
as London, New York and Tokyo. Average daily volume in these markets is enormous, exceeding $3
6 ZC
trillion! Typically, a lot of the activity in the forex market is done by central banks, hedge
funds, institutional investors and large corporations. But success in this market doesn't depend on how
big you are - it depends on your dedication to learning the fundamentals, good judgment, hard work
and some common sense. This section will introduce you to the major currencies in the forex market.

Each forex transaction involves two different trades: the purchase of one currency and the sale of
another. That is why forex quotes are quoted as a combination of two currencies, which is known as
a currency pair. While there are many possible currency pairs, the most heavily followed and traded
currencies are listed in the table below.

You may notice that the total market share adds to 200%, which is a result of currency pairs.

Currency Market Share

USD 83.7%

EUR 60%

GBP 15.3%

JPY 13.4%

CHF 9.5%

SEK 2.2%

AUD 2.1%

CAD 1.6%

Figure 1: The most heavily

traded currencies and
their market share

Source: BIS Triennial Survey,

2004

Not surprisingly, the U.S. dollar (USD) is the most followed and traded currency in the world, with
nearly 84% of the market share in 2004. Therefore, later on in this tutorial we examine the
relationships between the U.S. dollar and many of its major currency counterparts, such as
the euro and the yen. (Learn the essence of currency exchanging in How do I convert dollars to
pounds, euros to yen, or francs to dollars, etc.?)

In addition, although there are numerous currency pairs available, it can become extremely confusing
to try to follow and trade several currencies at one time. It is usually recommended to get to know one
major currency pair and practice trading that currency pair alone. But first, before you can begin to
analyze major currency pairs, you need to learn the basics of the market, such as learning to read a
Forex quote, which is discussed in the next section.
7 ZC
Level 1 Forex Intro - Reading A Quote
Most new investors in the forex market are usually confused with the way currency prices are quoted.
In this section, we'll take a look at currency quotations and see how they work in currency pair trades.

Reading a Quote
When you look at a currency quote, you'll notice that all currencies are quoted in a pair – for example,
USD/CAD or USD/JPY. The reason that currencies are quoted as a pair is because when you buy a
currency you are selling a different one as well. A sample forex quote for the U.S. dollar (USD) and
Japanese yen (JPY) would look like this:

USD/JPY = 119.50

This is the standard format for a currency pair. In this example, the currency to the left of the slash
(USD) is referred to as the base currency, and the currency on the right (JPY) is called the quote or
counter currency. This is important to remember. The base currency (in this case, the U.S. dollar) is
always equal to one unit (in this case, US$1), and the quoted currency (in this case, the Japanese yen)
is what that one base unit (USD) is equivalent to in the other currency (JPY).

This sample quote shows that if you wanted to buy US$1, you would have to pay 119.50 yen. Or if you
wanted to sell US$1, you would receive 119.50 yen. If instead of USD/JPY, this quote
read USD/CAD = 1.20, you would read it the exact same way. If you want to buy US$1, it will cost you
C$1.20, and if you wanted to sell US$1, you would get C$1.20. These exchange rates simply tell you
how much you will pay/receive if you buy/sell the "base" currency.

When you are buying the base currency (because maybe you think the base currency's value will go
up) and selling the quote currency, you are entering into a long position. If you instead sell the base
currency and buy the quote currency, you are going into a short position. So again, looking at the
USD/JPY example, if you buy the USD, you're going long; if you sell the USD, you are going short.

Bid and Ask

Like buying a stock in the stock market, when trading currency pairs, the forex quote will have a bid
price and an ask price. The bid and ask prices are always quoted in relation to the base currency.

When selling the base currency, the bid price is the price the dealer is willing to pay to buy the base
currency from you. Simply put, it's the price you'll receive if you sell.

When buying the base currency, the ask price is the price at which the dealer is willing to sell you the
base currency in exchange for the quote currency. Simply, when you want to buy a base currency, the
ask price is the price you're going to pay.

A typical currency quote can be seen below. The number before the slash (1.2000) is the bid price,
and the two digits after the slash (05) represent the ask price (1.2005) - only the last two digits of the
full price are usually quoted. The bid price will always be lower than ask price. This is how the dealers
make their money; they buy low and sell for a little bit higher.

USD/CAD = 1.2000/05
Bid = 1.2000

8 ZC
 Ask= 1.2005

If you wanted to buy the USD/CAD currency pair, you would be buying the base currency (U.S. dollars)
in exchange for the quote currency (Canadian dollars). You need to look at the ask price to see how
much (in Canadian dollars) the market is currently charging for U.S. dollars. According to this quote,
you will have to pay C$1.2005 to buy US$1.

To sell this USD/CAD currency pair, or sell the USD in other words, you need to look at the bid price to
see how much you are going to get. Looking at the bid price in this quote, it tells us you will receive
C$1.2000 if you sell US$1.

Level 1 Forex Intro - More On Quotes

Spreads and Pips
The difference between the bid price and the ask price in a forex quote is normally called the spread.
In the previous example: USD/CAD = 1.2000/05, the spread is 0.0005, or 5 pips. Pips, or points, is the
common name used to refer to incremental changes in a forex quote – a change from 1.2000 to
1.2001 would equal one pip. Although these currency movements may seem small, due to leverage
used in the forex market, small changes can result in large profits or losses.

With the major currency pairs such as the EUR/USD, USD/CAD, GBP/USD, one pip would be equal to
0.0001. However, if you take a look at a USD/JPY quote you'll notice the pair only goes to two decimal
places, so one pip would be 0.01. So, in general, a pip represents the last decimal place in the quote.

Currency Quote Overview

USD/CAD = 1.2000/05

Base Currency Currency to the left (USD)

Quote/Counter Currency Currency to the right (CAD)

Price for which the

market maker will buy
Bid Price 1.2000
the base currency. Bid is
always smaller than ask.

Price for which the

Ask Price 1.2005 market maker will sell the
base currency.

One point move, in

The pip/point is the
USD/CAD it is .0001 and 1
Pip smallest movement a
point change would be
price can make.
from 1.2000 to 1.2001

9 ZC
 Spread in this case is 5
pips/points, or the
Spread
difference between bid and
ask price (1.2005-1.2000).

Lots
Similar to how most stocks trade in lots to facilitate trading, currencies are also traded in lots –
$100,000 is typically the standard lot. There are also smaller lots with a size of $10,000 called mini-lots.
These may seem like large amounts but because currencies only move in small increments, only a few
pips at a time, a larger amount of currency is needed to generate any sizable profits or losses.

Direct Currency Quote vs. Indirect Currency Quote

You can quote a currency pair in two ways, either directly or indirectly. A direct currency quote is
simply a foreign exchange quote where the foreign currency is the base currency; an indirect quote is
a currency pair in which the domestic currency is the base currency. For example, if you're in Canada
and the Canadian dollar is the domestic currency, a direct quotation would take the form of a variable
amount of the domestic currency for a fixed amount of the foreign currency. A Canadian bank giving a
quote of "C$1.20 per US$1" would be a direct quote. Conversely, an indirect quote fixes the domestic
currency and varies the foreign currency. In the same example, if the Canadian bank gave a quote of
"C$1=US$0.83" it would be an indirect quote.

Cross Currency
A currency quote given without the U.S. dollar as part of the currency pair is called a cross
currency quote. Common cross currency pairs include the EUR/CHF, EUR/GBP and EUR/JPY.
Although having cross currencies increases the amount of choice for the investor in the forex market,
cross currencies are not as popular as ones that have the U.S. dollar as a component of the currency
pair.

Now that you know more about reading and interpreting a forex quote, in the next section we'll look
briefly at the economics and fundamentals behind forex trades and what economic indicators a new
trader should become familiar with and be able to interpret.

Level 1 Forex Intro - Economics

Similar to the stock market, traders in forex markets rely on two forms of analysis: technical
analysis and fundamental analysis. Technical analysis is used similarly in stocks as in forex, by
analyzing charts and indicators. Fundamental analysis is a bit different – while companies have
financial statements to analyze, countries have a swath of economic reports and indicators that need
to be analyzed.

In order to analyze how much you think a country's currency is worth, you need to evaluate the
economic situation of the country in order to more effectively trade currencies. In this section, we'll take
a look at some of the major economic reports that help traders study the economic situation of a
country.

Economic Indicators
Economic indicators are reports that detail a country's economic performance in a specific area. These
reports are usually published periodically by governmental agencies or private organizations. Although
there are numerous policies and factors that can affect a country's performance, the factors that are
10 ZC
directly measurable are included in these economic reports.

These reports are published periodically, so changes in the economic indicators can be compared to
similar periods. Economic reports typically have the same effect on currencies that earnings reports or
quarterly reports have on companies. In forex, like in most markets, if the report deviates from what
was expected by economists or analysts to happen, then it can cause large movements in the price of
the currency.

Below are some of the major economic reports and indicators used for fundamental analysis in the
forex market. You've probably heard of some of these indicators, such as the GDP, because many of
these also have a substantial effect on equity markets.

The Gross Domestic Product (GDP)

The GDP is considered by many to be the broadest measure of a country's economic performance. It
represents the total market value of all finished goods and services produced in a country in a given
year. Most traders don't actually focus on the final GDP report, but rather on the two reports issued a
few months before the final GDP: the advance GDP report and the preliminary report. This is because
the final GDP figure is frequently considered a lagging indicator, meaning it can confirm a trend but it
can't predict a trend, which is not very useful for traders looking to indentify a trend. In comparison to
the stock market, the GDP report is somewhat similar to the income statement a public company
reports at year end. Both give investors and traders an indication of the growth that occurred during
the period.

Retail Sales
The retail sales is a very closely watched report that measures the total receipts, or dollar value, of all
merchandise sold in retail stores in a given country. The report estimates the total merchandise sold by
taking sample data from retailers across the country. Because consumers represent more than two-
thirds of the economy, this report is very useful to traders to gauge the direction of the economy. Also,
because the report's data is based on the previous month sales, it is a timely indicator, unlike the GDP
report which is a lagging indicator. The content in the retail sales report can cause above normal
volatility in the market, and information in the report can also be used to gauge inflationary pressures
that affect Fed rates.

Industrial Production
The industrial production report, released monthly by the Federal Reserve, reports on the changes in
the production of factories, mines and utilities in the U.S. One of the closely watched measures
included in this report is the capacity utilization ratio which estimates the level of production activity in
the economy. It is preferable for a country to see increasing values of production and capacity
utilization at high levels. Typically, capacity utilization in the range of 82-85% is considered "tight" and
can increase the likelihood of price increases or supply shortages in the near term. Levels below 80%
are usually interpreted as showing "slack" in the economy which might increase the likelihood of a
recession.

Consumer Price Index (CPI)

The CPI is an economic indicator that measures the level of price changes in the economy, and is the
benchmark for measuring inflation. Using a basket of goods that is representative of the goods and
services in the economy, the CPI compares the price changes on this basket year after year. This
report is one of the more important economic indicators available, and its release can increase
volatility in equity, fixed income, and forex markets. The implications of inflation can be a critical
catalyst for movements in the forex market.

11 ZC
Conclusion
This is just a brief overview of some of the major reports you should be aware of as a new forex trader.
There are numerous other reports and factors that can affect a currency's value, but here are some
tips to keep in mind that will help you keep on top of your game.

Know when economic reports are due to be released. Keep a calendar of release dates on hand to
make sure you don't fall behind. Quite often, the markets will also be volatile before the release of a
major report based on expectations.

12 ZC
Level 2 Markets - Forex Brokers
Whenever you devote money to trading, it is important to take it seriously. When getting into the forex
(FX) market for the first time, it basically means starting from square one. But don't worry, you don't
have to be left in the dark when it comes to learning to trade currencies; unlike with some of the other
markets, there is a variety of free learning tools and resources available to light the way. For example,
you can become FX-savvy with the help of a variety of virtual demo accounts, mentoring services,
online courses, print and online resources, signal services and charts. With so much to choose from,
the question you're most likely to ask is, "Where do I start?" Here we cover the preliminary steps you
need to take to find your footing in the FX market.

Finding a Broker
Your first step is to pick a market maker with which to trade. Some are larger than the others, some
have tighter spreads while some offer additional bells and whistles. Each market maker has its own
advantages and disadvantages, but here are some of the key questions to ask when doing your due
diligence:

• Where is the FX market maker incorporated? Is it in a country such as

the U.S. or the U.K., or is it offshore?
• Is the FX market maker regulated? If so, in how many countries?
• How large is the market maker? How much excess capital does it have? How
many employees?
• Does the market maker have 24-hour telephone support?

In order to ensure that your money is safe and that you have a jurisdiction to appeal to in the event of a
bankruptcy, you should seek out a large market maker that is regulated in at least one or two major
countries (ie. USA, Britain, Canada). Furthermore, the larger the market maker, the more resources it
can put toward making sure that its trading platforms and servers remain stable and do not crash when
the market becomes very active. Third, you want a market maker with a larger employee base so
when placing trades over the phone you don't have to worry about getting a busy signal. Bottom line,
you want to find someone legitimate to trade with and avoid abucket shop. (For related reading,
see Understanding Dishonest Broker Tactics.)

Checking Their Stats

In the U.S., all registered futures commission merchants (FCMs) are required to meet
strict financial guidelines, including capital adequacy requirements, and are required to submit monthly
financial reports to regulators. You can visit the website of the Commodity Futures
Trading Commission (an independent agency of the U.S. government) to access the latest financial
statements of all registered FCMs in the U.S.

Another advantage of dealing with a registered FCM is greater transparency of their business practices.
The National Futures Association keeps records of all formal proceedings against FCMs, and traders
can find out if the firm has had any serious problems with clients or regulators by checking the
NFA's Background Affiliation Status Information Center (BASIC) online.

Level 2 Markets - Programs And Systems

Education and Mentoring Programs - Are They Worth It?
The benefit of online or live courses over books, newspapers and magazines is that you can get
answers to the questions that perplex you. Hearing or seeing other people's questions can be
extremely valuable, since no one person can think of every possible question. In a classroom setting,
either online or live, you can also learn from the experiences and frustrations of others. As for a mentor,
he or she can draw on personal experience and hopefully teach you to avoid the mistakes he or she
13 ZC
has made in the past, saving you both time and money.

What About Trading Systems and Signals?

Many traders wonder whether it is worthwhile to buy into a Forex signal system package. These
packages allow traders to make trades using a variety of inputs. Systems and signals fall into three
general categories depending on what they target: trend, range or fundamental. Fundamental systems
are very rare in the FX market; they are mostly used by large hedge funds or banks because
fundamental strategies tend to be long term in nature and do not give many trading signals. The
systems that are available to individual traders are typically trend systems or range systems - it is rare
to find a system that is able to exploit both markets, because if you do, then you have pretty much
found the holy grail of trading (which doesn't exist).

Even the largest hedge funds and Forex traders in the world are still looking for the software that can
tell them whether they are in a trend or a range-bound market. Most large hedge funds tend follow
trends. Generally, range-bound systems will only perform well in range-bound markets, while trend
systems will make money in trending markets and lose money in range-bound markets. So, when you
buy into a system or a signal provider, you should try to find out whether the signals are mostly range-
bound signals or trend signals. Although this advice seems straight forward, seasoned traders can
attest that it is easier said than done (To learn more, seeIdentifying Trending & Range-Bound
Currencies.)

Trading Setups - Finding What Works Best for You

All traders are different, but a good trading style is probably a combination of
both technical and fundamental analysis. Fundamentals can easily throw off technicals, while
technicals can explain movements that fundamentals cannot. Smart traders are the ones who are
aware of both the fundamentals and technicals behind every trade they make; combining both will
keep you out of as many bad trades as possible, and it works for both day traders and swing traders.
Most free charting packages have everything that a new trader needs, and many trading platforms
offer real-time news feeds to keep you up to date on economic news as well. (For further reading,
see Devising A Medium-Term Forex Trading Strategy.)

Learning to trade in the FX market can seem like a daunting task when you're just starting out, but
thanks to the many practical and educational resources available to new traders, it is not impossible.
Learning as much as possible before you put actual money into the markets should be number one in
your agenda. Print and online publications, trading magazines, personal mentors, online demo
accounts along with our Investopedia Forex indepth walkthrough can all act as invaluable guides on
your journey into currency trading. Now that you've got your feet wet in the Forex market, let's take a
look at the role leverage plays in the fx market.

Level 2 Markets - Research And Testing

When trading anything, you never want to trade impulsively. You need to be able to justify your trades,
and the best way to do that is by doing your research. There are many books, newspapers and other
publications with information about trading the FX market (but none better than the Invetopedia Forex
walkthrough you're using right now!). When choosing a source to consult, make sure it covers:

-The basics of the FX market

-Technical analysis
-Key fundamental news and events

Because the FX market is driven primarily by technical indicators (which we will discuss in detail later
in the FX walkthrough), the most important topic a new forex trader should study is technical analysis.
The better you get at technical analysis, the better you can trade the FX market. (For further reading,
see our Introduction To Technical Analysis.)

14 ZC
When it comes to newspapers, seasoned foreign exchange traders typically refer to publications which
contain a heavy helping of international news. Trading FX involves looking past simple economics,
since politics and geopolitical risks can also affect a currency's trading behavior, so it's important to
keep up with major non-financial news from across the globe. To build a solid foundation in FX trading
it is important to keep up to date with key fundamental and technical developments in the forex market.

Test Drive
Once you've found a broker, the next step is to take a test drive. The best way to test a brokerage's
software is by opening a demo account. The availability of demo or virtual trading accounts is
something unique to the forex market and one that you'll want to exploit to your advantage. The goal is
to learn how to use the trading platform and, while you're doing that, to find the trading platform that
best suits you. Most demo accounts have exactly the same functionalities as live accounts, with real-
time market prices. The only difference, of course, is that you are not trading with real money.

Demo trading allows you not only to make sure that you fully understand how to use the trading
platform and become comfortable with its ins and outs, but also to practice some trading strategies and
to make money in a paper account (virtual account) before you move on to a live account using real
money. In other words, it gives you a chance to get a feel for the FX market.

Level 2 Markets - Leverage

So we've explained the basic steps you need to take to get started in the forex market, now let's take a
closer look at leverage and its role in the market.

The leverage that is achievable in the forex market is one of the highest that individual investors can
obtain. Leverage is a loan that is provided to an investor by the broker that is handling his or her forex
account. Usually, the amount of leverage provided is either 50:1, 100:1 or 200:1, meaning your broker
will allow you to trade up to 200 times the amount of actual cash you wish to trade. Leverage amounts
vary depending on your broker and the size of the position you are trading. Standard trading is done
on 100,000 units (ie. dollars) of currency, so for a trade of this size, the leverage provided is usually
50:1 or 100:1. Leverage of 200:1 is usually used for positions of $50,000 or less.

To trade $100,000 of currency with a margin of 1%, an investor will only have to deposit $1,000 into
his or her margin account. The leverage provided on a trade like this is 100:1. Leverage of this size is
significantly larger than the 2:1 leverage commonly provided in the stock market and the 15:1 leverage
provided by the futures market. Although 100:1 leverage may seem extremely risky, the risk is
significantly less when you consider that currency prices usually change by less than 1% over the
course of a day. If currencies fluctuated as much as stocks, brokers would not be willing to provide
such large leverage amounts.

Although the ability to earn significant profits by using leverage is substantial, leverage can also work
against you. For example, if the currency behind one of your trades moves in the opposite direction of
what you believed would happen, leverage will greatly amplify the losses. To avoid such losses,
experienced forex traders usually implement a strict trading style that includes the use of stop and limit
orders (both of which we will discuss in depth later in our walkthrough). Now that we've learned about
leverage and the role it plays in the forex market, let's take look at some of the other risks associated
with forex.

Level 2 Markets - The Risks

So far we've looked at the basics of the forex market and how to get started and have examined the
role leverage plays in FX. Now we will examine some of the benefits and risks associated with forex
trading.

The Good and the Bad

15 ZC
A number of factors such as the size, volatility and global structure of the foreign exchange market
have all contributed to its rapid success. Given the high liquidity of the forex market, investors are able
to place extremely large trades without directly affecting any given exchange rate. These large
positions are made possible for forex traders because of the low margin requirements used by the
majority of brokers. As we previously discussed, it is possible for a trader to have a position of
US$100,000 by putting down as little as US$1,000 up front and borrowing the remainder from his or
her forex broker. This amount of leverage acts as a double-edged sword because investors can realize
large gains when exchange rates make a small favorable change, but they can also incur huge losses
when the rates move against them. Despite the foreign exchange risks, the amount of leverage
available in the forex market is what makes it attractive for many speculators. (For more on this,
see Forex Leverage: A Double-Edged Sword.)

The currency market is also the only market that is open 24 hours a day with a high degree of liquidity
throughout the day. For traders who may have a day job or just a busy schedule, it's a great market to
start trading in. As you can see from the chart below, the major trading centers are spread throughout
many different time zones, eliminating the need to wait for an opening or closing bell. As
the U.S. trading closes, other markets in the east are opening, making it possible to trade at any time
during the day.

Time Zone Time (ET)

Tokyo Open 7:00 pm

Tokyo Close 4:00 am

London Open 3:00 am

London Close 12:00 pm

New York Open 8:00 am

New York Close 5:00 pm

While the forex market may offer more excitement to investors, the risks are also higher in comparison
to trading stocks. The ultra-high leverage of the forex market means that huge gains can quickly turn to
equally huge losses and can wipe out the majority of your account in a matter of minutes. This is
important for all new traders to understand, because in the forex market - due to the large amount of
money involved and the number of players - traders react quickly to information released into the
market, leading to very quick moves in the price of the currency pair.

Although currencies don't tend to move as sharply as stocks on a percentage basis (unlike a
company's stock that can lose a large portion of its value in a matter of minutes after a bad
announcement), it is the leverage in the spot market that creates the volatility. For example, if you are
using 100:1 leverage on $1,000 invested, you basically control $100,000 in capital. If you put $100,000
into a currency and that currency's price moves 1% against you, the value of the capital will have
decreased to $99,000 - a loss of $1,000, or all of your original investment (that's a 100% loss!). In the
stock market, most traders do not use leverage, therefore, a 1% loss in the stock's value on a $1,000
investment would only mean a loss of $10. That being said, it is important to take into account the risks
involved in the forex market before diving in head first.

16 ZC
Level 2 Markets - Forex Vs. Stocks
Differences Between Forex and Equities
A major difference between the forex and equities markets is the number of trading alternatives
available: the forex market has very few compared to the thousands found in the stock market. The
majority of forex traders focus their efforts on seven different currency pairs. There are four "major"
currency pairs, which include EUR/USD, USD/JPY, GBP/USD, USD/CHF, and the three commodity
pairs, USD/CAD, AUD/USD, NZD/USD. Don't worry, we will discuss these pairs in detail in the next
portion of our forex walkthrough. All other pairs are just different combinations of the same currencies,
better known as cross currencies. This makes currency trading easier to follow because rather than
having to pick between 10,000 stocks to find the best value, the only thing FX traders need to do is
"keep up" on the economic and political news of these eight countries.

Quite often, the stock markets can hit a lull, resulting in shrinking volumes and activity. As a result, it
may be hard to open and close positions when you'd like to. Furthermore, in a declining market it is
only with extreme ingenuity and sometimes luck that an equities investor can make a profit. It is difficult
to short-sell in the U.S. stock market because of strict rules and regulations. On the other hand, forex
offers the opportunity to profit in both rising and declining markets because with every trade, you are
buying and selling at the same time, and short-selling is, therefore, a part of every trade. In addition,
since the forex market is so liquid, traders are not required to wait for an uptick before they are allowed
to enter into a short position, as is the rule in the stock market.

Due to the high liquidity of the forex market, margins are low and leverage is high. It just is not possible
to find such low margin rates in the stock market; most margin traders in the stock market need at
least half of the value of their investment available in their margin accounts, whereas forex traders
need as little as 1%. Furthermore, commissions in the stock market tend to be much, much higher than
in the forex market. Traditional stock brokers ask for commission fees on top of their spreads, plus the
fees that have to be paid to the exchange. Spot forex brokers take only the spread as their fee for each
trade.

By now you should have a basic understanding of what the forex market is, how it works and the
benefits and dangers all new forex traders should be aware of. Next we'll take a closer look at the
currency pairs that are most widely used by traders in the forex market.

Level 2 Markets - The Pairs

Ok, so you know what you need to do to get started in forex. You know the risk and the benefits. You
know how leverage can be a double-edged sword for forex traders. Now let's take a look at the
currencies that forex traders use to make their profits.

There are many official currencies that are used all over the world, but there only a handful of
currencies that are actively traded in the forex market. In currency trading, only the most economically
and politically stable and liquid currencies are traded in large quantities. For example, due to the size
and strength of the U.S. economy, the U.S. dollar is the most actively traded currency in the world.

In general, the eight most traded currencies (in no specific order) are the U.S. dollar (USD), the
Canadian dollar (CAD), the euro (EUR), the British pound (GBP), the Swiss franc (CHF), the New
Zealand dollar (NZD), the Australian dollar (AUD) and the Japanese yen (JPY).

As you already have learned, currencies must be traded in pairs. Mathematically, there are 27
different currency pairs that can be traded from those eight currencies alone. However, there are about
18 currency pairs that are most often quoted by forex market makers because of their overall liquidity.
These pairs are:

17 ZC
 EUR/CAD GBP/CHF

EUR/AUD GBP/USD

EUR/USD GBP/JPY

EUR/CHF AUD/USD

EUR/GBP AUD/JPY

EUR/JPY AUD/NZD

USD/CHF AUD/CAD

USD/CAD CHF/JPY

USD/JPY NZD/USD

The total amount of currency trading involving these 18 pairs represents the vast majority of the trading
volume in the overall FX market. This relatively small number of choices makes trading a lot less
complicated compared to dealing with stocks, where choices number in the thousands.

Now that you've learned about the major currencies that are traded on the forex market you might think
you're ready to jump in head first and start trading. Well slow down, because you can't know where
you're going until you know where you've been. Let's take a look at the history of the forex market and
get to know the major players in today's market.

Level 2 Markets - History Of The Forex

We've learned a lot thus far and it's almost time to start trading, but given the global nature of the forex
exchange market, it's important to first examine and learn some of the important historical events
relating to currencies and currency exchange. In this section we'll take a look at the international
monetary system and how it has evolved to its current state. Then we'll take a look at the major players
that occupy the forex market - something that is important for all potential forex traders to understand.

The History of the Forex

Gold Standard System

The creation of the gold standard monetary system in 1875 is one of the most important events in the
history of the forex market. Before the gold standard was created, countries would commonly use gold
and silver as method of international payment. The main issue with using gold and silver for payment
is that the value of these metals is greatly affected by global supply and demand. For example, the
discovery of a new gold mine would drive gold prices down.

The basic idea behind the gold standard was that governments guaranteed the conversion of currency
into a specific amount of gold, and vice versa. In other words, a currency was backed by gold.

18 ZC
Obviously, governments needed a fairly substantial gold reserve in order to meet the demand for
currency exchanges. During the late nineteenth century, all of the major economic countries had
pegged an amount of currency to an ounce of gold. Over time, the difference in price of an ounce of
gold between two currencies became the exchange rate for those two currencies. This represented the
first official means of currency exchange in history.

The gold standard eventually broke down during the beginning of World War I. Due to the political
tension with Germany, the major European powers felt a need to complete large military projects, so
they began printing more money to help pay for these projects. The financial burden of these projects
was so substantial that there was not enough gold at the time to exchange for all the extra currency
that the governments were printing off.

Although the gold standard would make a small comeback during the years between the wars, most
countries had dropped it again by the onset of World War II. However, gold never stopped being the
ultimate form of monetary value.

Bretton Woods System

Before the end of World War II, the Allied nations felt the need to set up a monetary system in order to
fill the void that was left when the gold standard system was abandoned. In July 1944, more than 700
representatives from the Allies met in Bretton Woods, New Hampshire, to deliberate over what would
be called the Bretton Woods system of international monetary management.

To simplify, Bretton Woods led to the formation of the following:

• A method of fixed exchange rates;

• The U.S. dollar replacing the gold standard to become a primary reserve currency; and
• The creation of three international agencies to oversee economic activity: the International
Monetary Fund (IMF), International Bank for Reconstruction and Development, and the General
Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT).

The main feature of Bretton Woods was that the U.S. dollar replaced gold as the main standard of
convertibility for the world's currencies. Furthermore, the U.S. dollar became the only currency in the
world that would be backed by gold. (This turned out to be the primary reason why Bretton Woods
eventually failed.)

Over the next 25 or so years, the system ran into a number of problems. By the early 1970s, U.S. gold
reserves were so low that the U.S. Treasury did not have enough gold to cover all the U.S. dollars that
foreign central banks had in reserve.

Finally, on August 15, 1971, U.S. President Richard Nixon closed the gold window, essentially refusing
to exchange U.S. dollars for gold. This event marked the end of Bretton Woods.

Even though Bretton Woods didn't last, it left an important legacy that still has a significant effect today.
This legacy exists in the form of the three international agencies created in the 1940s: the International
Monetary Fund, the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (now part of the World
Bank) and the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), which led to the World Trade
Organization.

Current Exchange Rates

After the Bretton Woods system broke down, the world finally adopted the use of floating foreign
exchange rates during the Jamaica agreement of 1976. This meant that the use of the gold standard
would be permanently abandoned. However, that doesn't mean that governments adopted a purely
free-floating exchange rate system. Most governments today use one of the following three exchange
rate systems:

19 ZC
 • Dollarization
• Pegged rate
• Managed floating rate

Dollarization
Dollarization occurs when a country decides not to issue its own currency and uses a foreign currency
as its national currency. Although dollarization usually allows a country to be seen as a more stable
place for investment, the downside is that the country's central bank can no longer print money or
control the country's monetary policy. One example of dollarization is El Salvador's use of the U.S.
dollar.

Pegged Rates
Pegging is when one country directly fixes its exchange rate to a foreign currency so that the country
will have somewhat more stability than a normal float. More specifically, pegging allows a country's
currency to be exchanged at a fixed rate. The currency will only fluctuate when the pegged currencies
change.

For example, China pegged its yuan to the U.S. dollar at a rate of 8.28 yuan to US$1, between 1997
and July 21, 2005. The downside to pegging is that a currency's value is at the mercy of the pegged
currency's economic situation. For example, if the U.S. dollar appreciates substantially against all other
currencies, the Chinese yuan will also appreciate, which may not be what the Chinese central bank
wants, since China relies heavily on its low-cost exports.

Managed Floating Rates

This type of system is created when a currency's exchange rate is allowed to freely fluctuate subject to
supply and demand. However, the government or central bank may intervene to stabilize extreme
fluctuations in exchange rates. For example, if a country's currency is depreciating very quickly, the
government may raise short-term interest rates. Raising rates should cause the currency to appreciate
slightly; but understand that this is a very simplified example. Central banks can typically employ a
number of tools to manage currency.

Level 2 Markets - Market Participants

Unlike the stock market - where investors often only trade with institutional investors (such as mutual
funds) or other individual investors - there are more parties that trade on the forex market for
completely different reasons than those in the stock market. Therefore, it is very important to identify
and understand the functions and motivations of these main players in the forex market.

Governments and Central Banks

Probably the most influential participants involved in the forex market are the central banks and federal
governments. In most countries, the central bank is an extension of the government and conducts its
policy in unison with the government. However, some governments feel that a more independent
central bank is more effective in balancing the goals of managing inflation and keeping interest rates
low, which usually increases economic growth. No matter the degree of independence that a central
bank may have, government representatives usually have regular meetings with central bank
representatives to discuss monetary policy. Thus, central banks and governments are usually on the
same page when it comes to monetary policy.

Central banks are often involved in maintaining foreign reserve volumes in order to meet certain
economic goals. For example, ever since pegging its currency (the yuan) to the U.S. dollar, China has
been buying up millions of dollars worth of U.S.Treasury bills in order to keep the yuan at its target
exchange rate. Central banks use the foreign exchange market to adjust their reserve volumes. They
have extremely deep pockets, which allow them to have a significant impact on the currency markets.

20 ZC
Banks and Other Financial Institutions
Along with central banks and governments, some of the largest participants involved with forex
transactions are banks. Most people who need foreign currency for small-scale transactions, like
money for travelling, deal with neighbourhood banks. However, individual transactions pale in
comparison to the dollars that are traded between banks, better known as the interbank market. Banks
make currency transactions with each other on electronic brokering systems that are based on credit.
Only banks that have credit relationships with each other can engage in transactions. The larger banks
tend to have more credit relationships, which allow those banks to receive better foreign exchange
prices. The smaller the bank, the fewer credit relationships it has and the lower the priority it has on the
pricing scale.

Banks, in general, act as dealers in the sense that they are willing to buy/sell a currency at the bid/ask
price. One way that banks make money on the forex market is by exchanging currency at a higher
price than they paid to obtain it. Since the forex market is a world-wide market, it is common to see
different banks with slightly different exchange rates for the same currency.

Hedgers
Some of the biggest clients of these banks are international businesses. Whether a business is selling
to an international client or buying from an international supplier, it will inevitably need to deal with the
volatility of fluctuating currencies.

If there is one thing that management (and shareholders) hates, it's uncertainty. Having to deal with
foreign-exchange risk is a big problem for many multinational corporations. For example, suppose that
a German company orders some equipment from a Japanese manufacturer that needs to be paid in
yen one year from now. Since the exchange rate can fluctuate in any direction over the course of a
year, the German company has no way of knowing whether it will end up paying more or less euros at
the time of delivery.

One choice that a business can make to reduce the uncertainty of foreign-exchange risk is to go into
the spot market and make an immediate transaction for the foreign currency that they need.

Unfortunately, businesses may not have enough cash on hand to make such transactions in the spot
market or may not want to hold large amounts of foreign currency for long periods of time. Therefore,
businesses quite often employ hedging strategies in order to lock in a specific exchange rate for the
future, or to simply remove all exchange-rate risk for a transaction.

For example, if a European company wants to import steel from the U.S., it would have to pay for this
steel in U.S. dollars. If the price of the euro falls against the dollar before the payment is made, the
European company will end up paying more than the original agreement had specified. As such, the
European company could enter into a contract to lock in the current exchange rate to eliminate the risk
of dealing in U.S. dollars. These contracts could be either forwards or futures contracts.

Speculators
Another class of participants in forex is speculators. Instead of hedging against changes in exchange
rates or exchanging currency to fund international transactions, speculators attempt to make money by
taking advantage of fluctuating exchange-rate levels.

George Soros is one of the most famous currency speculators. The billionaire hedge fund manager is
most famous for speculating on the decline of the British pound, a move that earned $1.1 billion in less
than a month. On the other hand, Nick Leeson, a trader with England's Barings Bank, took speculative
positions on futures contracts in yen that resulted in losses amounting to more than $1.4 billion, which
led to the collapse of the entire company.

The largest and most controversial speculators on the forex market are hedge funds, which are
essentially unregulated funds that use unconventional and often very risky investment strategies to
21 ZC
make very large returns. Think of them as mutual funds on steroids. Given that they can take such
large positions, they can have a major effect on a country's currency and economy. Some critics
blamed hedge funds for the Asian currency crisis of the late 1990s, while others have pointed to the
ineptness of Asian central bankers. Either way, speculators can have a big impact on the forex market.

Now that you have a basic understanding of the forex market, its participants and its history, we can
move on to some of the more advanced concepts that will bring you closer to being able to trade within
this massive market. The next section will look at the main economic theories that underlie the forex
market.

22 ZC
Level 3 Trading - Trading Currencies
So, now you understand what the forex market is and how to read a quote, which is great. Now comes
the time to learn how to put that info to use. Though you may feel a little intimidated trading currencies
at first, you'll see how easy it can be after a few orders have been placed.

Trading
One unique aspect of this huge international market is that there is no central marketplace for foreign
exchange. The majority of regular stocks trade on defined markets like the New York Stock Exchange.
Currency trading, on the other hand, is conducted electronically over-the-counter (OTC), meaning all
transactions around the world occur via computer networks between traders, rather than on one
centralized exchange. The market is open five and a half days a week, 24 hours a day.

Spot Market and the Forwards and Futures Markets

There are actually three ways that institutions, corporations and individuals trade forex: the spot
market, the forwards market and the futures market. Don't worry, it isn't as complicated as you might
think. Let's start with the spot market, which always has been the largest forex market because it is
what the other two (forwards and futures) markets are based on. In fact, when people refer to the forex
market, they are usually actually talking about the spot market.

The Spot Market

The spot market is simply where currencies are bought and sold, according to the current price. That
price determined by supply and demand, and is a reflection of many things, such as:

• Current interest rates offered on loans

• Economic performance of countries
• Ongoing political situations (both internationally and locally)
• The perception of the future performance of one currency compared to another

A completed deal is known as a "spot deal." It is a bilateral transaction by which one party sells some
specified amount of currency and receives a specified amount of another currency in cash. Although
the spot market is thought of as transactions in the present, these trades actually take two days for
settlement. For example, Bob buys 3,000 U.S. dollars with 4,000 Australian dollars.

The Forwards and Futures Markets

Unlike the spot market, the forwards and futures do what their names suggest, for delivery in the future.
Also unlike the spot market, instead of buying the currency at today's price and getting it now, these
contracts allow you to lock in a currency type, price per unit and a date in the future for settlement.

In the forwards market, contracts are bought and sold over the counter between two parties who have
determined the terms of the agreement between themselves.

In the futures market, futures contracts are bought and sold on an exchange, such as the Chicago
Mercantile Exchange, and are based upon a standard size and delivery date. The National Futures
Association regulates the futures market in the U.S. The contracts have specific details, including the
number of units, settlement and delivery dates, and minimum price increments that cannot be
customized. Both types of contracts are binding and, upon expiry, are typically settled for cash,
although contracts can also be bought and sold before they expire. The exchange acts as a
counterpart to the trader, providing clearance and settlement. (For more, check out Futures
Fundamentals.)

Putting Theory into Practice

Speculators may take part in these markets, and the forwards and futures markets can reduce the risk
when exchanging currencies.
23 ZC
For example, let's say "CompanyUSA," based in the U.S., agreed sell a machine for 200 million euros.
It will take one year to build the machine and deliver it. CompanyUSA will receive 200 million euros,
but if the euro losses value against the USD during that time, when converted they will not be worth as
much. These markets could be used in order to hedge against future exchange rate fluctuations.

- If received today, 200 million euros at 1.6393 USD/EUR = $122 million

- Risk of euro losing value: 200 million euros at 1.7391 USD/EUR = $115 million

CompanyUSA could enter into a futures contract to deliver 200 million euros at an acceptable
exchange (1.6529 USD/EUR), thus, the company is guaranteed 121 million, and could hedge against
the risk of receiving substantially less.

This is a basic example of a futures contract, and more in depth explanations will come later. Investors
usually want to know more about what to look for to make trading decisions. Next up is a look at
charting patterns that could point you in the right direction.

Level 3 Trading - Chart Basics (Candlesticks)

Now that you have some experience and understanding in currency trading, we will starting discussing
a few basic tools that forex traders frequently use. Due to the fast paced nature and leverage available
in forex trading, many forex traders do not hold positions for very long. For example, forex day traders
may initiate a large number of trades in a single day, and may not hold them any longer than a few
minutes each. When dealing with such small time horizons, viewing a chart and using technical
analysis are efficient tools, because a chart and associated patterns can indicate a wealth of
information in a small amount of time. In this section, we will discuss the "candlestick chart" and the
importance of identifying trends. In the next lesson, we'll get into a common chart pattern called the
"head and shoulders."

Candlestick Charts
While everyone is used to seeing the conventional line charts found in everyday life, the candlestick
chart is a chart variant that has been used for around 300 years and discloses more information than
your conventional line chart. The candlestick is a thin vertical line showing the period's trading range. A
wide bar on the vertical line illustrates the difference between the open and close.

The daily candlestick line contains the currency's value at open, high, low and close of a specific day.
The candlestick has a wide part, which is called the "real body". This real body represents the range
between the open and close of that day's trading. When the real body is filled in or black, it means the
close was lower than the open. If the real body is empty, it means the opposite: the close was higher
than the open.

Just above and below the real body are the "shadows." Chartists have always thought of these as the
wicks of the candle, and it is the shadows that show the high and low prices of that day's trading.
When the upper shadow (the top wick) on a down day is short, the open that day was closer to the
high of the day. And a short upper shadow on an up day dictates that the close was near the high. The
relationship between the day's open, high, low and close determine the look of the daily candlestick.

24 ZC
After viewing it, it is easy to see the wealth of information displayed on each candlestick. At just a
glance, you can see where a currency's opening and closing rates, its high and low, and also whether
it closed higher than it opened. When you see a series of candlesticks, you are able to see another
important concept of charting: the trend.

Level 3 Trading - Chart Basics (Trends)

When a collection of data points are plotted on a chart, you may start seeing the general direction in
which a currency paid is headed towards. In some cases, the trend is easily identified. For example,
the chart clearly shows that the currency pair is rising over time:

Figure 1

On the other hand, there will be instances where trend is much more difficult to identify:

25 ZC
 Figure 2

Therefore, more commonly, trends tend to operate in a series of gradually moving highs and lows.
Thus, an uptrend is a series of escalating highs and lows, while a downtrend is a series of descending
lows and highs.

Figure 3

Figure 3 is an example of an uptrend. For this to remain an uptrend, each successive low must not fall
below the previous lowest point or the trend, if it does, it is deemed a reversal.

Types of Trend
There are three types of trend: Uptrends, Downtrends and Sideways/Horizontal Trends (The latter
occurs when there is minimal movement up or down in the peaks and troughs). Some chartists
consider that a sideways trend is actually not a trend on its own, but a lack of a well-defined trend in
either direction.

Trend Lengths
Along with these three trend directions, there are three trend classifications that have to do with time
26 ZC
duration in which the trend is taking place. A trend of any direction can be classified as either a long-
term trend, an intermediate trend or a short-term trend. For forex trading, a long-term trend is
composed of several intermediate trends. The short-term trends are components of both major and
intermediate trends.

Take a look a Figure 4 to get a sense of how these three trend lengths might look.

Figure 4

Trendlines
Trendlines represent a charting technique, which a line is added to represent the trend in a currency
pair. Drawing a trendline is as simple as drawing a straight line that follows a general trend. Trendlines
can also be used in identifying trend reversals.

As you can see in Figure 5, an upward trendline is drawn at the lows of an upward trend. Notice how
the price is propped up by this level of support. You can now see how this trendline can be used by
traders to estimate the point at which a currency pair will begin moving upwards. Similarly, a downward
trendline is drawn at the highs of the downward trend. This will indicate the resistance level that a
currency pair experiences when price moves from a low to a high. (To read more, see Support &
Resistance Basics and Support And Resistance Zones - Part 1 and Part 2.)

27 ZC
 Figure 5

It is important to be able to understand and identify trends so that you can trade and profit from the
general direction in which a currency pair is heading rather than lose money by acting against them.
Now that you know a little about candlestick charts and trend, we can introduce you to one of the most
popular chart patterns: Head and Shoulders.

Level 3 Trading - Chart Basics (Head and

Shoulders)
Head and Shoulders
Two of the underlying assumptions behind the validity of using charts and chart patterns are that prices
operate in trends and that history will inevitably repeat itself. Therefore, there is value in viewing the
price movements of past currency pairs to forecast what the currency pair will do in the future. This is
conceptually similar to weather forecasting.

The head-and-shoulders pattern is one of the more popular and reliable chart patterns. And from the
name, the pattern somewhat looks like a head with two shoulders.

Figure 1: Head-and-shoulders pattern

The standard head-and-shoulders top pattern is a signal that a currency pair is set to fall once the
pattern is complete, and is usually formed at the peak of an upward trend. A second version called the
head-and-shoulders bottom (or inverse head and shoulders), signals that a security's price is set to
rise and usually forms during adownward trend. In either case, the head and shoulders indicates an
upcoming reversal, so this means that the a currency pair is likely to move against the previous trend.

Neckline
Both of the head and shoulders have a similar construction in that there are four main parts to the
28 ZC
head-and-shoulder chart pattern: two shoulders, a head and a neckline. The patterns are confirmed
when the neckline is broken, after the formation of the second shoulder. The head and shoulders are
sets of peaks and troughs. The neckline is a level of support or resistance. An upward trend, for
example, is seen as a period of successive rising peaks and rising troughs. A downward trend, on the
other hand, is a period of falling peaks and troughs. The head-and-shoulders pattern illustrates a
weakening in a trend where there is deterioration in the peaks and troughs.

Head and Shoulders Top

This pattern has four main sequential steps for it to complete itself and signal the reversal.

1. The formation of the left shoulder is formed when the security reaches a new high and retraces to a
new low.

2. The formation of the head occurs when the security reaches a higher high, then falls back near the
low formed in the left shoulder.

3. The formation of the right shoulder formed with a high that is lower than the high formed in the head
but is again followed by a fall back to the low of the left shoulder.

4. The price falls below the neckline. In order words, the price falls below the support line formed at the
level of the lows reached at each of the three lows mentioned previously.

Inverse Head and Shoulders (Head-and-Shoulders Bottom)

The inverse head-and-shoulders pattern is the exact opposite of the head-and-shoulders top, because
it indicates that the currency paid is set to make a move upwards.

Figure 2: Inverse head-and-shoulders pattern

Again, there are four steps to this pattern.

1. Formation of the left shoulder occurs when the price initially falls to a new low and then
subsequently rallies to a high.

2. The formation of the head occurs when the price moves to a low that is below the previously
mentioned shoulder's low, followed by a return to the previous high. This move back to the previous
high creates the neckline for this chart pattern.

29 ZC
3. The formation of the right shoulder. This is typically a sell-off that is less severe than the one from
the previous head. This is followed by a return to the neckline.

4. The currency pair breaks above of the neckline. The pattern is complete when the price moves
above the neckline created by the previous heads and shoulders.

The Breaking of the Neckline and the Potential Return Move

After the fourth step (when the neckline is broken), the currency pair should be heading in a new
direction. It is at this point when most traders following the pattern would enter into a position.

However, there is one scenario where this might not happen and the currency pair subsequently
returns back to the previous trend. This is known as a "throwback" move, which occurs when the price
breaks through the neckline, setting a new high or low, but then retreats back to the neckline.

Figure 3: Throwback move illustration

While it may be an issue to see a currency pair return to its original trend, it might not be a serious
concern. The throwback could be a successful test of the new level of support or resistance, which
would ultimately help to strengthen the pattern and further confirm its new trend. So, some patience is
required in order to wait for the pattern to test out and not close the position out too quickly - before the
pattern makes its bigger moves.

Conclusion
The goal of this portion of the walkthrough was to expose you to some of the basic technical analysis
tools that are used by forex traders. Candlestick charts are commonly used as they are able to reveal
a wealth of data at just a glance. Figuring out a currency pair's current trend can to be a good indicator
of where it will go for the near future. Chart pattern can be used to forecast and confirm upcoming
trends. For example, the head and shoulders patterns can indicate that a currency pair will be
undergoing a reversal in its trend. While charts and chart patterns are a big part of forex trading, it is
still important learn about some of the fundamentals behind forex and currencies. In the next section,
we will expose a little bit behind the basic economic theories involved in forex trading.

30 ZC
Level 3 Trading - Economic Basics
Economic Data
Charting and chart patterns provide a way for you to identify trading opportunities based on trader
psychology. Likewise, a shift in the fundamentals of a country's economic state will definitely have an
impact on its currency's value. Therefore on a day-to-day or week-to-week basis, economic data has a
very significant impact on a currency's value. More specifically, changes in interest
rates, inflation, unemployment, consumer confidence, gross domestic product (GDP), political stability
etc. can all lead to extremely large gains/losses depending on the nature of the announcement and the
current state of the country. If you didn't understand any of the terms in that last sentence, don't worry
it will be explained next.

Listed below are a number of economic indicators that are generally considered to have the greatest
influence - regardless of which country the announcement comes from.

Employment Data
On a regular basis, the majority of countries release data about the quantity of people employed. In
the U.S., the Bureau of Labor Statistics releases employment data in a report called the non-farm
payrolls, on the first Friday of each month. Generally, sharp increases in employment indicate
prosperous economic growth. Likewise, potential contractions may be imminent if significant
decreases occur. While these are general trends, it is important to consider the current position of the
economy. For example, strong employment data could cause a currency to appreciate if the country
has recently been through economic troubles, because the growth could be a sign of economic health
and recovery. Conversely, in an overheated economy, high employment can also lead to inflation,
which in this situation could move the currency downward.

Inflation
Inflation data indicates the change of price levels over a period of time. Due to the sheer amount of
goods and services within an economy, a basket of goods and services is used to measure changes in
prices. American inflation data is represented with the Consumer Price Index (CPI), which is released
on a monthly basis by the Bureau of Labor Statistics. Greater than expected price increases are
considered a sign of inflation, which will likely cause the country's underlying currency to depreciate.

Gross Domestic Product

A country's gross domestic product (GDP) is a total of all the finished goods and services that a
country has generated during a given period. GDP is calculated from private consumption, government
spending, business spending and total net exports. American GDP information is released by the
Bureau of Economic Analysis once monthly during the latter end of the month. GDP is often
considered the best overall indicator of an economy's health, because GDP increases signal positive
economic growth.

The healthier a country's economy, the more attractive it is for foreign investors to invest into the
country. The increased demand for the country's currency will ultimately increase the value of its
currency.

Retail Sales
Retail sales data indicates the amount of retailer sales that are generated during a period of time. This
figure serves as a proxy of consumer spending levels. The measure uses the sales data from a group
of different stores to get an idea of consumer spending. The strength of the economy can also be
determined, as increased spending signals a strong economy. American retail sales data is reported
by the Department of Commerce during the middle of each month.

Macroeconomic and Geopolitical Events

31 ZC
The biggest changes in the forex market often come from macroeconomic and geopolitical events
such as wars, elections, monetary policy changes and financial crises. These events have the ability to
change or reshape the country, including its fundamentals. For example, wars can put a huge
economic strain on a country and greatly increase the volatility in a region, which could impact the
value of its currency. It is important to keep up to date on these macroeconomic and geopolitical
events.

There is so much data that is released in the forex market that it can be very difficult for the average
individual to know which data to follow. Despite this, it is important to know what news releases will
affect the currencies you trade.

Conclusion
Now that you know a little more about some of the general economy news events that can affect a
currency, we will next focus upon learning in depth about one specific aspect of a country's economic
status. Interest rates are one of the most watch economic indicators by forex traders.

Level 3 Trading - Interest Rates

One important influence that drives forex is the interest rate changes from eight of the world's most
important central banks. Interest rate shifts represent a monetary, policy-based response as a result
of economic indicators that assess the health of an economy. Most importantly, they possess the
power to move the market immediately as one aspect of a country's fundamentals have now suddenly
changed. Moreover, surprise rate changes may often make the biggest impact because these volatile
moves can lead to quicker responses and higher profit levels. (Read Get To Know The Major Central
Banks for background on these financial institutions.)

Interest Rate Basics

Interest rates impact currencies in the following manner: the greater the rate of return, the greater the
interest accrued on currency invested and the higher the profit.

Therefore, it is a valid strategy to borrow currencies with a lower interest rate in order to buy currencies
that have a higher interest rate (This strategy is also known as the carry trade). However there is the
risk that currency fluctuation may offset any interest-bearing rewards. If trading on the forex market
were this easy, it would be highly lucrative for anyone armed with this knowledge.

How Rates Are Calculated

Each central bank's board of directors controls the monetary policy of its country and the short-term
prime interest rate that banks use to borrow from each other. When the economy is doing well, interest
rates are hiked in order to curb inflation and when times are tough, cut rates to encourage lending and
inject money into the economy.

Forex traders can gain clues into what the central bank (such as the U.S. Federal Reserve) will do by
examining economic indicators mentioned in the previous section, such as:

• The Consumer Price Index (CPI): Inflation

• Retail Sales: Consumer spending
• Non-farm Payrolls: Employment levels

(Read more about the CPI and other signposts of economic health in our Economic Indicators tutorial.)

Predicting Central Bank Rates

Using the data from these indicators and a rough assessment of the economy, a trader can create an
estimate for the Fed's rate change. Generally speaking, as the indicators improve and the economy is
32 ZC
doing well, rates will either need to be raised or, if the improvement is small, maintained. Likewise,
significant drops in these indicators can mean a rate cut in order to encourage borrowing.

Beyond traditional economic indicators, there are two other areas that should be examined.

1. Major Announcements
Whenever the board of directors from a central bank is scheduled to make a public announcement, it
will usually give some insight into how the bank views inflation.

For example, on July 16, 2008, U.S. Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke gave his semi-annual
monetary policy testimony before the House Committee. As per a regular testimony, he read a
prepared statement about the U.S. dollar's value and answered questions from committee members.
(Read more about the head of the Fed in Ben Bernanke: Background And Philosophy.)

In general, Bernanke reported the U.S. dollar was in good shape and that the government was
determined to stabilize it despite the looming fears of an impending recession that were influencing all
other markets.

The 10am session (the 14:00 UTC point on the chart on figure 1) was widely followed by traders. Since
the outlook was positive for the U.S. dollar, it was implied that the Federal Reserve would be raising
interest rates soon. This caused the dollar to appreciate over the Euro.

Figure 1: The EUR/USD declines in response to Fed\'s monetary policy testimony

Source: DailyFX

The EUR/USD declined 44 points over the course of one hour (good for the U.S. dollar), which would
result in a $440 per lot profit for traders who acted on the announcement.

2. Forecast Analysis
Analyzing professional predictions can also be used to predict interest rate decisions. Since interest
rates moves tend to be well anticipated before hand, major brokerages, financial institutions and
professional traders will have a consensus estimate as to what the rate is.

A good rule of thumb for traders is to take four or five of these forecasts (which tend be very close
numerically) and average them in order to gain a more accurate prediction.
33 ZC
What to Do When a Surprise Rate Occurs
On occasion, central banks can throw a curve ball and knock all predictions out of the park with a
surprise rate hike or cut.

When this happens, you should know which direction the market will move. If there is a rate hike, the
currency will appreciate, which means that traders will be buying it. If there is a cut, traders will
probably be selling it and buying currencies with higher interest rates. Once you have determined this:

· Act quickly! Forex tends to move at lightning speeds when a surprise hits, because all traders will be
competing in hopes of entering into a position (buy or sell depending on hike or cut) ahead of the
masses. Doing so can lead to a significant profit if done correctly.

· Be aware of a volatile trend reversal. A trader's perception/emotions often affects the market at the
onset of the data's release, but then logic comes into play and the trend will most likely continue back
on its original path.

The following example illustrates the above three steps in action.

In July 2008, New Zealand's interest rate was 8.25%. For much of the previous quarter, the rate had
been steady. The higher rate of return made the New Zealand Dollar (NZD) was a popular currency for
buying.

In July, despite all other previous indications, the central bank decided to cut the rate to 8%. While the
0.25% drop seems minor, this move was interpreted as a sign that the central bank had fears of
inflation. Traders started to sell the NZD.

Figure 2: The NZD/USD drops in response to a rate cut by the Bank of New Zealand

Source: DailyFX

In about 10 minutes, the NZD/USD dropped from .7497 to .7414 - a total of 83 pips. Lucky traders that
managed to sell just one lot of the currency pair would have profited $833.

This depreciation in NZD was relatively short-lived. It didn't take too longer before it returned back to its
original upward trend. It was likely that traders realized that despite the rate cut, an interest rate of 8%
was still higher than most other currencies.

Conclusion
Paying close attention to the news and analyzing the actions of central banks should be an important
priority to forex traders. Changes in monetary policy will ultimately cause currency exchange rates to
34 ZC
change. Understanding and anticipating these moves will allow you to identify trading opportunities.

Now that we touched upon one of the important news events, we will now discuss how to properly read
and analyze a news release.

Level 3 Trading - Entering A Trade

When you place orders with a forex broker, it is extremely important that you know how to place them
appropriately. Like the stock market, there are numerous different order types that can be used to
control your trade and improper use of order types can adversely affect your entry and exit points.
Orders should be placed according to how you are going to trade - that is, how you intend to enter and
exit the market. In this article, we'll cover some of the most common forex order types.

Types of Orders:
Market Order
This is the simplest and most common type of forex order. A market order is used when you want to
execute an order at the current price immediately. If you are buying, a market order would execute the
trade at the current ask price and if you are selling, the market order would execute at the bid price.

Entry Order
In contrast to a market order, this type of order will execute your trade once the currency pair reaches
a target price that you specified. These types of orders simply tell the system, for instance, that you
only want to buy the currency pair at a specific price, and if it doesn't reach your target price you don't
want to purchase it.

Stop Order
A stop order is an order that becomes a market order once the price you specified is reached; they are
normally used to limit potential losses. Stop orders can be used to either enter a new position or to exit
an existing one automatically. If using a stop order to enter into a position, it is called a buy-stop
order and gives instruction to buy a currency pair at the market price once the market reaches your
specified price or higher, which is higher than the current market price. If using a stop order to exit a
trade, it is called a sell-stop order and gives instruction to sell the currency pair at the market price
once the market reaches your specified price or lower, which is lower than the current market price.
Some common ways stop orders are used are listed below:

1. Stop orders are commonly used to enter a market when you trade breakouts.
For example, suppose that the USD/CHF is trading in a tight range, and based on your analysis,
you think it will trend higher if it breaks through a certain resistance level. So instead of sitting at
you computer waiting for the price to hit the resistance level and hitting buy, you can enter a
buy-stop order that will execute a market order for the currency pair once it hits that resistance
level. If the actual price later reaches or surpasses your specified price, this will open your long
position.
2. Stop orders are used to limit your losses.
Before you even enter a trade, you should already have an idea of where you are going to exit
your position or how much you are willing to lose. One of the most effective and popular ways
of limiting your losses is through a pre-determined stop order, or stop-loss.

If you had bought the pair USD/CHF, you were hoping its value would increase. But if the
market turns against you, you should set stop loss orders in order to control your potential
losses. By entering a stop-loss order, you are giving instructions to automatically close your
long position in USD/CHF if the price falls below a certain level.

35 ZC
 3. Stop orders can be used to protect profits.
Alternatively, instead of using a stop order to just limit your losses, you can also use it to exit a
profitable position in order to protect some of the profit. For a long position if your trade has
become profitable, you could keep moving the price of your stop-loss order upwards to protect
some profit. Similarly, for a short position that has become very profitable, you may move your
stop-buy order from loss to the profit zone in order to protect your gain.

Limit Order
A limit order is an order instruction to buy or sell a currency at a specified limit price. The order will only
be filled if the market trades at that price or better. A limit-buy order is an instruction to buy the
currency pair at the market price or lower once the market reaches your specified price. A limit-sell
order is an instruction to sell the currency pair at the market price once the market reaches your
specified price or higher, and it is higher than the current market price. Limit orders simply limit the
maximum price you're willing to pay when buying or limit the minimum price you're willing to accept
when selling.

Before placing your trade, you should already have an idea of where you want to take profits should
the trade go your way. A limit order allows you to exit the market at your pre-set profit objective. The
difference between a limit order in this instance and a stop-loss order is the limit-sell order will be
placed above the current price, whereas the stop-loss order is placed below the market price.

As an example of a limit-buy order, suppose you want to purchase the currency pair USD/CAD. The
bid/ask price is currently 1.1000/1.1005. If you place a limit order to buy at 1.1002, you are essentially
saying, "I will only buy currency if the ask price falls to 1.1002 or lower, otherwise I won't buy the
currency."

Similarly with a limit order to sell, if the limit order to sell was at 1.1009, this means the sell order would
only be executed if the USD/CAD currency goes up to at least 1.1009 from its current 1.1000.

Other Order Types

In addition to the common order types discussed above, there are additional components of an order
entry that govern how long you order stays open that you should know.

Good for the day (GFD)

A good for the day order is exactly like it sounds: it remains open until the trading day ends. Because
the Forex market is a 24 hrs market, you may need to check with your broker to find out exactly when
the cutoff time is. Usually, if you're in the United States, a GFD order would become inactive at 5pm
EST.

Good until cancelled (GTC)

A good until cancelled order is an order that remains active until you manually cancel it. If using
several GTC orders, it is usually a good idea to keep track of each GTC order you have because the
broker will not cancel any of these orders for you.

Order cancels other (OCO)

An OCO is an order that is a combination of two limit orders and/or stop orders. The orders are placed
below and above the current market price and if one of the orders is executed, the other one is
36 ZC
automatically cancelled. For example, suppose the currency price of the USD/CAD pair is 1.1500. A
trader with an OCO order could have an order to buy at 1.1505, because maybe he is anticipating a
breakout. And the same trader could have an order that instructs the broker to sell the currency if the
price falls to 1.1495. If for instance the buy order gets executed because the price reaches 1.1505, the
order to sell would be cancelled.

Execute the Correct Orders

Having a firm understanding of the different types of orders will enable you to use the right tools to
achieve your intentions. While there may be other types of orders, market, stop and limit orders are the
most common and usually the only ones traders need. Be comfortable using them because improper
execution of orders can cost you money. Some brokers can also label these types of orders differently
so be sure you fully understand the trade types before you start trading. In the next section we'll
discuss brokers and setting up your account.

Level 3 Trading - Types of Accounts

So we've gone through the basics of forex trading, the risks, the chart patterns, how to decipher
economic news and how to trade currencies. Now it's time to choose a broker. As we briefly touched
on earlier in the walkthrough, there are three primary types of trading accounts - standard, mini and
managed - and each has its own pros and cons. The type of account that is right for you depends on a
number of factors, including your tolerance for risk, the size of your initial investment and the amount
of time you have to trade the forex market on a day-to-day basis.

Standard Trading Accounts

The standard trading account is the most common account. This account affords you access to
standard lots of currency, each of which is worth $100,000.

And as you know, this doesn't mean that you have to put down $100,000 of capital in order to trade.
The rules of margin and leverage (typically 100:1 in forex) allow you to trade a standard lot with as little
as $1,000.

Pros
Service
Since a standard account requires sufficient up-front capital to trade full lots, most brokers provide
more services and better perks for forex traders who have this type of account.

Gain Potential
With each pip being worth $10, if a position moves in your favor by 100 pips in one day, your gain will
be $1,000. This type of big gain cannot be accomplished with any other account type, unless of course
more than one standard lot is traded.

Cons
Capital Requirement
In most cases, brokers call for standard accounts to have a minimum starting balance of at least
$2,000, and sometimes as much as $5,000 to $10,000.

Loss Potential
Just as you have a chance to gain $1,000 if a position moves in your favor, you could lose that same
amount in a 100-pip move the other way. A loss of this magnitude could really put a dent in the
account of a novice trader who only had the minimum amount in his or her account.

A standard trading account is recommended for experienced traders who have their fair share of
capital to invest.
37 ZC
Mini Trading Accounts
A mini trading account is just a trading account that allows forex traders to make trades using mini
(smaller) lots. In most brokerage accounts, a mini lot is equivalent to $10,000, as opposed to a
standard account, which trades lots 10-times that size. A lot of brokers who offer standard accounts
will also offer mini accounts as a way to attract clients who are relatively new to forex and are tentative
about trading full lots because of the capital needed to get started.

Pros
Low Risk
By trading in $10,000 increments, newer traders can place trades without cleaning out their accounts.
They can also try out different strategies without worrying about losing heaps of money.

Low Capital Requirement

The majority of mini accounts can be opened with as little as $250 to $500 and can offer up to 400:1
leverage.

Flexibility
The key to being a successful forex trader is having a risk-management plan and sticking to it. With
mini lots, it's a lot easier to accomplish this goal, because if one standard lot is too risky, you can buy
four or five mini lots instead and reduce the risk.

Con
Low Reward
We all know that with high risk can come high reward, but the opposite is also true: With low risk
comes low reward. Mini accounts that trade $10,000 only realize a $1 gain for every pip of positive
movement, as compared to $10 in a standard account.

Micro accounts, which are even smaller than minis, are also available through some online forex
brokers. Micro accounts trade in $1,000 lots and their pip movements are worth only 10 cents per point.
These accounts are really only used by investors with very little foreign-exchange knowledge and can
be opened for as little as $25.

Managed Trading Account

Managed trading accounts are forex accounts in which the capital belongs to the investor/trader, but
the buy and sell decisions are made by professionals. Account managers handle these accounts just
like stockbrokers handle managed stock accounts. The goals (profit goals, risk management, etc.) are
set by the investor.

In general, there are two types of managed accounts:

1. Pooled Funds: In these accounts, money is put into a mutual fund with other investors' cash.
The profits are shared among the investors. These accounts are divided according to the risk
tolerance of investors. A trader looking for higher returns will put his money in a pooled account
with a higher risk/reward ratio, while a forex trader looking for a more steady income would
invest in a safer fund. Make sure to always read the fund's prospectus before investing in any
pooled fund.
2. Individual Accounts: In these accounts, a broker will handle each account individually, making
customized decisions for each individual investor instead of an entire pool of investors.

Pro
Professional Guidance
Having a professional forex broker handle your account is a definite advantage that cannot be
38 ZC
underestimated. Also, if you want to diversify your portfolio without spending your entire day watching
the markets, this is a smart choice.

Cons
Price
Traders should know that most managed accounts require a minimum $2,000 investment for a pooled
account and $10,000 for an individual account. On top of this, account managers will always keep
a commission, or "account maintenance fee", which is calculated monthly or annually.

Flexibility
If you're keeping a close eye on the markets and see a buying opportunity, you won't have the
flexibility to place a trade. Instead, you'll have to hope that the account manager sees the same
opportunity and takes advantage of it. A managed account is recommended for investors with a lot of
capital and little time or interest to follow the market.

Summary
No matter what account type you choose, you should always take a test drive first. As we've discussed,
most brokers offer demo accounts and other platforms for traders to get comfortable with before
jumping in. (See Forex: Demo Before You Dive In for more information.)

As a basic rule of thumb, never put money into a forex account unless you are 100% satisfied with the
investment being made. With all the different options available for forex trading accounts, the
difference between being profitable and losing your shirt can be as simple as choosing the right
account type.

39 ZC
Level 4 Charts - Technical Analysis
Now that you know most of the fundamentals and basic aspects of forex, in this section we'll introduce
you to some charting patterns and a method of analysis within a field called technical analysis.
Technical analysis is a method for evaluating currency movements by analyzing the data generated by
market activity; this data is often historical data such as past prices and volume. Technical analysts will
attempt to analyze this data in order to identify patterns that can help them predict future (short-term or
long-term) price movements in the currency.

There are several different techniques technical traders use to analyze data. In this section of the
tutorial, we'll introduce you to moving averages, trends, resistance and supports, double
tops and double bottoms, Bollinger Bands® and the popular MACD.

But first, let's look at three reasons why many traders believe technical analysis can be a good way to
analyze currency movements. Technical analysis is based on three underlying assumptions about the
market and prices.

1. Technical analysis is based on the assumption that the market discounts everything.

This means the price of the currency reflects all available information, including fundamental factors
(i.e. economic news) and thus doing fundamental analysis, some argue, would add no value. Instead,
technical analysts believe the analysis of price movement or the supply and demand of currencies is
the best way to identify trends in the currency.

2. Technical analysis is based on the notion that price movements tend to follow a trend.

This means past price behavior is likely to be repeated, and if a trend has been established the
currency will most likely continue in that same direction.

3. In connection with the belief that prices move in trends, technical analysis assumes that
history tends to repeat itself.

The assumed repetitive nature of price movements is attributed to the psychology of the market
participants. Generally, this is based on the idea that market participants have, historically speaking,
often reacted in a similar fashion to reoccurring market events. Many well-known chart patterns are
based on the assumption that history tends to repeat itself.

With that said, there are also many traders who believe fundamental analysis - looking at
macroeconomic factors that affect the economy and thus the currency - is a good way to analyze
currencies. There has always been the debate between which is the better method, but it would likely
be best for you as a trader to be well-versed in both methods of analysis. Both have their strengths
and weaknesses. (For a primer on fundamental analysis' role in forex trading, refer to our
article Fundamental Analysis for Traders.)

Not Just for Currencies

Technical analysis can be used on any security with historical trading data. This
includes stocks, futures and commodities, fixed-income securities, etc. In this tutorial, we'll use
technical analysis examples to analyze currencies, but keep in mind that these concepts can be
applied to a variety of securities.

Now that you understand the philosophy behind technical analysis, we'll get into the more common
tools of technical analysis and build towards more advanced analysis techniques in the next few

40 ZC
sections.

Level 4 Charts - Moving Averages

Among the most widely used technical indicators, a moving average is simply a tool traders use to
smooth out the price movement in a given currency. Price movements can be volatile in the short term,
so many traders will use a moving average in order to identify or gauge the direction of a trend.

Mathematically, moving averages are calculated by taking the average price of the currency over a
certain number of days or periods. For example, a 50-day moving average would be calculated by
adding up all the prices the currency closed at over the previous 50 days and then dividing by 50. All
modern day charts will usually automatically do this for you. Once determined, the resulting moving
average is then overlaid onto the price chart in order to allow traders to look at smoothed data rather
than focusing on the day-to-day price fluctuations. An example of a 50-day moving average is shown
in Figure 1. (To learn more about the construction of a moving average, take a look at Simple Moving
Averages Make Trends Stand Out.)

Figure 1

Because of the way moving averages are calculated, you can customize your moving average to
literally any time period you think is relevant, which means that the user can freely choose whatever
time frame they want when creating the average. The most common increments used in moving
averages are 15, 20, 30, 50, 100 and 200 periods. Shorter moving averages such as the 15 period, or
even the 50 period, will more closely mirror the price action of the actual chart than a longer time
period moving average. The longer the time period, the less sensitive, or more smoothed out, the
average will be. There is no "right" time frame to use when setting up your moving averages.

Often in Forex, traders will look at intraday moving averages. For example, if you're looking at a 10
minute chart and wanted a five-period moving average you could take the prices in the previous 50
minutes and divide by five to get the five-period moving average for a 10 minute chart. Many traders
41 ZC
have their own personal preference, but usually the best way to figure out which one works best for
you is to experiment with a number of different time periods until you find one that fits your strategy.

SMA vs. EMA

There are actually two general types of moving averages: the simple moving average (SMA) and
the exponential moving average (EMA). The moving average we were discussing previously is a
simple moving average because it simply takes a certain number of periods and averages it for the
desired time frame - each period is equally weighted. One of the main complaints with a simple moving
average (especially short-term ones) is that they are too susceptible to large price movements up or
down. For example, suppose you were plotting a five-day moving average of the USD/CAD and the
price was steadily and consistently going up. And then one day there was a large down spike anomaly
causing the moving average to go much lower and the trend to go down when perhaps that one day
could have been caused by something not likely to occur again.

To mitigate this problem you may want to use a different moving average - an exponential moving
average (EMA). An EMA gives more weight to the more recent prices in its calculation of a moving
average. So if you were using a five-day moving average, an EMA would give a higher weight to prices
occurring at the end of the five day period, and lower weight on prices occurring five days ago. So if a
large spike occurred on days one or two, the moving average wouldn't be affected as much as a
simple moving average. Again, traders should experiment with both types of moving averages to find
their preference. In fact, many traders will plot both types of moving averages with various time periods
at the same time. (Learn more about the EMA in our article Exploring The Exponentially Weighted
Moving Average.)

One of the primary uses of a moving average is to identify a trend. In general, moving averages tend to
be lagging indicators meaning they can only confirm that a trend has been established rather than
identifying new trends. In the next section we'll take a closer look at how moving averages are used to
gauge the overall trend of a currency.

Level 4 Charts - Trends

Being able to identify trends is one of the most fundamental skills a forex trader should acquire. The
main method of identifying trends is by using moving averages. Moving averages are lagging
indicators, which means that they do not predict new trends but confirm trends once they have been
established. In general, a stock is deemed to be in an uptrend when the price is above a moving
average and the average is sloping upward. Conversely, a trader will use a price below a downward
sloping average to confirm a downtrend. Many traders will only consider holding a long position in an
asset when the price is trading above a moving average.

The forex market generally tends to moves in trends more than the overall stock market. Why? The
stock market is made up of a collection of individual stocks that are generally affected by the micro-
dynamics of the particular individual companies. The forex market, on the other hand, is driven
by macroeconomic trends that can sometimes take years to play out. These trends usually best
manifest themselves through the major pairs such as the EUR/USD, USD/JPY, GBP/USD, and
USD/CHF. Here we take a look at these trends and a common moving average technique to detect
these trends.

Observing the Significance of the Long Term

Because the forex market is driven dominantly by macroeconomic trends, many traders prefer to base
their trades on a long-term outlook. One tool traders frequently use to gauge the strength of a trend is
a combination of three simple moving averages called the three-SMA filter. For an example of how
they are used, take a look at Figure 1 and Figure 2, which both use a three-SMA filter.

42 ZC
Figure 1 - Charts the EUR/USD exchange rate from Mar 1 to May 15, 2005. Note
recent price action suggests choppiness and a possible start of a downtrend as all
three simple moving averages line up under one another.

43 ZC
Figure 2 - Charts the EUR/USD exchange rate from Aug 2002 to Jun 2005. Every bar
corresponds to one week rather than one day (as in Figure 1). In this longer-term
chart, a completely different view emerges - the uptrend remains intact with every
down move doing nothing more than providing the starting point for new highs.

The Three-SMA
The three-SMA filter is a good way to gauge the strength and direction of a trend. The filter is created
by plotting three moving averages on the chart: a short-term, intermediate-term and a long-term
moving average. The basic premise of this filter is that if the short-term trend (seven-day SMA), the
intermediate-term trend (20-day SMA) and the long-term trend (65-day SMA) are all aligned in one
direction, then the trend is strong.

You may be asking yourself why we're using a 65-day moving average here. The truthful answer is
that we picked up this idea from John Carter, a futures trader and educator who used these values.
But you can use different period moving averages if you wish, the important concept is the interplay
between the short, intermediate and long-term averages. As long as you use reasonable proxies for
each of these trends, the three-SMA filter will provide valuable analysis. (Another tool used to spot
trends is applying envelopes to the moving average. Learn more about this technique in Moving
Average Envelopes: Refining A Popular Trading Tool.)

Looking at the EUR/USD from two time perspectives (short and long-term), we can see how different
the trend signals can be. Figure 1 displays the daily price action for the months of March, April and
May 2005, which shows volatile movement with a clear bearish bias. Figure 2, however, charts the
weekly data for all of 2003, 2004 and 2005, and paints a very different picture. According to Figure 2,
EUR/USD remains in a clear long-term uptrend despite some sharp corrections along the way.

Warren Buffett, the famous investor who is well known for making long-term trend trades, was heavily
criticized for holding onto his massive long EUR/USD position which has suffered some losses along
44 ZC
the way. By looking at the long term trend in Figure 2, however, it becomes much clearer why Buffet
may have the last laugh.

Level 4 Charts - Resistance & Support

After learning about trends, the next major concept you need to learn is that of support and resistance.
You'll often hear analysts talking about a certain security approaching a resistance or support. These
are simply price levels or a range of prices that a security or currency doesn't often go over (resistance)
or go under (support).

Figure 1

Figure 1 depicts a simple example of a resistance level and support level. You can see in the chart the
support is the level at which the price seldom falls below and the resistance is the level the price
seldom exceeds. Each time the price hits the resistance or support, the price appears to hit a wall
and reverses, at least in the short term.

Why Does it Happen?

The primary reasons why prices behave in this fashion is because of supply and demand and market
psychology. At support levels the number of buyers generally exceeds the number of sellers and
pushes the price back up, and at resistance levels the number of sellers exceeds the number of buyers
causing the price to go back down. This could occur frequently in a range until new material
information is available that shifts the price to a new range, in which case a new support and
resistance level would be established.

Role Reversal

Once a resistance or support level is breached, the roles of the resistance and support flip. If the price
surges below a support level, that same support level will then become the new resistance level.
Conversely, if the price surges above a resistance level, that same resistance will tend to become the
new support level. This role reversal will generally only occur once a strong price moved has shifted
the price to a new range - often caused by major news or economic reports. As an example take a look
at Figure 2. Initially, the dotted line represented a resistance level but once the price broke through the
45 ZC
resistance into a new range, the old resistance level became the new support level. (Learn the
difference between a reversal and retracement in Retracement Or Reversal: Know The Difference.)

Figure 2

Resistance and Support Levels

Sometimes with stocks, a support or resistance level will be a round number such as 50, 100, or 1,000
that represents a psychological barrier to further increases or decreases in the price. But in forex as
well as stocks, keep in mind that a support or resistance level can vary, and is often not an exact
number. You should view support and resistance levels as zones rather than a specific number.

The Importance of Support and Resistance

Support and resistance analysis is an important part of trends because it can be used to help make
trading decisions and identify when a trend may be reversing. These levels can sometimes help a
trader identify when to take profits. For example if a certain price levels is reached, the trader might
want to take profits because he knows the price level seldom rises past a particular resistance level.
Or alternatively if the trader identifies a support level the price seldom falls below, he could use that
information to help him decide on an entry point to his position. (To learn more about using resistance
and support levels in trading, refer to our article Trading on Support.)

Support and resistance levels are tools every trader that uses technical analysis should use and
monitor. In the next section, we'll take a look at another common chart pattern that can help you
identify upcoming price movement - the double top and double bottom.

Level 4 Charts - Double Tops And Double

Bottoms
One of the most common chart patterns in trading is the double bottom and double top. In fact this
pattern appears so frequently that it alone could serve as evidence that price action is not as
wildly random as many academics claim. One way to think of price charts is simply that they express
the sum of trader sentiment, and double tops and double bottoms in particular represent a re-testing of
temporary highs and lows.

Double Top
46 ZC
Double tops are commonly found during an uptrend in prices where a new high is formed followed by a
slight pullback and a retest of the new high, but ultimately failing to surpass the price level established
at the first peak. This results in a movement of prices to a lower level and completes the pattern of the
double top. The second peak does not have to stop exactly at the price reached from the first peak but
should be relatively close. This pattern is usually indicative of a trend that is weakening where buying
interest is decreasing.

Double Bottom
A double bottom is simply the opposite of a double top. This pattern occurs during a downtrend and is
a signal of a reversal of the downtrend into an uptrend. This pattern is easily recognizable after the fact
by its resemblance to the letter "W". The initial downward move will find a support at the first bottom
and then the price action will rally off the support to a temporary new high (the middle of the "W").
Another selloff will take place that will reach the same support level of the first bottom, and
consequently cause another rally upwards. Lastly, the trend is confirmed when the price breaks
through the upper resistance to complete the pattern and reversal.

Identifying The Pattern

Here we'll look at the task of spotting the important double bottoms and double tops. Take a look at the
first chart of the EUR/USD for an example of a double top, and the second chart for an example of a
double bottom.

Chart Created by Intellichart from FXtrek.com.

47 ZC
 Chart Created by Intellichart from FXtrek.com.

React Or Anticipate?
One criticism of technical analysis based on chart patterns is that setups always look obvious in
hindsight but anticipating them as they're occurring in real time is particularly difficult. Double tops and
double bottoms are no exception. Though these patterns appear frequently, successfully identifying
and trading a majority of them is no simple feat.

Anticipate
There are two approaches to this problem and both have their pros and cons. In short, traders can
either try to anticipate these formations, or wait for confirmation of the pattern and then react to them.
The approach you choose is more an indication of your personality or trading style than relative merit.
Those who have a fader mentality - who love to fight the tape, sell into strength and buy weakness -
might try to anticipate the pattern by stepping in front of the price move. See the next few charts for an
example of an anticipatory trade.

48 ZC
 Chart Created by Intellichart from FXtrek.com.

49 ZC
 Chart Created by Intellichart from FXtrek.com.

50 ZC
 Chart Created by Intellichart from FXtrek.com.

React
On the other hand, reactive traders, who want to see evidence or confirmation of the pattern before
entering, have the advantage of knowing that the pattern exists but there's a tradeoff: their entry point
is later than an anticipatory trader which results in worse prices and greater losses should the pattern
fail.

51 ZC
 Chart Created by Intellichart from FXtrek.com.

52 ZC
 Chart Created by Intellichart from FXtrek.com.

Double tops and double bottoms are common reversal patterns every trader should keep an eye out
for, as they can signal a reverse in the trend.

Level 4 Charts - Bollinger Bands®

Bollinger Bands® are a technical chart indicator popular among traders across several financial
markets. On a chart, Bollinger Bands® are two "bands" that sandwich the market price. Many traders
use them primarily to determine overbought and oversold levels. One common strategy is to sell when
the price touches the upper Bollinger Band® and buy when it hits the lower Bollinger Band®. This
technique generally works well in markets that bounce around in a consistent range, also called range-
bound markets. In this type of market, the price bounces off the Bollinger Bands® like a ball bouncing
between two walls.

53 ZC
 Figure 1

Even though prices may sometimes bounce between Bollinger Bands®, the bands should not be
viewed as signals to buy or sell, but rather as a "tag". As John Bollinger was first to acknowledge, "tags
of the bands are just that - tags, not signals. A tag of the upper Bollinger Band® is not by itself a sell
signal. A tag of the lower Bollinger Band® is not by itself a buy signal." Price often can and does "walk
the band". In those instances, traders who keep trying to sell when the upper band is hit or buying
when the lower band is hit will face an excruciating series of stop-outs or worse, an ever-increasing
floating loss as price moves further and further away from the original entry point. Take a look at the
example below of a price walking the band. If a trader had sold the first time the upper Bollinger Band®
was tagged, he would have been deep in the red.

54 ZC
 Figure 2

Perhaps a better way to trade with Bollinger Bands® is to use them to gauge trends.

Using Bollinger Bands® to Indentify a Trend

One common cliché in trading is that prices range 80% of the time. There is a good deal of truth to this
statement since markets mostly consolidate as bulls and bears battle for supremacy. Market trends are
rare, which is why trading them is not nearly as easy as one might think. Looking at price this way we
can then define trend as adeviation from the norm (range).

At the core, Bollinger Bands® measure and depict the deviation or volatility of the price. This is the
reason why they can be very helpful in identifying a trend. Using two sets of Bollinger Bands® - one
generated using the parameter of "1 standard deviation" and the other using the typical setting of "2
standard deviation" - can help us look at price in a different way.

In the chart below we see that whenever the price channels between the two upper Bollinger Bands®
(+1 SD and +2 SD away from mean) the trend is up. Therefore, we can define the area between those
two bands as the "buy zone". Conversely, if price channels within the two lower Bollinger Bands® (–1
SD and –2 SD), then it is in the "sell zone". Finally, if price wanders around between +1 SD band and –
1 SD band, it is basically in a neutral area, and we can say that it's in "no man's land".

Another great advantage of Bollinger Bands® is that they adjust dynamically as volatility increases and
decreases. As a result, the Bollinger Bands® automatically expand and contract in sync with price
action, creating an accurate trending envelope.

55 ZC
 Figure 3

Conclusion
As one the most popular trading indicators, Bollinger Bands® have become a crucial tool to many
technical analysts. By improving their functionality through the use of two sets of Bollinger Bands®,
traders can achieve a greater level of analytical sophistication using this simple and elegant tool for
trending. There are also numerous different ways to set up the Bollinger Band® channels; the method
we described here is one of the most common ways. While Bollinger Bands® can help identify a trend,
in the next section we'll look at the MACD indicator which can be used to gauge the strength of a trend.

Level 4 Charts - MACD

The MACD is another popular tool many traders use. The calculation behind the MACD is fairly simple.
Essentially, it calculates the difference between a currency's 26-day and 12-day exponential moving
averages (EMA). The 12-day EMA is the faster one, while the 26-day is a slower moving average. The
calculation of both EMAs uses the closing prices of whatever period is measured. On the MACD chart,
a nine-day EMA of MACD itself is plotted as well, and it acts as a signal for buy and sell decisions. The
MACD generates a bullish signal when it moves above its own nine-day EMA, and it sends a sell sign
when it moves below its nine-day EMA.

The MACD histogram provides a visual depiction of the difference between MACD and its nine-day
EMA. The histogram is positive when MACD is above its nine-day EMA and negative when MACD is
below its nine-day EMA. If prices are in an uptrend, the histogram grows bigger as the prices start to
rise faster, and contracts as price movement begins to slow down. The same principle works in
reverse as prices are falling. Refer to Figure 1 for a good example of a MACD histogram in action.

56 ZC
 Figure 1: MACD histogram. As price action (top part of the screen)
accelerates to the downside, the MACD histogram (in the lower part
of the screen) makes new lows.

The MACD histogram is one of the main tools traders use to gauge momentum, because it gives an
intuitive visual representation of the speed of price movement. For this reason, the MACD is commonly
used to measure the strength of a price move rather than the direction or trend of a currency.

Trading Divergence
A classic trading strategy using a MACD histogram is to trade the divergence. One of the most
common setups is to identify points on a chart where the price makes a new swing high or a
new swing low but the MACD histogram doesn't, which signals a divergence between price and
momentum. Figure 2 depicts a typical divergence trade.

57 ZC
 Figure 2: A typical (negative) divergence trade using a MACD
histogram. At the right-hand side of the price chart, the price
movements make a new swing high, but at the corresponding point
on the MACD histogram, the MACD histogram is unable to exceed its
previous high of 0.3307. The divergence is a signal that the price is
about to reverse at the new high and as such, it is a signal for the
trader to enter into a short position.

Unfortunately, the divergence trade is not that reliable or accurate - it fails more times than it succeeds.
Prices often have several final volatile bursts up or down that trigger stops and force traders out of
position just before the move actually makes a sustained turn and the trade becomes profitable. Figure
3 illustrates a common divergence fakeout, which has frustrated many traders over the years.
(Knowing when trends are about to reverse is tricky business, learn more about spotting the trend
in Spotting Trend Reversals With MACD.)

58 ZC
 Figure 3: A typical divergence fakeout. Strong divergence is illustrated
by the right circle (at the bottom of the chart) by the vertical line, but
traders who set their stops at swing highs would have been taken out
of the trade before it turned in their direction.

One of the reasons that traders often lose money in this type of fakeout is because they enter a
position based on a signal from the MACD but end up exiting it based on a move in price. Since the
MACD histogram is a derivative of price and not a price itself, this approach mixes the signals used to
enter and exit a trade, which is incongruent with the strategy.

Using the MACD Histogram for Both Entry and Exit

To resolve the inconsistency between entry and exit signals, a trader can base both their entry and exit
decisions on the MACD histogram. To do so, if the trader was trading a negative divergence then he
would continue to take a partial short position at the initial point of divergence, but instead of using the
nearest swing high as the stop price, he or she can instead stop out the position if the high of the
MACD histogram exceeds the swing high it reached previously. This tells the trader that price
momentum is actually accelerating and the trader was wrong on the trade. On the other hand, if a new
swing high isn't reached on the MACD histogram, the trader can add to his initial position, continually
averaging a higher price for the short position. (Read more specifically about averaging up in our
article Is Pressing The Trade Just Pressing Your Luck?)

In effect, this negative divergence strategy requires the trader to average up as prices temporarily
59 ZC
move against him or her. Many trading books have called such a technique "adding to your losers".
However, in this strategy the trader has a perfectly logical reason for averaging up - the divergence on
the MACD histogram indicated that price momentum was waning and the movement may soon
reverse. In effect, the trader is trying to call the bluff between the seeming strength of immediate price
action and MACD readings that hint at weakness ahead. Still, a well-prepared trader using the
advantages of fixed costs in FX, by properly averaging up the trade, can withstand the temporary
pressures until price turns in his or her favor. Figure 4 demonstrates this strategy in action.

Figure 4: The chart indicates where price makes successive highs but
the MACD histogram does not - foreshadowing the decline that
eventually comes. By averaging up his or her short, the trader
eventually earns a handsome profit as we see the price making a
sustained reversal after the final point of divergence.

Trading forex is rarely black and white. Rules that some traders live by, such as never adding to a
losing position, can be used profitably in the right strategy. However, a logical underlying reason
should always be established before using such an approach. In the next section, we'll look at the
fundamental speed strategy which bases trade decisions on fundamental economic data rather than
technicals like the MACD histogram.

60 ZC
Level 5 Economics - U.S. Dollar
As we've learned, the forex market is truly a global marketplace, and the economics behind the
currencies we trade are a major driver in the market. By gaining a greater understanding of the history
and economic policies behind some of the most traded currencies in forex, we can learn why forex
traders trade certain pairs and how you can be successful doing the same. So let's take a closer look
at the eight (it's actually nine, but who's counting?) most-traded currencies in forex.

1. U.S. Dollar (USD)

Central Bank: Federal Reserve (Fed)
Current Interest Rate Information: Link here

The Almighty Dollar

Created in 1913 by the Federal Reserve Act, the Federal Reserve System (also known as the Fed) is
the central banking agency of the U.S. The Fed is headed by a chairman and board of governors, with
the majority of the focus being placed on the branch known as the Federal Open Market
Committee (FOMC). The FOMC supervises open market operations as well as monetary policy,
namely interest rates.

The FOMC is made up of five of the 12 current Federal Reserve Bank presidents and seven members
of the Federal Reserve Board; the Federal Reserve Bank of New York has a permanent seat on the
committee. Even though there are 12 voting members, non-members (including additional Fed Bank
presidents) are invited to share their views on the current economic situation whenever the committee
meets, which is eight times per calendar year.

Also referred to as the greenback, the U.S. dollar (USD) is the domestic currency of the world's largest
economy, the United States. Just like any other currency, the dollar is supported by numerous
economic fundamentals, including gross domestic product, manufacturing and employment reports.
However, the U.S. dollar is also greatly influenced by the central bank and any announcements about
interest rate policy. The U.S. dollar is a benchmark that trades against every other major currency,
especially the euro, Japanese yen and British pound.

Level 5 Economics - European Euro

European Euro (EUR)
Central Bank: European Central Bank (ECB)
Current Interest Rate: Link here

The Dollar's Nemesis

Frankfurt, Germany, is where you will find the central bank of the 16 member nations of the Eurozone,
the European Central Bank. Similar to the United States' FOMC, the ECB has a primary body that is
responsible for making monetary policy decisions: the Executive Council. The council is composed of
five members and headed by a president. The remaining policy heads are chosen on the basis that
four of the seats are earmarked for the four largest economies in the system, which
include Germany, France, Italy and Spain. This policy is in place to ensure that the largest economies
in the Eurozone are always represented in the case of a change in administration. The council meets
approximately 10 times a year. (Read more about this and other central banks discussed here in Get
To Know The Major Central Banks.)

Along with having control over monetary policy, the ECB also holds the right to issue banknotes as it
sees fit. Similar to the Federal Reserve, policymakers can interject at times of bank or system failures,
much like the global financial crisis of 2008-2009.The ECB differs from the Fed in one very important
area: rather than focusing on maximizing employment and maintaining stability of long-term interest
rates, the ECB works toward a prime principle of price stability, giving general economic
61 ZC
policies second billing. As a result, policymakers will often focus a great deal on consumer inflation in
making key interest rate decisions. (Read more about how central banks control inflation in What Are
Central Banks?)

Although the monetary body may seem quite complex, the currency is not. When paired with the U.S.
dollar, the euro (EUR) tends to be a slower currency compared to its colleagues (i.e., the British pound
or Australian dollar). On an average trading day, the base currency can trade between 30-40 pips, with
the more volatile swings coming in at 60 pips wide per day. Another very important trading
consideration is time. Trading in the euro-based pairs can be seen during
the London and U.S. sessions (which occur from 3am through 12pm EST).

Level 5 Economics - Japanese Yen

Japanese Yen (JPY)
Central Bank: Bank of Japan (BoJ)
Current Interest Rate: http://www.boj.or.jp/en/index.htm

Technically Complex, Fundamentally Simple

Established in 1882, the Bank of Japan serves as the central bank to the world's second-largest
economy. It controls monetary policy as well as the money market, currency issuance and
data/economic analysis. The primary Monetary Policy Board aims to work toward economic stability,
constantly sharing its views with the incumbent administration, while at the same time working toward
its own self-government and transparency. Meeting between 12 and 14 times a year, the bank's
governor leads a team of nine policy members, which includes two appointed deputy governors.

The Japanese yen (JPY) trades heavily as a carry trade component. Offering a low interest rate, the
currency is paired against higher-yielding currencies, most often the New Zealand and Australian
dollars and the British pound. As a result, the underlying can be very volatile, at times forcing traders to
take technical perspectives on a longer-term basis. Average daily ranges are in the region of 30-40
pips, while extremes can be as high as 150 pips. The yen is most often traded between the crossover
of London and U.S. hours (8am - 12pm EST).

Level 5 Economics - British Pound

British Pound (GBP)
Central Bank: Bank of England (BoE)
Current Interest Rate: http://www.bankofengland.co.uk/

Her Majesty's Currency

As the primary governing body in the United Kingdom, the Bank of England serves as the British
equivalent to the Federal Reserve System. Like the Fed, the governing body establishes a committee
headed by the governor of the bank. Made up of nine members, the committee is comprised of four
external members (who are appointed by the chancellor of exchequer), a chief economist, committee
chief economist, director of market operations and two deputy governors.

The Monetary Policy Committee (MPC) holds meetings every month where it decides on interest rates
and other monetary policies, with chief considerations given to the total price stability in the British
economy. As such, the MPC also sets a benchmark of consumer price inflation. If this benchmark is
not met, the governor has the unenviable task of notifying the chancellor of exchequer through a letter,
one of which came in 2007 as the U.K.CPI rose quite sharply during the year. The release of this letter
tends to be an indication to the markets of probable contractionary monetary policy.

With a greater degree of volatility than the euro, the British pound (GBP, also sometimes referred to as
62 ZC
"pound sterling" or "cable") often trades within a wider range through the day. With swings as large as
100-150 pips, however, it is not unusual to see the pound trade as narrowly as 20 pips. Swings in
popular cross currencies can give this major a volatile reputation, with traders focusing on pairs like the
British pound/Japanese yen and the British pound/Swiss franc. As a result, the pound can be seen as
most volatile through both London and U.S. sessions, with smaller movements during Tokyo hours
(7pm - 4am EST).

Level 5 Economics - Swiss Franc

Swiss Franc (CHF)
Central Bank: Swiss National Bank (SNB)
Current Interest Rate: Link Link here

A Banker's Currency
The Swiss National Bank differs from all other major central banks because it is viewed as a governing
body with private and public ownership. This stems from the fact that the Swiss National Bank is
technically a corporation under special regulation. Consequently, just over half of the governing body is
owned by the sovereign states ofSwitzerland. This arrangement underlines the economic and financial
stability policies dictated by the governing board of the SNB. The SNB is noticeably smaller than most
other governing bodies. Monetary policy decisions are decided on by three major bank heads who
meet on a quarterly basis. This governing board creates the band (plus or minus 25 basis points)
within which the interest rate will reside.

Much like the euro, the Swiss franc (CHF) rarely makes significant moves in individual sessions.
Therefore, keep an eye on this particular currency to trade in the average daily range of 35 pips per
day. High-frequency volume for this currency is usually seen during the London session.

Level 5 Economics - Canadian Dollar

Canadian Dollar (CAD)
Central Bank: Bank of Canada (BoC)
Current Interest Rate: Link here

The "Loonie"
Established by the Bank of Canada Act of 1934, the Bank of Canada acts as the central bank whose
aim is to "focus on the goals of low and stable inflation, a safe and secure currency, financial stability,
and the efficient management of government funds and public debt." As an independent
entity, Canada's central bank draws many similarities with the Swiss National Bank because it is
sometimes treated as a corporation, with the Ministry of Finance directly holding shares in the bank.
Despite the possibility of a conflict of interests, it is the responsibility of the governor to maintain price
stability at an arm's length from the current administration, while seeking to simultaneously consider
the government's concerns. With an inflationary benchmark that usually hovers between 2-3%, the
BoC has been known to behave hawkishly rather than accommodative when it comes to any
deviations in prices.

In line with the other major currencies, the Canadian dollar (CAD) tends to trade in similar daily ranges
of 30-40 pips. However, one unique aspect of the currency is its relationship with crude oil,
since Canada remains a major exporter of the commodity. For that reason, many traders and investors
use this currency as either a hedge against current commodity positions or for pure speculation,
tracing signals from the oil market.

63 ZC
Level 5 Economics - Australian/New
Zealand Dollar
Australian/New Zealand Dollar (AUD/NZD)
Central Bank: Reserve Bank of Australia / Reserve Bank of New Zealand (RBA/RBNZ)
Current Interest Rate: http://www.rba.gov.au/ and http://www.rbnz.govt.nz/

A Popular Carry
Offering one of the highest interest rates in the major global markets, the Reserve Bank of Australia
has always maintained its stance of price stability and economic strength as cornerstones of its long-
term plan. Headed by the governor, the Australian bank's board is made up of six at-large-members,
along with a deputy governor and a secretary of the Treasury. Jointly, they work toward an inflation
target of between 2-3%, while meeting nine times throughout the year. In addition, the Reserve Bank
of New Zealand looks to promote inflation targeting in the hope of maintaining a foundation for prices.

Both of these currencies have become a focus of carry traders, as the Australian and New
Zealand dollars (AUD and NZD) tend to offer the highest yields of the major currencies available on
most platforms. Consequently, volatility can be experienced in these pairs if a deleveraging effect
takes place. Usually however, the currencies tend to trade in similar averages of 30-40 pips, like the
other majors. Both currencies also maintain strong relationships with commodities, most notably gold
and silver.

Level 5 Economics - South African Rand

South African Rand (ZAR)
Central Bank: South African Reserve Bank (SARB)
Current Interest Rate: http://www.reservebank.co.za/

Emerging Opportunity
Having been previously modeled on the Bank of England, the South African Reserve Bank stands as
the monetary authority in South Africa. Taking on major responsibilities similar to those of the other
major central banks, the SARB is also known as a creditor in certain situations, a clearing bank and a
major custodian of gold. Above all else, the central bank is in charge of "the achievement and
maintenance of price stability". These responsibilities also include intervention in the foreign exchange
markets when the situation arises.

Although it may seem counter-intuitive, the South African Reserve Bank remains a wholly owned
private entity with hundreds of shareholders that are limited to owning less than 1% of the total number
of outstanding shares. Such regulations are to ensure that the interests of the economy precede those
of any private individual. To enforce the bank's policies, the governor and a14-member board head the
bank's activities and work toward monetary goals. The board meets six times a year.

Viewed among traders as relatively volatile, the average daily range of the South African rand (ZAR)
can be as high as 1,000 pips. However, when translated into dollar pips, the movements are almost
equivalent to an average day in the British pound, making the currency a great pair to trade against the
U.S. dollar (especially when taking into consideration the carry potential). Traders also trade the rand
for its close relationship to gold and platinum. South Africa is a world leader when it comes to exports
of both metals, so the correlation is similar to that between the Canadian dollar and crude oil. As a
result, forex traders should consider the commodities markets in creating positions when economic
data is limited.

64 ZC
Conclusion
Experienced forex traders know that in order to be successful in forex you must first know the factors
that move individual currencies. We've taken a look at the governing bodies and socio-economic
factors that move the nine most widely traded currencies in forex and hopefully you've got a better feel
for why these currencies behave the way they do. If you're still looking for more information, don't
worry, we will be delving even further into a few of the major economic factors that affect currencies.

Level 5 Economics - The Employment

Situation Report
As you've learned throughout this walkthrough, the forex market is effected by many different
economic and non-economic factors. We've taken a look at each of the major currencies and the
forces and governing bodies that drive their movement. One of the biggest drivers of a nation's
currency is unemployment. Let's take an in depth look at the two most important economic releases in
the United States when it comes to unemployment.

The Employee Situation Report

Release Date: The first Friday of the month

Release Time: 8:30am Eastern Standard Time

Coverage: Previous month

Released By: Bureau of Labor and Statistics (BLS)

Latest Release: http://stats.bls.gov/news.release/empsit.nr0.htm

Background
The Employment Situation Report, commonly known as the Labor Report, is an extremely broad-
based indicator which is released by the United StatesBureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). The report is
made up two separate surveys. The first, the "establishment survey", is a sampling from over 400,000
businesses across the country. It is widely regarded as the most comprehensive labor report available
in the nation, covering about 30% of all non-farm workers nationwide, and offers statistics
including non-farm payrolls, hours worked and hourly earnings. This is huge in both size and breadth,
with statistics covering over 500 industries and hundreds of cities.

The second survey, known as the "household survey", collects statistics from more than 60,000
households and produces an estimated figure which represents the total number of Americans out of
work, and from that the national unemployment rate. The data is compiled by the U.S. Census Bureau
and the Bureau of Labor Statistics. This allows for a census-like component, adding demographic
shifts into the equation, giving the results a different perspective.

Both sets of survey results will show the change from the previous month, and also year-over-year, as
trendlines are very important with this often volatile statistic.

What it Means for Investors

The Employment Situation Report is a multi-layered release, with many links from the main page which
follow the headline discussion items. Since there is so much information in this report, it's important to
identify the numbers that are the most important.

65 ZC
Non-Farm Payroll
The non-farm payrolls figure is very, very important on Wall Street; it's considered the benchmark labor
statistic, and it's used to determine the health of the job market because of its huge sample size and
historical track record in accurately predicting business cycles. Generally, economists have settled on
the number of 150,000 new jobs as the level that defines economic growth. An increase of about
150,000 jobs or more indicates an expansion of the labor force, while anything below points to a weak
job market.

These payroll figures from the establishment report are considered a coincident indicator.

Each of the above mentioned surveys comes up with its own figures for the total amount of employed
Americans using very different methods. The establishment report is much larger, and is widely
regarded as more accurate. However, this survey excludes private households, self-employed
individuals and the agricultural sector. The household report runs on a smaller sample and is more
subjective, but the inclusion of self-employed workers, for example, can make this figure more valuable
in a time when many people are starting their own business, which is often the casein the beginning of
a new business cycle.

The unemployment figures from the household report (which is probably the most watched segment of
the release after non-farm payrolls) are considered a lagging indicator, since people tend to be out of
work when problems in the economy have already manifested themselves in falling economic output
(less workers & less GDP).

A good forex trader will study the labor report to look for trends in disposable income, wage inflation
and employment statistics, as all of these factors can have an affect on currency movement. Analysts
will usually conclude that if payrolls are increasing and wages are rising, that personal consumption
stats like retail sales will advance as well, as more money will be in the pockets of consumers, which
generally means that the dollar will perform well against its peers.

The Federal Reserve

The Fed watches this report very closely. The Fed's former chairman Alan Greenspan used most of his
allotted minutes during all those years of Senate briefings discussing the labor markets, quoting figures
from the benchmark Labor Report. The unemployment rate alone accounts for close to 50% of the
lagging index created by the Conference Board and used by the Federal Reserve Board.

The household survey accounts for demographic changes to some degree, whereas the establishment
survey only counts the total number of payrolls. Therefore, the household survey acts as sort of a mini-
census, which is why the same employment report can show an increase in payrolls, while the
unemployment rate rises as well, which can seem like a contradiction to those not familiar with the
report.

The number of hours worked data can also be a bell-weather of where the economy is in the business
cycle; quite often companies will try to stretch the hours of their current workforce before they go into
the job market and hire new workers. Such conservative behavior is known as "testing the waters" of
the economy before committing to hiring for future growth.

While labor statistics can tell us a lot, they do not necessarily define the economy. Many industries can
be well positioned to remain profitable even during tough labor markets - financial services, for
instance, can easily lay off workers and keep labor tight until conditions improve, while more capital-
intensive industries such as manufacturing (with its higher fixed cost structure) may suffer bigger hits in
profitability. The key is to use all the information presented to make an educated opinion of where you
feel certain currencies are headed as a direct result of these unemployment numbers.

Strengths Of The Labor Report:

66 ZC
 • As one of the most widely watched reports, the Employment Situation Report gets a lot of press
and can move the forex markets.
• Summary analysis provided by the BLS (top link on the site) on the top-level release of an
already detail-rich report
• Relates to investors on a personal level; everyone understands having a job or looking for work.
• Service industries are covered here - it is hard to find good indicator coverage of service-based
businesses.

Weaknesses Of The Labor Report:

• Summer and other seasonal employment tends to skew the results.

• Only measures whether people are working; it does not take into account whether these
are jobs the people wish to have, or whether they are well-suited to workers' skills.
• Volatile; revisions can be quite large, and updates should always be viewed in the most recent
report.
• Unemployment and payroll figures can seem to be out of alignment, as they are derived from
two different surveys.
• Compensation costs portion is considered inferior to the Employment Cost Index.

Level 5 Economics - Jobless Claims Report

As opposed to the Labor Report, the Jobless Claims Report is a weekly release that reports the
number of first-time filings for state jobless claims across the nation. The data is seasonally adjusted,
since certain times of the year are known for above-average hiring for temporary work, such as during
harvesting and holidays.

Release Date: Weekly; Thursdays, prior to market open

Release Time: 8:30am Eastern Standard Time

Coverage Previous week (cutoff date is previous Saturday)

Released By: U.S. Department of Labor

Latest Release: http://www.dol.gov/opa/media/press/eta/main.htm

Due to the short sample period (one week), week-to-week results can be very volatile, therefore the
results are often presented as a four-week moving average, so that each week's release is the
average of the four prior jobless claims reports, making it easier to compare the figures. The release
outlines which states have had the largest changes in claims from the week previous; the fully revised
version shows up about a week later, at which time full breakdowns by state and U.S. territories are
available.

What it Means for Forex Traders

New jobless claims for the week reflect an up-to-the-minute account of who is leaving work
unexpectedly, showing the "run rate" of the economy's health with very little lag time. The Jobless
Claims Report gets a whole lot of press because of its simplicity and the belief that the healthier the job
market, the healthier the economy, and the stronger the dollar

The fact that jobless claims are released weekly is of particular importance to forex traders. Having
such a reliable and timely report of how the U.S job market is faring can give traders a heads up to the
67 ZC
long-term direction of the dollar along with the luxury of intra-day trading with fresh economic data.

At times the Jobless Claims Report can also get lost in the shuffle of a busy news day, and hardly be
noticed by the general public. Good forex traders however will make it a point to add the report to their
economic calendar and keep a close eye for what to expect in the U.S job market.

Strengths Of The Jobless Claims Report:

• Weekly reporting provides for timely, almost real-time snapshots.

• As a tightly-presented release, investors can easily pick up the raw release and quickly apply
the information to market decisions.
• Initial claims are provided gross and net of seasonal adjustments, and give a breakdown for
every state's individual results.
• Some states' figures are shown along with a comment from that state's reporting agency
regarding specific industries in which noteworthy activity is happening, such as "fewer layoffs in
the industrial machinery industry".

Weaknesses Of The Jobless Claims Report:

Summer and other seasonal employment tends to skew the results.

• Highly volatile - revisions to advance report can be very big on a percentage basis
• Jobless claims in isolation tell little about the overall state of the economy.
• No industry breakdowns are provided, just the national figure.

These two unemployment reports are the most followed by forex traders across the globe. Quite often
the U.S. economy is the engine that drives the global economy, and any changes, good or bad, in
overall employment can have a big effect on the forex markets. Keeping up to date on both of these
important economic reports are crucial to becoming a smart and informed forex trader. Next let's study
how interest rates effect currencies.

Level 5 Economics - The Fed

As we have learned, there is a government body that acts as the guardian of every nation's economy -
an economic sentinel who implements policies designed to keep the country operating smoothly. The
truth is however, most investors do not understand how or why the government involves itself in the
economy. So it is especially important for forex to understand how and why these government bodies
get involved to effect interest rates and their domestic currencies.

As previously discussed, the Fed's mandate is "to promote sustainable growth, high levels of
employment, stability of prices to help preserve the purchasing power of the dollar and moderate long-
term interest rates." In other words, the Fed's job is to promote a sound banking system and a strong
economy. The Fed also issues all coin and paper currency. The U.S. Treasury actually produces the
cash, but the Fed Banks distributes it to financial institutions. It's also the Fed's responsibility to check
bills for wear and tear and to take damaged currency out of circulation. To achieve its mission, the Fed
serves as America's money manager.

Money Manager
The term monetary policy refers to the measures that the Federal Reserve undertakes to influence the
amount of money and credit available in the U.S. economy. Changes to the amount of money and
credit directly affect interest rates (the cost of credit) and the performance of the U.S. economy, which
in turn affects the direction ofAmerica's dollar To state this concept simply, if the cost of credit is
reduced, more people and firms will borrow money and the economy will heat up.

The Toolbox
The Fed has three major tools at its disposal to manipulate monetary policy:
68 ZC
Open-Market Operations
The Fed is constantly buying and selling U.S. government securities in the financial markets, which
consequently influences the level of reserves in the banking system. The Fed's decisions also affect
the volume and the price of credit (interest rates). The term open market means that the Fed can't
independently control which securities dealers it will do business with on any given day. Rather, the
choice emerges from an open market where the different primary securities dealers participate. Open
market operations are the most frequently employed tool of monetary policy.

Setting The Discount Rate

The discount rate is the interest rate that banks pay on short-term loans from one of the Federal
Reserve Banks. The discount rate tends to be lower than the federal funds rate, although they are very
closely related. The discount rate is important because it is a visible announcement of an adjustment in
the Fed's monetary policy and allows the rest of the market (forex traders included) some insight into
the Fed's plans.

Setting Reserve Requirements

This is the amount of actual physical funds that depository institutions are required to hold in reserve
against deposits in their customers' bank accounts. It determines how much money banks can create
through loans and investments. Set by the Board of Governors, the reserve requirement is usually
around 10%, but can vary. This means that although a bank might hold $20 billion in deposits for all of
its customers, the bank lends most of this money out and, therefore, doesn't have that $20 billion on
hand. Additionally, it would be extremely costly to hold $20 billion in coin and bills within the bank.
Excess reserves are, therefore, held either as vault cash or in accounts with the district Federal
Reserve Bank Therefore, while the reserve requirements make certain that depository institutions
preserve a minimum amount of physical funds in their reserves.

The Federal Funds Rate

The use of open-market operations is the most important tool that's used to manipulate monetary
policy. The Fed's goal in trading securities is to affect the federal funds rate - the rate at which banks
borrow reserves from each other. The Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC) sets a target for this
rate, but not the actual rate itself (because it is determined by the open market). This is what news
reports are referring to when they talk about the Fed lowering or raising interest rates. So be sure you
are aware that a change in interest rates is actually just a change in the federal funds rate.

All banks are subject to reserve requirements, but they commonly fall below requirements in carrying
out of day-to-day business. To meet the requirements they have to borrow from each other's reserves.
This creates a market in reserve funds, with banks borrowing and lending to one another at the federal
funds rate. Consequently, the federal funds rate is of such importance because by increasing or
decreasing it, over time, the Fed can impact practically every other interest rate charged by U.S. banks.

The FOMC Decision

The FOMC typically meets eight times per year, and at these meetings, the FOMC members decide
whether monetary policy should be changed. Before each meeting, FOMC members receive the
"Green Book," which contains the Federal Reserve Board (FRB) staff forecasts of the U.S.economy,
the "Blue Book," which presents the Board staff's monetary policy analysis and the "Beige Book,"
which includes a discussion of regional economic conditions prepared by each Reserve Bank.

When the FOMC meets, it decides whether to lower, raise or maintain its target for the federal funds
rate. The FOMC also decides on the discount rate. The reason we say that the FOMC sets

69 ZC
the target for the rate and not the actual rate itself is because the rate is actually determined by market
forces. The Fed will do its best to influence open-market operations, but many other factors contribute
to what the actual rate ends up being. A good example of this fact occurs during the holiday season. At
Christmas, consumers usually have an increased demand for cash, and banks will draw down on their
reserves, placing a higher demand on the overnight reserve market; thus increasing the federal funds
rate. So when the media says there is a change in the federal funds rate (in basis points), don't let it
confuse you; what they are, in fact, referring to is a change in the Fed's target.
If the FOMC wishes to increase economic growth, it will reduce the target fed funds rate. On the other
hand, if it wants to slow down the economy, it will increase the target rate.

The Fed aims to sustain steady growth, without the economy becoming too overheated. When talking
about economic growth, extremes are never good. If the economy grows too quickly, we end up
with inflation. If the economy slows down too much, we end up in recession.

It is not uncommon for the FOMC to maintain rates at current levels but warn that a possible policy
change could occur in the near future. This warning is referred to as the bias. The means that the Fed
might think that rates are fine for now, but that there is a considerable threat that economic conditions
could warrant a rate change soon. The Fed will issue an easing bias if it thinks the lowering of rates is
imminent. Conversely, the Fed will adopt a bias towards tightening if it feels that rates might rise in the
future. By paying attention to the language used by the Fed when discussing the economy and interest
rates forex traders can get a leg up on the competition for profits.

Why It Works
If the target rate has been increased, the FOMC sells securities. If the FOMC reduces the target rate, it
buys securities.

For example, when the Fed buys securities, it has essentially created new money to do this increasing
the supply of reserves in the market. Think of it this way, if the Fed buys a government security, it
issues the seller a check, which the seller deposits in his or her bank. This check must then be
credited against the bank's reserve requirement. Therefore, the bank has a greater supply of reserves,
and doesn't need to borrow money overnight in the reserves market, reducing the federal funds rate.
Of course, when the Fed sells securities, it reduces reserves at the banks of purchasers, which makes
it more likely that the bank will engage in overnight borrowing, and increase the federal funds rate.

To put it all together, reducing the target rate means the fed is putting more money into the economy.
This makes it cheaper to get a mortgage or buy a car, which helps to boost the economy. Furthermore,
interest rates are related, so if banks have to pay less to borrow money themselves, the cost of a loan
is reduced. All this can affect the value of a currency in any number of ways when added to other
factors.

The Fed has more power and influence on financial markets than any legislative entity. Its monetary
decisions are intensely observed and often lead the way for other countries to take the same policy
changes.

Level 5 Economics - Inflation

In the 1930s, you could buy a loaf of bread for $0.15, a new car for less than $1,000 and an average
house for around $5,000. In the twenty-first century, all of these things, and just about everything else
70 ZC
in the world cost a whole lot more. It's pretty obvious that inflation has had a major affect on how far
our money goes over the last 60 years.

When inflation surged to double-digit levels in the mid- to late-1970s, Americans saw it as the
American economy's greatest threat. Since then, public anxiety has abated along with the inflation rate,
but people remain fearful of inflation, even at the tepid levels we've seen in the past few years.
Although it's common knowledge that prices go up over time, the general population doesn't
understand the forces behind inflation, and surprisingly, very few forex traders do either.

What causes inflation? How does it affect your standard of living? What does inflation mean for a
nation's currency? Let's take a closer look.

The value of a dollar does not stay constant when there is inflation. The value of a dollar is observed in
terms of purchasing power, which is the real, tangible goods that your money can buy. When inflation
rises, your purchasing power falls. For example, if the inflation rate is 2% annually, then theoretically a
$1 pack of gum should cost $1.02 next year. After inflation, your dollar can't buy the same goods it
could beforehand.

There are several variations on inflation:

• Deflation is when the general level of prices is falling. This is the opposite of inflation.
• Hyperinflation is unusually rapid inflation. In extreme cases, this can lead to the breakdown of a
nation's monetary system.
• Stagflation is the combination of high unemployment and economic stagnation with inflation.
This happened in industrialized countries during the 1970s, when a bad economy was
combined with OPEC raising oil prices.

In recent years, most developed countries have attempted to sustain an inflation rate of around 2-3%.

Causes of Inflation
Although the causes of inflation are greatly debated, there are at least two theories that are generally
accepted:

Demand-Pull Inflation - This theory can be summarized as "too much money chasing too few goods".
In other words, if demand is growing faster than supply, prices will increase. This usually occurs in
growing economies.

Cost-Push Inflation - When business' costs go up, they need to increase prices to maintain their profit
margins. Increased costs can include things such as wages, taxes, or increased costs of imports.

Costs of Inflation
Inflation has a bad rap, but it's really just misunderstood. Inflation affects different people in different
ways. A major factor in how inflation is viewed is whether inflation is anticipated or unanticipated. If the
inflation rate is in line with what the majority of people are expecting (anticipated inflation), then we can
compensate and the cost isn't high. For example, banks can vary their interest rates and Businesses
can price their products accordingly. (to learn more, see The Importance Of Inflation And GDP.)

Problems come up when there is unanticipated inflation:

• Creditors lose and debtors gain if the lender does not anticipate inflation correctly. For
borrowers, this can sometimes equate to an interest-free loan.

71 ZC
 • Economics uncertainty can lead to consumers and corporations spending less hurting
economic output in the long run.
• People living off a fixed-income, such as retirees, see a decline in their purchasing power and,
consequently, their standard of living.
• The entire economy must absorb repricing costs ("menu costs") as price lists, labels, menus
and more have to be updated.
• If the inflation rate is greater than that of other countries, domestic products become less
competitive, and the domestic currency usually depreciates.

Inflation is a sign that an economy is growing however. In some situations, little inflation (or even
deflation) can be just as bad as high inflation. A lack of inflation may be an indication that the economy
is weakening. As you can see, it's not so easy to label inflation as either good or bad - it depends on
the overall economy as well as what side of the coin you're on.
Measuring inflation is a difficult problem for government statisticians as well. To do this, a number of
goods that are representative of the economy are put together into what is commonly referred to as a
"market basket." The cost of this basket is then compared over time. inform these comparisons we get
a price index, which is the cost of the market basket today as a percentage of the cost of that identical
basket in the starting year.

In North America, there are two major price indexes that measure inflation:

• Consumer Price Index (CPI) - A measure of price changes in consumer goods and services
such as gasoline, food, clothing and automobiles. The CPI measures price change from the
perspective of the purchaser. U.S. CPI data can be found at the Bureau of Labor Statistics.
• Producer Price Indexes (PPI) - A family of indexes that measure the average change over
time in selling prices by domestic producers of goods and services. PPIs measure price change
from the perspective of the seller. U.S. PPI data can be found at the Bureau of Labor Statistics.

It may be easier to think of these price indexes as large surveys. Every month, the U.S. Bureau of
Labor Statistics contacts thousands of retail stores, service establishments, rental units and
profesional offices to acquire price information on thousands of items used to track and measure price
changes in the CPI. They record the prices of about 80,000 items each month, which represent a
scientifically selected sample of the prices paid by consumers for the goods and services purchased.

In the long run, the various PPIs and the CPI should show a similar rate of inflation. This is not the
case in the short run however, as PPIs wiil almost always increase before the CPI. In general,
investors and traders follow the CPI more than the PPIs.

Contrary to popular belief, excessive economic growth can in fact be very detrimental to the economy.
At one extreme, an economy that is growing too quickly can experience hyperinflation, resulting in the
problems we touched on earlier. At the other extreme, an economy with no inflation will essentially
stagnate. The right level of economic growth, and thus inflation, lies somewhere in the middle.

The impact of inflation on a stock portfolio is marginal. Over the long run, a company's revenue and
earnings should increase at the same pace as inflation. The exception to this of course is stagflation.
The combination of a weak economy with an increase in costs is awful for stocks. In this situation a
company is in the same situation as a normal consumer - the more cash it carries, the more its
purchasing power decreases with increases in inflation.
72 ZC
The primary problem with stocks and inflation is that a company's returns tend to be overstated. In
times of high inflation, a company may look like it's performing extremely well, when in actuality,
inflation is the reason behind the growth. When analyzing financial statements, it's also important to
remember that inflation can wreak havoc on earnings depending on what technique the company is
using to value inventory.

Fixed-income investors are the hardest hit by inflation. For example, if a year ago you invested $1,000
in a Treasury bill with a 10% yield. Now that you are about to collect the $1,100 owed to you, is your
$100 (10%) return real? You wish! Assuming inflation was positive for the year, your purchasing power
will have fallen and, as a result, so has your real return. We have to take into account the portion
inflation has taken out of your return. If inflation was 4%, then your return is actually only 6%.

This example highlights the difference between nominal interest rates and real interest rates. The
nominal interest rate is the growth rate of your money, while the real interest rate is the growth of your
purchasing power. In other words, the real rate of interest is the nominal rate reduced by the rate of
inflation. In our example, the nominal rate is 10% and the real rate is 6% (10% - 4% = 6%).

As a forex trader however, inflation is of key importance to your trading decisions. Countries with high
inflation generally will have a currency that performs weaker than its peers. Keeping a close eye on
inflation numbers will help you make smart trades. Be aware however that inflation is an art rather than
a science, and inflation's relationship with currency value is not concrete. As we've previously
discussed, inflation should be considered as just one of several economic indicators when making
trading decisions for any given currency.

Level 5 Economics - Retail Sales

Retail Sales is very closely watched by both economists, investors and traders alike. This economic
indicator tracks the dollar value of merchandise sold within the retail industry by taking a sampling of
companies engaged in the business of selling consumer products. Both fixed point-of-sale businesses
and non-store retailers (such as mail catalogs and vending machines) are part of the data sample.
Companies of all sizes are used in the survey, from the super-sized Wal-Mart to independent, mom
and pop businesses. (For related reading, see Using Consumer Spending As A Market Indicator.)

Release Date: On or around the 13th of the month

Release Time: 8:30am Eastern Standard Time

Coverage: Previous month\'s data

Released By: Census Bureau and the U.S. Department of

Commerce

Latest Release: http://www.census.gov/retail/

The data released covers the previous month's sales, making it a timely indicator of not only the
performance of this important industry (consumer expenditures generally make up about two-thirds of
total gross domestic product), but of price level activity as a whole. Retail Sales is considered
73 ZC
a coincident indicator, meaning that activity reflects the current state of the economy. It is also
considered by many as a vital pre-inflationary indicator, which creates the biggest interest from forex
traders, Wall Street watchers and the Conference Review Board, which tracks data for the Federal
Reserve Board's directors.

The release contains two main components: a total sales figure (with a related percentage change
from the previous month), and one that is "ex-autos", because the large ticket price and historical
seasonality of vehicle sales can skew the total figure disproportionately.

What it Means for You

The release of the Retail Sales Report has been known to result in relatively high volatility in the stock
market. Its clarity as a predictor of inflationary pressure can cause investors and traders to rethink the
likelihood of Fed rate cuts or hikes, depending on the report's results. For example, a quick rise in retail
sales in the middle of thebusiness cycle may be followed by a short-term hike in interest rates by the
Fed in an attempt to curb possible inflation. This may cause investors to sell bonds (resulting in higher
yields), and could pose problems for stocks as well, as inflation causes decreased future cash flows for
companies. Not to mention the affects the interest rate hike would have on the currency, as we have
already learned.

However, if retail sales growth is stalled or slowing, this means consumers have reduced their
spending, and could signal a recession due to the significant role personal consumption plays in the
health of the economy. In which case traders would be well served to take advantage of the country's
weakening currency.

One of the most important factors traders should note when looking at the report is how far off the
reported figure is from the so-called consensus number, or "street number". In general, the stock and
forex markets do not like surprises, so a figure that is higher than expected, even when the economy is
humming along well, could trigger selling of stocks, bonds and the dollar, as inflationary fears would be
deemed higher than expected.

Strengths of the Retail Sales Report:

• The retail sales data is very timely, and is released only two weeks after the month it covers.
• The data release is robust; traders can download a full breakout of component sectors, as well
as spreadsheet historical data to examine trends.
• Retail sales reports get a lot of press. It's an indicator that is easy to understand and relates
closely to the average consumer.
• A revised report comes out later (two to three months on average), amending any errors.
• Analysts and economists will take out volatile components to show the more underlying
demand patterns. The most volatile components are autos, gas prices and food prices.
• Data is adjusted seasonally, monthly and for holiday differences month to month.

Weaknesses of the Retail Sales Report:

• Revisions to the report (released about two months after the advance report) can be very large,
and the sample size is relatively small compared to the number of retailers.
• Retail sales data is often volatile from month to month, which makes trend-spotting difficult at
best.
• The indicator is based on dollars spent and does not account for inflation. This can make it
difficult for individual traders to make decisions based on the raw data.
• Does not account for retail services, only physical merchandise. The U.S. is an increasingly
service-based economy, so not all retail "activity" is captured.

74 ZC
The Closing Line
Retail Sales is one of the big ones - a report that can shed a lot of light on the current state of the
economy. It provides detailed industry information and can really move the markets. Traders will often
wait for the analysts to sort through the report, removing any overly volatile components, and drawing
conclusions from there. For highly sophisticated traders however, being able to draw your own
conclusions from the report can give you a jump-start on any trends that you may spot.

75 ZC
Level 6 Trading - EUR-USD Pair
Due to the fact that the euro and U.S. dollar are the world's two largest currencies, representing the
world's two largest economic and trading blocs, many multinational corporations conduct business in
both the United States and Europe. These corporations have an almost constant need to hedge their
exchange rate risk. Some firms, such as international financial institutions, have offices in both
the United States and Europe. Firms that fit this description are also constantly involved in trading the
euro and the U.S. dollar.

Because the euro/U.S. dollar is such a popular currency pair, arbitrage opportunities are next to
impossible to find. However, forex traders still love the pair. As the world's most liquid currency pair,
the euro/U.S. dollar offers very low bid-ask spreads and constant liquidity for traders wanting to buy or
sell. These two features are very important to speculators and have helped contribute to the pair's
popularity. In addition, the large number of market participants and the non-stop availability of
economic and financial data allow traders to constantly formulate and re-examine their positions and
opinions on the pair. This constant activity provides for relatively high levels of volatility, which can lead
to opportunities for profit.

The combination of liquidity and volatility makes the euro/U.S. dollar pair an excellent place to begin
trading for forex newcomers. However, keep in mind that it is always necessary to understand the role
of risk management when trading currencies or any other kind of instruments.

EUR/USD Facts
The United States and the European Union are the two largest economic powers in the world. The U.S.
dollar is both the world's most heavily traded and most widely held currency. The currency of the
European Union, the euro, is the world's second most popular currency. And since it contains the two
most popular currencies in the world, the EUR/USD pair is forex's most actively traded currency pair.

The Unique Role of the U.S. Dollar

The U.S. dollar plays a unique and important role in the world of international finance. As the world's
generally accepted reserve currency, the U.S. dollar is used to settle most international transactions.
When global central banks hold foreign currency reserves, a large fraction of those reserves are often
held in U.S. dollars. Also, many smaller countries choose either to peg their currency's value to that of
the U.S. dollar or just completely forgo having their own currency, choosing to use the U.S. dollar
instead. Additionally, the price of gold (and many other commodities) are generally set in U.S. dollars.
Not only this, but the Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC) transacts in, you guessed
it, U.S. dollars. This means that when a country buys or sells oil, it buys or sells the U.S. dollar at the
same time. All of these factors contribute to the dollar's status as the world's most important currency.

Since the dollar is the most heavily traded currency in the world, most foreign currencies trade against
the U.S. dollar more often than in a pair with any other currency. For this reason, it is important for
traders starting out in the currency markets to have a firm grasp of the fundamentals that drive United
States economy to gain a solid understanding of the direction in which the U.S. dollar is going.

The European Union Economy

Overall, the European Union represents the world's largest economic region with a GDP of more than
$13 trillion. Much like the United States, the economy of Europe is heavily focused on services,
manufacturing, however, represents a greater percentage of GDP in Europe than it does in the United
States. When economic activity in the European Union is strong, the euro generally strengthens; when
economic activity slows, as expected, the euro should weaken.

Why the Euro Is Unique

While the U.S. dollar is the currency of a single country, the euro is the single currency of 16 European
countries within the European Union, collectively known as the "Eurozone" or the European and
76 ZC
Economic Monetary Union (EMU). Disagreements arise from time to time among European
governments about the future course of the European Union or monetary policy and when these
political or economic disagreements arise, the euro can be expected to weaken.

Factors Influencing the Direction of the EUR/USD

The primary issue that influences the direction of the euro/U.S. dollar pair is the relative strength of the
two economies. Holding all else equal, a faster-growing U.S. economy strengthens the dollar against
the euro, and a faster-growing European Union economy strengthens the euro against the dollar. As
previously discussed, one key sign of the relative strength of the two economies is the level of interest
rates. When U.S.interest rates are higher than those of key European economies, the dollar generally
strengthens. When Eurozone interest rates are higher, the dollar usually weakens. However, as we've
already learned, interest rates alone can not predict movements in currencies.

Another major factor that has a strong influence on the euro/U.S. dollar relationship is any political
instability among the members of the European Union. The euro, introduced in 1999, is also relatively
new compared to the world's other major currencies. Many economists view the Eurozone as a test
subject in economic and monetary policy. As the countries within the Eurozone learn to work with one
another, differences sometimes arise. If these differences appear serious or potentially threatening to
the future stability of the Eurozone, the dollar will almost certainly strengthen against the euro.

The list below shows the current members of the Eurozone as of January 1, 2009. When trading the
euro/U.S. dollar pair, investors should carefully watch for troublesome economic and political news
originating in these countries. If several Eurozone countries have weakening economies, or if
newspaper headlines are discussing political difficulties among the countries in the region, the euro is
likely to weaken against the dollar.

Members of the Eurozone

• Austria
• Belgium
• Cyprus
• Finland
• France
• Germany
• Greece
• Ireland
• Italy
• Luxembourg
• Malta
• Netherlands
• Portugal
• Slovakia
• Slovenia
• Spain

Trading the EUR/USD

Due to the fact that the euro and U.S. dollar are the world's two largest currencies, representing the
world's two largest economic and trading blocs, many multinational corporations conduct business in
both the United States and Europe. These corporations have an almost constant need to hedge their
exchange rate risk. Some firms, such as international financial institutions, have offices in both the
United States and Europe. Firms that fit this description are also constantly involved in trading the euro
and the U.S. dollar.

Because the euro/U.S. dollar is such a popular currency pair, arbitrage opportunities are next to
impossible to find. However, forex traders still love the pair. As the world's most liquid currency pair,
the euro/U.S. dollar offers very low bid-ask spreads and constant liquidity for traders wanting to buy or
77 ZC
sell. These two features are very important to speculators and have helped contribute to the pair's
popularity. In addition, the large number of market participants and the non-stop availability of
economic and financial data allow traders to constantly formulate and re-examine their positions and
opinions on the pair. This constant activity provides for relatively high levels of volatility, which can lead
to opportunities for profit.

The combination of liquidity and volatility makes the euro/U.S. dollar pair an excellent place to begin
trading for forex newcomers. However, keep in mind that it is always necessary to understand the role
of risk management when trading currencies or any other kind of instruments.

Level 6 Trading - USD-JPY Pair

Trading the U.S. Dollar/Japanese Yen
The U.S. dollar/Japanese yen pair features low bid-ask spreads and exceptional liquidity. As such, it is
a great pair to trade for newcomers to the forex market as well as an old favorite for more experienced
traders. And thanks to the forex market's 24 hour trading day, U.S.-based traders who prefer to trade
at night should consider focusing on the U.S. dollar/yen because the yen is heavily traded during Asian
business hours. (For more insight, see In the forex market, how is the closing price of a currency pair
determined?)

As previously mentioned, selling the yen as part of the carry trade is a popular strategy. The popularity
of the yen carry trade depends greatly on the state of the global financial markets. When there are
loads of opportunities to be had in global financial markets and volatility is relatively low, traders view
the yen carry trade as a good way to make money. However, when volatility increases,, the yen carry
trade tends to decline in popularity. A good thing for forex traders to look for when unsure of global
volatility is the popularity of the yen carry trade amongst hedge funds and other institutional investors.
During relatively quiet periods, the carry trade is very popular, and the ensuing selling pressure will
typically cause the yen to weaken. When global market volatility increases, the popularity of the yen
carry trade diminishes. As traders reverse the carry trade, they must then purchase the yen. This
buying pressure will lead to a general appreciation in the yen relative to the U.S. dollar or other
currencies.

Another big factor to be conscious of with the yen is Japan's dependence upon imports and exports.
Since Japan is largely dependent on imported oil and other natural resources, rising commodity prices
tend to hurt the Japanese economy and cause the yen to depreciate. Slower economic growth
among Japan's major trading partners will also cause Japan's export-dependent economy and the yen
to weaken. Japan's export dependence can also lead to central bank intervention when the yen shows
strength. Although economists sometimes debate the effectiveness of central bank intervention, it's
important to consider what impact they might have. The Bank of Japanhas a reputation for intervening
in the forex market when movements in the yen might threaten Japanese exports or economic growth.
Forex traders should be fully aware of this so that they are not caught by surprise if intervention by the
Bank of Japan causes a U-turn in the trend of the yen.

As the most liquid currency in Asia, the Japanese yen is also used as a proxy for overall Asian
economic growth. When economic or financial volatility hits Asia, traders will react by buying or selling
the yen as a substitute for other Asian nations whose currencies are tougher to trade.

Finally, it's important to mention that Japan has suffered an extremely long period of poor economic
growth and correspondingly low interest rates. Traders need to pay careful attention to the future path
of Japanese economic growth. Eventual economic recovery could bring with it increased interest rates,
a decrease in the popularity of the yen carry trade, and consistently stronger levels for the Japanese
yen.

78 ZC
Japanese Yen Facts
The Japanese economy is the leading economy in Asia and the world's second-largest national
economy. Japan is a major exporter throughout the world. Because of Japan's large amount of trade
with the United States, Europe, Asia and other nations, multinational corporations have a regular need
to convert local currency into Japanese yen and vice versa. Consistently low interest rates
in Japan have made the yen a popular currency for the carry trade as well. For these reasons, among
others, the U.S. dollar/Japanese yen pair is heavily traded in the forex market.

The Japanese Economy

A relatively small country in terms of size with little in the way of natural resources, Japan has relied on
a mastery of new technologies, a strong work ethic, innovative manufacturing techniques, a high
national savings rate, and a close working partnership between the Japanese government and
business sectors to conquer its natural disadvantages. Although the country and its economy were
severely damaged during the second World War, the Japanese economy has since grown to become
the largest on the planet next to the United States.

However, following over 40 years of incredible economic growth, the early 1990s marked an end to the
Japanese bull markets in domestic equities and real estate. The bursting of these bubbles led to a
quick economic slowdown and a deflationary spiral. The Japanese banking system was left with
trillions of yen in bad loans and consequently cut back its lending activities. Japanese consumer
spending also slowed dramatically as the country entered a prolonged economic downturn. For two
decades, the Japanese government has struggled to revive the economy and return growth to its
previously robust rates. Although t efforts have not yet been completely successful, no one can argue
the fact that Japan has become an economic powerhouse and an important source of global economic
activity today.

The Japanese Yen

The Japanese yen is the most heavily traded currency in Asia and the fourth most actively traded
currency in the world. During the 1980s, some analysts felt that the yen would one day join the U.S.
dollar as one of the world's reserve currencies. Japan's extended economic decline put a stop to those
hopes, at least temporarily, but the yen remains an extremely important currency in the global financial
markets.

The primary outcome of Japan's extended period of sluggish economic expansion is that the
Japanese central bank has been forced to keep its interest rates very low to help encourage economic
growth. As we previously touched on, these reduced interest rates have made the Japanese yen
tremendously popular in the carry trade. In a carry trade, investors and speculators sell the yen and
use the proceeds to purchase higher yielding currencies. This constant selling of the yen has played a
part in keeping it a lower level than it might otherwise trade.

Level 6 Trading - GBP-USD Pair

Trading the British Pound/U.S. Dollar
The British pound/U.S. dollar pair is one of the most liquid trades in forex. Bid-ask spreads are narrow,
and arbitrage opportunities are next to impossible. Nevertheless, the liquidity of the pair along with the
availability of numerous trading instruments makes the British pound/U.S. dollar a great choice for
novice currency traders.

79 ZC
As with the euro/U.S. dollar pair, the single most important factor in shaping your opinion on the
relationship between the currencies is the relative strength of the countries' respective economies.
When American economic performance is stronger than the U.K.'s, the dollar usually appreciates
against the pound. On the other hand, if the U.K.'s economy outperforms the States', the dollar usually
weakens against the pound. This relative strength is frequently reflected in domestic interest rates, so
traders should carefully watch the relationship between U.S. and U.K. interest rates. Also, since both
the U.S. and the U.K. have very large financial hubs, the performance of their financial sectors and
financial markets will also be important in discovering relative currency movements.

One very unique characteristic of trading the British pound is that there is often talk of whether
the U.K. may soon join the Eurozone (or European Monetary Union, known as the EMU). Imagine this
actually happened, the U.K. would then have to give up the pound and use only the euro as its
domestic currency. It is generally believed that if the U.K. did join the EMU, it would first need
to devalue the pound. Consequently, when U.K. politicians are speaking favorably of the possibility of
joining the EMU, the pound typically depreciates; when U.K. politicians speak against joining the EMU,
the pound will typically strengthen.

U.K. Facts
Although it's tiny in terms of land mass, the economy of the United Kingdom (U.K.)ranks among the
biggest in the world. The British (U.K.) pound sterling (or simply the pound) plays a significant role in
the international financial markets, making it a popular choice for forex traders in a pair against the U.S.
dollar.

The Economy of the United Kingdom

For over a century, the United Kingdom was the world's most powerful nation. The U.K.'s economy
was the world's biggest, and the small island nation dominated international trade. During this period,
the British pound served as the world's unofficial reserve currency. Following the World Wars,
the United Kingdom entered into a period of relative decline, while the United States grew into the
position of the world's most dominant economic power. The U.K.'s growth also slowed due to heavy
government regulation, while strict labor markets stunted economic activity.

However, the U.K. remained reasonably well-to-do, and since the 1980s, the U.K. has regained much
of its previously lost economic vivacity. This rise has coincided with the U.K.'s enhanced standing as a
major center for global finance. As U.K. and expatriate bankers flocked to London, the financial sector
has become a very important part of the U.K.'s overall economy. That being said, the direction and
strength of the U.K. financial sector plays a large role in determining the wellbeing of its economy.

The British (U.K.) Pound Sterling

Although the U.K. is a member of the European Union, the country remains outside
the Eurozone (the European Monetary Union) and maintains its own currency, the British pound
sterling.

Prior to the U.S. dollar becoming the world's reserve currency, the British pound held that position for
more than a century. The pound remains an important currency and a popular trading target for traders
of all types. The U.S. dollar and the pound are constantly traded between one another, and the pair
has earned the nickname "the cable" among traders, in reference to early markets when bid and ask
quotes were communicated between New York and London through underwater cables across the
Atlantic Ocean.

Level 6 Trading - USD-CHF Pair

Trading the U.S. Dollar/Swiss Franc
Although it is somewhat less liquid than the euro and the pound, the Swiss franc is still a very easy
currency for forex traders to trade. The issue most likely to result in big movements in the Swiss franc
is international political and/or economic instability. When either political or economic turmoil increases,
80 ZC
investors will flee to the safety of the Swiss franc. When volatility decreases, however, the Swiss franc
will see less interest from traders and investors.

Though the franc often rises against most other currencies during times of increased volatility,
forecasting the relative performance of the Swiss franc versus the U.S. dollar is difficult, since the U.S.
dollar is also seen as a safe haven during times of turmoil. Therefore, it is not always easy to figure out
whether the Swiss franc or the U.S. dollar will be the predominant source of safety during an
international crisis.

During less volatile periods, traders should keep in mind that the Swiss franc has a very
high correlation to the euro. When the value of the euro increases, the franc will usually follow suit. If
you notice a rise or decline in the euro without a corresponding move in the franc, you may want to
consider initiating a trade believing that the franc will eventually continue its historical correlation with
the euro. Keep in mind, however, that although this type of relative value trade is extremely popular
(and often profitable), there is no guarantee that markets will revert to their historical mean, so don't
put yourself in a position to get caught holding the bag

Franc Facts
Switzerland is widely regarded as a stable, safe and relatively wealthy nation. In the shadow of the
Alps and with a reputation for neutrality, Switzerland has long been viewed as a world unto itself. From
a financial perspective, this reputation has only been enhanced by the infamous secrecy of the Swiss
banking system. Although Swiss banking rules have eased somewhat recently, Switzerland is still an
international hub of private banking, insurance and investment management. Also, citizens
of Switzerland have long enjoyed one of the highest standards of living in the world.

Although Switzerland remains outside the European Union to maintain its status as a neutral
nation, Switzerland does partake in extensive trading with its European counterparts, the United States,
and many other countries from around the world. Switzerland is also home to large multinational
corporations such as the banking giants, UBS and Credit Suisse, and the consumer products firm,
Nestle.

The Swiss Franc

Switzerland's currency, the franc, plays an important role in the international capital markets. Due
to Switzerland's history of political neutrality and reputation for stable and discreet banking, the Swiss
franc is generally looked upon as a safe haven in international capital markets. As such, many
investors choose to hold a portion of their assets in Swiss francs. During times of international turmoil
investors often flee to the safety of the Swiss franc. For that reason, when volatility rises in the financial
markets, investors often bid up the Swiss franc at the expense of other currencies.

Level 6 Trading - Leverage

As we've already learned, leverage in the forex market is a key factor in explaining why forex has
become so popular. Forex trading offers high leverage in the sense that for a preliminary margin
requirement, a trader can build up (and manage) a large amount of money.

Margin-Based Leverage
To determine margin-based leverage, divide the total transaction amount by the level of margin you
are required to put up. (For more insight, check out Margin Trading.)

Total Value of Transaction

Margin-Based Leverage =
Margin Required

81 ZC
For example, if you're required to deposit 1% of the total transaction amount as margin and you are
trading one standard lot of USD/JPY which is equivalent to US$100,000, the margin requirement is
US$1,000. So, your margin-based leverage is 100:1 (100,000/1,000). For a margin requirement of
0.25%, the margin-based leverage is then 400:1.

Margin-Based Leverage Margin Required of Total

Expressed as Ratio Transaction Value

400:1 0.25%

200:1 0.50%

100:1 1.00%

50:1 2.00%

Now, we know margin-based leverage does not necessarily affect one's risks, because a trader's
margin requirement may not influence his or her profits or losses. This is because trader can always
allot more than their required margin for any position. What we need to look at is the real leverage, not
margin-based leverage.

Real Leverage
To determine your real leverage, divide the total face value of your open positions by your trading
capital.

Total Value of Transaction

Real Leverage =
Total Trading Capital

For example, if you have $10,000 in your trading account, and you open a $100,000 position (one
standard lot), you will be trading with 10x leverage in your account (100,000/10,000). Now, if you trade
two standard lots($200,000) with $10,000 in your account, then your leverage on the account is 20x
(200,000/10,000).

This also means that the margin-based leverage is equivalent to the maximum real leverage you, as a
trader, can use. And since the vast majority of traders don't use their entire accounts as margin for
each and every one of their trades, their real leverage differs from their margin-based leverage.

Risk of Excessive Real Leverage

So as you can see, real leverage has the ability to magnify your profits or losses by the same
magnitude. The greater the leverage you use, the higher the risk that you take on. Keep in mind that
this risk is not necessarily related to margin-based leverage, but it can influence if you're not careful.

Here's an example to illustrate this point (See Figure 1).

Let's say that both Trader X and Trader Y have a trading capital of US$10,000, and their broker
requires a 1% margin deposit. After doing their analysis, they both agree that USD/JPY has reached a
top and should fall in value soon. So both Trader X and Y short the USD/JPY at 120.

Trader X chooses to use 50x real leverage on his trade by shorting US$500,000 worth of USD/JPY (50

82 ZC
x $10,000) based on his $10,000 in trading capital. Because USD/JPY stands at 120, one pip of
USD/JPY for one standard lot is worth roughly US$8.30, so one pip of USD/JPY for five standard lots
is then worth about US$41.50. So, if USD/JPY rises to 121, Trader X will lose 100 pips on his trade,
which equals a loss of US$4,150. This single loss represents a massive 41.5% of his total trading
capital.

Trader Y was slightly more careful and decided to apply five times real leverage on his trade by
shorting US$50,000 worth of USD/JPY (5 x $10,000) based on his $10,000 trading capital. That
$50,000 worth of USD/JPY is only half of a standard lot. So if USD/JPY rises to 121, Trader Y will lose
100 pips on his trade, which equals to a loss of $415. Trader Y's loss represents only 4.15% of his total
trading capital.

Take a look at the chart below to see how the trading accounts of these two traders compare after their
100-pip losses.

Trader X Trader Y

Trading Capital $10,000 $10,000

Real Leverage Used 50 times 5 times

Total Value of Transaction $500,000 $50,000

In the Case of a 100-Pip Loss -$4,150 -$415

% Loss of Trading Capital 41.5% 4.15%

% of Trading Capital Remaining 58.5% 95.8%

Figure 1: All figures in U.S. dollars

Excessive Leverage Can Kill

By allotting a lesser amount of real leverage on each trade, you can give your trade a little more room
for error by setting a wider but reasonable stop thus avoiding risking too much of your money. Highly-
leveraged trades that move in the wrong direction can eat up your capital quickly due to larger lot sizes.
If you only remember one thing from this, remember that leverage is totally flexible and customizable
to your needs, so be sure to use leverage wisely and don't go for that home-run every time.

Level 6 Trading - Fundamental Speed

Strategy
Fundamental Speed: The What and the How
Fundamental speed is the process of keeping track of key economic indicators that directly impact the
currencies you trade, reacting to the release, and entering and exiting the position in a systematic way.
Here is step by step overview on how the strategy works:

1. Focus only on high-impact economic releases.

Every day numerous economic reports are published globally but only a handful are really worth
focusing and trading on. Large movements in currencies tend to occur when an economic release is
tied directly to their rate of transfer in relation to another country's

83 ZC
Here are a couple of releases you should keep track of:

• CPI
• Trade balance
• Interest rate statement
• Retail sales
• Home sales
• Consumer confidence
• Unemployment claims

Most economic calendars available online, such as Bloomberg's economic calendar, specifically
highlight the high impact economic releases. For example, their economic calendar marks market
moving events with a red star. This can be a handy tool when deciding which releases to focus on.

2. Set a time limit to move in and out of the market.

Generally, after an economic release, a reliable price movement occurs for one to two minutes.
Depending on whether the release met, fell below, or exceeded expectations you will see that the price
typically reacts in the expected direction - but many times it moves in what seems to be a random
direction after the first minute or two.

This is not so much a random movement as it is a government trying to stabilize its currency or a bank
pushing money through to get the best transfer rate - things that are out of your control. If the release
points and moves in the direction of the daily moving average, you may feel comfortable holding your
position for up to five minutes. However, look at this on a trade-by-trade basis.

3. Do nothing in a neutral situation.

If the predicted or forecasted figure matched the actual figure, don't jump in to a trade just for the sake
of trading. Trading this strategy only gives you a few trade options on any given day (less if you trade
only one or two currency pairs) and there is a temptation to risk money in a neutral situation. It is
important to trade according to a system rather than emotions.

More Probable, More Profits

As a forex trader it is important to making trades that have a high probability of success. Over time, by
making trades that have a good chance of success typically you will have a higher overall return.
Sticking to a system allows you to monitor your trades to determine which trades are not profitable and
which are profitable. Two other key benefits of a fundamental speed strategy are:

1) Less reliance on charts and technical analysis.

As a beginner forex trader, technical trading will seem complex and difficult to read correctly. On the
other hand, reading fundamentals (via economic reports) and reacting correctly can be done with more
consistency and with more predictable results. As you become more accustomed to trading, you can
blend fundamental speed and technical analysis to enhance your trading opportunities.

2) Ability to develop a systematic schedule.

For numerous traders, the hardest part of trading is deciding when they should trade. The timing of the
economic reports allows traders to create a schedule and know exactly when they are going to trade.

Conclusion
Trading using a fundamental speed strategy can feel more intuitive for some traders as it relies on
economic releases. But this is just one strategy out of many that you should consider in your arsenal
as a forex trader. In the next section, we'll talk about the carry trade which is another strategy that is
popular among traders.

84 ZC
Level 6 Trading - Carry Trade
Carry Trade
Another popular trading strategy among currency traders is the carry trade. The carry trade is a
strategy in which traders borrow a currency that has a low interest rate and use the funds to buy a
different currency that is paying a higher interest rate. The traders' goal in this strategy is to earn not
only the interest rate differential between the two currencies, but to also look for the currency they
purchased to appreciate.

Carry Trade Success

The key to a successful carry trade is not just trading a currency with high interest rate and another
with a low interest rate. Rather, more important than the absolute spread between the currencies is the
direction of the spread. For an ideal carry trade, you should be long a currency with an interest rate
that is in the process of expanding against a currency with a stationary or contracting interest rate. This
dynamic can be true if the central bank of the country in which you are long is looking to raise interest
rates or if the central bank of the country in which you are short is looking to lower interest rates. There
have been plenty of opportunities for big profits in the past in the carry trade. Let's take a look at a few
historical examples. (To learn more, read Currency Carry Trades Deliver)

Between 2003 and the end of 2004, the AUD/USD currency pair offered a positive yield spread of
2.5%. Although this may appear small, with the use of 10:1 leverage the return would become 25%.
During that same period, the Australian dollar also appreciated from 56 cents to close at 80 cents
against the U.S. dollar, which represented a 42% appreciation in the currency pair. This means that if
you were in this trade you would have profited from both the positive yield and the capital gains.

Figure 1: Australian Dollar Composite, 2003-2005

Source: eSignal

Let's take a look at another example, this time looking at the USD/JPY pair in 2005. Between January
and December of that year, the USD/JPY rallied from 102 to a high of 121.40 before settling in at
117.80. This is equal to an appreciation from low to high of 19%, which was far greater than the 2.9%
return in the S&P 500 during that same year. Also, at the time, the interest rate spread between the
85 ZC
U.S. dollar and the Japanese yen averaged approximately 3.25%. Without the use of leverage, this
means that a trader could have potentially earned as much as 22.25% in 2005. With 10:1 leverage and
that could have been as much as 220% gain.

Figure 2: Japan Yen Composite, 2005

Source: eSignal

In the USD/JPY example, between 2005 and 2006, the U.S.Federal Reserve aggressively raised
interest rates 200 basis points from 2.25% in January to 4.25%. During the same period, the Bank of
Japan left interest rates at zero. Therefore, the spread between U.S. and Japanese interest rates grew
from 2.25% (2.25% - 0%) to 4.25% (4.25% - 0%). This is an example of an expanding interest rate
spread.

Conclusion
The main thing to look for when looking to do a carry trade is finding a currency pair with a high
interest spread and finding a pair that has been appreciating or is in an uptrend. Also, understanding
the underlying fundamentals behind interest rates changes is one of the keys to implementing a carry
trade. The next section will introduce you to the all-important concept of money management within
your forex account.

Level 6 Trading - Money Management

Put two rookie traders in front of the screen, provide them with your best high-probability set-up, and
for good measure, have each one take the opposite side of the trade. More than likely, both will wind
up losing money. However, if you take two pros and have them trade in the opposite direction of each
other, quite frequently both traders will wind up making money - despite the seeming contradiction of
the premise. What's the difference? What is the most important factor separating the seasoned traders
from the amateurs? The answer is money management.

Like dieting and working out, money management is something that most traders pay lip service to, but
few practice in real life. The reason is simple: just like eating healthy and staying fit, money
86 ZC
management can seem like a burdensome, unpleasant activity. It forces traders to constantly monitor
their positions and to take necessary losses, and few people like to do that. However, as Figure 1
proves, loss-taking is crucial to long-term trading success.

Amount of Equity Lost Amount of Return Necessary to Restore to Original Equity Value

25% 33%

50% 100%

75% 400%

90% 1,000%

Figure 1 - This table shows just how difficult it is to recover from a debilitating loss.

Note that a trader would have to earn 100% on his or her capital - a feat accomplished by less than 1%
of traders worldwide - just to break even on an account with a 50% loss. At 75% drawdown, the trader
must quadruple his or her account just to bring it back to its original equity - truly a Herculean task!

The Big One

Although most traders are familiar with the figures above, they are inevitably ignored. Trading books
are littered with stories of traders losing one, two, even five years' worth of profits in a single trade
gone terribly wrong. Typically, the runaway loss is a result of sloppy money management, with no hard
stops and lots of average downsinto the longs and average ups into the shorts. Above all, the runaway
loss is due simply to a loss of discipline.

Most traders begin their trading career, whether consciously or subconsciously, visualizing "The Big
One" - the one trade that will make them millions and allow them to retire young and live carefree for
the rest of their lives. In forex, this fantasy is further reinforced by the folklore of the markets. Who can
forget the time that George Soros "broke the Bank of England" by shorting the pound and walked away
with a cool $1-billion profit in a single day? But the cold hard truth for most retail traders is that, instead
of experiencing the "Big Win", most traders fall victim to just one "Big Loss" that can knock them out of
the game forever.

Learning Tough Lessons

Traders can avoid this fate by controlling their risks through stop losses. In Jack Schwager's famous
book "Market Wizards" (1989), day trader and trend follower Larry Hite offers this practical advice:
"Never risk more than 1% of total equity on any trade. By only risking 1%, I am indifferent to any
individual trade." This is a very good approach. A trader can be wrong 20 times in a row and still have
80% of his or her equity left.

The reality is that very few traders have the discipline to practice this method consistently. Not unlike a
child who learns not to touch a hot stove only after being burned once or twice, most traders can only
absorb the lessons of risk discipline through the harsh experience of monetary loss. This is the most
important reason why traders should use only their speculative capital when first entering the forex

87 ZC
market. When novices ask how much money they should begin trading with, one seasoned trader says:
"Choose a number that will not materially impact your life if you were to lose it completely. Now
subdivide that number by five because your first few attempts at trading will most likely end up in blow
out." This too is very sage advice, and it is well worth following for anyone considering trading forex.

Money Management Styles

Generally speaking, there are two ways to practice successful money management. A trader can take
many frequent small stops and try to harvest profits from the few large winning trades, or a trader can
choose to go for many small squirrel-like gains and take infrequent but large stops in the hope the
many small profits will outweigh the few large losses. The first method generates many minor
instances of psychological pain, but it produces a few major moments of ecstasy. On the other hand,
the second strategy offers many minor instances of joy, but at the expense of experiencing a few very
nasty psychological hits. With this wide-stop approach, it is not unusual to lose a week or even a
month's worth of profits in one or two trades. (For further reading, see Introduction To Types Of
Trading: Swing Trades.)

To a large extent, the method you choose depends on your personality; it is part of the process of
discovery for each trader. One of the great benefits of the forex market is that it can accommodate
both styles equally, without any additional cost to the retail trader. Since forex is a spread-based
market, the cost of each transaction is the same, regardless of the size of any given trader's position.

For example, in EUR/USD, most traders would encounter a 3 pip spread equal to the cost of 3/100th of
1% of the underlying position. This cost will be uniform, in percentage terms, whether the trader wants
to deal in 100-unit lots or one million-unit lots of the currency. For example, if the trader wanted to use
10,000-unit lots, the spread would amount to $3, but for the same trade using only 100-unit lots, the
spread would be a mere $0.03. Contrast that with the stock market where, for example, a commission
on 100 shares or 1,000 shares of a $20 stock may be fixed at $40, making the effective cost of
transaction 2% in the case of 100 shares, but only 0.2% in the case of 1,000 shares. This type of
variability makes it very hard for smaller traders in the equity market to scale into positions, as
commissions heavily skew costs against them. However, forex traders have the benefit of uniform
pricing and can practice any style of money management they choose without concern about variable
transaction costs.

Four Types of Stops

Once you are ready to trade with a serious approach to money management and the proper amount of
capital is allocated to your account, there are four types of stops you may consider.

1. Equity Stop - This is the simplest of all stops. The trader risks only a predetermined amount of his
or her account on a single trade. A common metric is to risk 2% of the account on any given trade. On
a hypothetical $10,000 trading account, a trader could risk $200, or about 200 points, on one mini lot
(10,000 units) of EUR/USD, or only 20 points on a standard 100,000-unit lot. Aggressive traders may
consider using 5% equity stops, but note that this amount is generally considered to be the upper limit
of prudent money management because 10 consecutive wrong trades would draw down the account
by 50%.

One strong criticism of the equity stop is that it places an arbitrary exit point on a trader's position. The
trade is liquidated not as a result of a logical response to the price action of the marketplace, but rather
to satisfy the trader's internal risk controls.

88 ZC
2. Chart Stop - Technical analysis can generate thousands of possible stops, driven by the price
action of the charts or by various technical indicator signals. Technically oriented traders like to
combine these exit points with standard equity stop rules to formulate charts stops. A classic example
of a chart stop is the swing high/low point. In Figure 2 a trader with our hypothetical $10,000 account
using the chart stop could sell one mini lot risking 150 points, or about 1.5% of the account.

Figure 2

3. Volatility Stop - A more sophisticated version of the chart stop uses volatility instead of price action
to set risk parameters. The idea is that in a high volatility environment, when prices traverse wide
ranges, the trader needs to adapt to the present conditions and allow the position more room for risk to
avoid being stopped out by intra-market noise. The opposite holds true for a low volatility environment,
in which risk parameters would need to be compressed.

One easy way to measure volatility is through the use of Bollinger Bands®, which employ standard
deviation to measure variance in price. Figures 3 and 4 show a high volatility and a low volatility stop
with Bollinger Bands®. In Figure 3 the volatility stop also allows the trader to use a scale-in approach
to achieve a better "blended" price and a faster break even point. Note that the total risk exposure of
the position should not exceed 2% of the account; therefore, it is critical that the trader use smaller lots
to properly size his or her cumulative risk in the trade.

89 ZC
 Figure 3

Figure 4

4. Margin Stop - This is perhaps the most unorthodox of all money management strategies, but it can
be an effective method in forex, if used judiciously. Unlike exchange-based markets, forex markets
operate 24 hours a day. Therefore, forex dealers can liquidate their customer positions almost as soon
as they trigger a margin call. For this reason, forex customers are rarely in danger of generating a
negative balance in their account, since computers automatically close out all positions.

This money management strategy requires the trader to subdivide his or her capital into 10 equal parts.
In our original $10,000 example, the trader would open the account with an forex dealer but only wire
$1,000 instead of $10,000, leaving the other $9,000 in his or her bank account. Most forex dealers
offer 100:1 leverage, so a $1,000 deposit would allow the trader to control one standard 100,000-unit
lot. However, even a 1 point move against the trader would trigger a margin call (since $1,000 is the
minimum that the dealer requires). So, depending on the trader's risk tolerance, he or she may choose
to trade a 50,000-unit lot position, which allows him or her room for almost 100 points (on a 50,000 lot
the dealer requires $500 margin, so $1,000 – 100-point loss* 50,000 lot = $500). Regardless of how
90 ZC
much leverage the trader assumed, this controlled parsing of his or her speculative capital would
prevent the trader from blowing up his or her account in just one trade and would allow him or her to
take many swings at a potentially profitable set-up without the worry or care of setting manual stops.
For those traders who like to practice the "have a bunch, bet a bunch" style, this approach may be
quite interesting.

Conclusion
As you can see, money management in forex is as flexible and as varied as the market itself. The only
universal rule is that all traders in this market must practice some form of it in order to succeed.

Level 6 Trading - Forex Futures

One derivative of the forex market is the forex futures market, which is only 1/100th the size of the
currency market. Read on to examine the key differences between forex futures and
traditional futures and looks at some strategies for speculating and hedging with this useful derivative.

Forex Futures versus Traditional Futures

Both forex and traditional futures operate in the same basic manner: a contract is purchased to buy or
sell a specific amount of an asset at a particular price on a predetermined date. (For an in-depth
introduction to futures, see Futures Fundamentals.) There is, however, one key difference between the
two: forex futures are not traded on a centralized exchange; rather, the deal flow is available through
several different exchanges in the U.S. and abroad. The vast majority of forex futures are traded
through the Chicago Mercantile Exchange (CME) and its partners (introducing brokers).

However, this is not to say that forex futures contracts are OTC per se; they are still bound to a
designated 'size per contract,' and they are offered only in whole numbers (unlike forward contracts). It
is important to remember that all currency futures quotes are made against the U.S. dollar, unlike the
spot forex market.

Here is an example of what a forex futures quote looks like:

Euro FX Futures on the CME

For any given futures contract, your broker should provide you with its specifications, such as the
contract sizes, time increments, trading hours, pricing limits, and other relevant information. Here is an
example of what a specification sheet might look like:

91 ZC
Specification Sheet from CME

Hedging versus Speculating

Hedging and speculating are the two primary ways in which forex derivatives are used. Hedgers use
forex futures to reduce or eliminate risk by insulating themselves against any future price movements.
Speculators, on the other hand, want to incur risk in order to make a profit. Now, let's take a more in-
depth look at these two strategies:

Hedging
There are many reasons to use a hedging strategy in the forex futures market. One main purpose is to
neutralize the effect of currency fluctuations on sales revenue. For example, if a business operating
overseas wanted to know exactly how much revenue it will obtain (in U.S. dollars) from its European
stores, it could purchase a futures contract in the amount of its projected net sales to eliminate
currency fluctuations.

When hedging, traders must often choose between futures and another derivative known as a forward.
There are several differences between these two instruments, the most notable of which are these:

• Forwards allow the trader more flexibility in choosing contract sizes and setting dates. This allows
you to tailor the contracts to your needs instead of using a set contract size (futures).

• The cash that's backing a forward is not due until the expiration of the contract, whereas the cash
behind futures is calculated daily, and buyer and seller are held liable for daily cash settlements. By
using futures, you have the ability to re-evaluate your position as often as you like. With forwards, you
must wait until the contract expires.

Speculating
Speculating is by nature profit-driven. In the forex market, futures and spot forex are not all that

92 ZC
different. So why exactly would you want to participate in the futures market instead of the spot market?
Well, there are several arguments for and against trading in the futures market:

Advantages
• Lower spreads (2-3).
• Lower transaction costs (as low as $5 per contract).
• More leverage (often $500+ per contract).

Disadvantages
• Often requires a higher amount of capital ($100,000 lots).
• Limited to the exchange's session times.
• NFA (National Futures Association) fees may apply.

The strategies employed for speculating are similar to those used in spot markets. The most widely
used strategies are based on common forms of technical chart analysis since these markets tend to
trend well. These include Fibonacci studies, Gann studies, pivot points, and other similar techniques.
Alternately, some speculators use more advanced strategies, such as arbitrage.

Conclusion
As we can see, forex futures operate similarly to traditional stock and commodity futures. There are
many advantages to using them for hedging as well as speculating. The distinguishing feature of forex
futures is that they are not traded on a centralized exchange. Forex futures can be used to hedge
against currency fluctuations, but some traders use these instruments in pursuit of profit, just as they
would use futures on the spot market.

Level 6 Trading - Forex Options

Many people think of the stock market when they think of options. However, the foreign
exchange market also offers the opportunity to trade these unique derivatives. Options give retail
traders many opportunities to limit risk and increase profit. Here we discuss what options are, how they
are used and which strategies you can use to profit.

Types of Forex Options

There are two primary types of options available to retail FOREX traders. The most common is the
traditional call/put option, which works much like the respective stock option. The other alternative is
"single payment option trading" - or SPOT - which gives traders more flexibility. (Learn to choose the
right Forex account in Forex Basics: Setting Up An Account.)

Traditional Options
Traditional options allow the buyer the right (but not the obligation) to purchase something from the
option seller at a set price and time. For example, a trader might purchase an option to buy two lots of
EUR/USD at 1.3000 in one month; such a contract is known as a "EUR call/USD put." (Keep in mind
that, in the options market, when you buy a call, you buy a put simultaneously - just as in the cash
market.) If the price of EUR/USD is below 1.3000, the option expires worthless, and the buyer loses
only the premium. On the other hand, if EUR/USD skyrockets to 1.4000, then the buyer can exercise
the option and gain two lots for only 1.3000, which can then be sold for profit.

Since FOREX options are traded over-the-counter (OTC), traders can choose the price and date on
which the option is to be valid and then receive a quote stating the premium they must pay to obtain
the option.

There are two types of traditional options offered by brokers:

93 ZC
 • American-style – This type of option can be exercised at any point up until expiration.
• European-style – This type of option can be exercised only at the time of expiration.

One advantage of traditional options is that they have lower premiums than SPOT options. Also,
because (American) traditional options can be bought and sold before expiration, they allow for more
flexibility. On the other hand, traditional options are more difficult to set and execute than SPOT
options. (For a detailed introduction to options, see Options Basics Tutorial.)

Single Payment Options Trading (SPOT)

Here is how SPOT options work: the trader inputs a scenario (for example, "EUR/USD will break
1.3000 in 12 days"), obtains a premium (option cost) quote, and then receives a payout if the scenario
takes place. Essentially, SPOT automatically converts your option to cash when your option trade is
successful, giving you a payout.

Many traders enjoy the additional choices (listed below) that SPOT options give traders. Also, SPOT
options are easy to trade: it's a matter of entering the scenario and letting it play out. If you are correct,
you receive cash into your account. If you are not correct, your loss is your premium. Another
advantage is that SPOT options offer a choice of many different scenarios, allowing the trader to
choose exactly what he or she thinks is going to happen.

A disadvantage of SPOT options, however, is higher premiums. On average, SPOT option premiums
cost more than standard options.

Why Trade Options?

There are several reasons why options in general appeal to many traders:

• Your downside risk is limited to the option premium (the amount you paid to purchase the
option).
• You have unlimited profit potential.
• You pay less money up front than for a SPOT (cash) FOREX position.
• You get to set the price and expiration date. (These are not predefined like those of options
on futures.)
• Options can be used to hedge against open spot (cash) positions in order to limit risk.
• Without risking a lot of capital, you can use options to trade on predictions of market
movements before fundamental events take place (such as economic reports or meetings).
• SPOT options allow you many choices:
• Standard options.
• One-touch SPOT – You receive a payout if the price touches a certain level.
• No-touch SPOT – You receive a payout if the price doesn't touch a certain level.
• Digital SPOT – You receive a payout if the price is above or below a certain level.
• Double one-touch SPOT – You receive a payout if the price touches one of two set
levels.
• Double no-touch SPOT – You receive a payout if the price doesn't touch any of the two
set levels.

So, why isn't everyone using options? Well, there also are a few downsides to using them:

• The premium varies, according to the strike price and date of the option, so the risk/reward ratio
varies.
• SPOT options cannot be traded: once you buy one, you can't change your mind and then sell it.
• It can be hard to predict the exact time period and price at which movements in the market may
occur.
• You may be going against the odds. (See the article Do Option Sellers Have A Trading Edge?)

94 ZC
Options Prices
Options have several factors that collectively determine their value:

• Intrinsic value - This is how much the option would be worth if it were to be exercised right now.
The position of the current price in relation to the strike price can be described in one of three
ways:
• "In the money" - This means the strike price is higher than the current market price.
• "Out of the money" – This means the strike price is lower than the current market price.
• "At the money" – This means the strike price is at the current market price.
• The time value - This represents the uncertainty of the price over time. Generally, the longer the
time, the higher premium you pay because the time value is greater.
• Interest rate differential - A change in interest rates affects the relationship between the strike of
the option and the current market rate. This effect is often factored into the premium as a
function of the time value.
• Volatility - Higher volatility increases the likelihood of the market price hitting the strike price
within a limited time period. Volatility is factored into the time value. Typically, more volatile
currencies have higher options premiums.

How it Works
Say it's January 2, 2010, and you think that the EUR/USD (euro vs. dollar) pair, which is currently at
1.3000, is headed downward due to positive U.S. numbers; however, there are some major reports
coming out soon that could cause significant volatility. You suspect this volatility will occur within the
next two months, but you don't want to risk a cash position, so you decide to use options. (Learn the
tools that will help you get started in Forex Courses Teach Beginners How To Trade.)

You then go to your broker and put in a request to buy a EUR put/USD call, commonly referred to as a
"EUR put option," set at a strike price of 1.2900 and an expiry of March 2, 2010. The broker informs
you that this option will cost 10 pips, so you gladly decide to buy.

This order would look something like this:

Buy: EUR put/USD call
Strike price: 1.2900
Expiration: 2 March 2010
Premium: 10 USD pips
Cash (spot) reference: 1.3000

Say the new reports come out and the EUR/USD pair falls to 1.2850 - you decide to exercise your
option, and the result gives you 40 USD pips profit (1.2900 – 1.2850 – 0.0010).

Option Strategies
Options can be used in a variety of ways, but they are usually used for one of two purposes: (1) to
capture profit or (2) to hedge against existing positions.

Profit Motivated Strategies

Options are a good way to profit while keeping the risk down--after all, you can lose no more than the
premium! Many FOREX traders like to use options around the times of important reports or events,
when the spreads and risk increase in the cash FOREX markets. Other profit-driven FOREX traders
simply use options instead of cash because options are cheaper. An options position can make a lot
more money than a cash position in the same amount.

Hedging Strategies
Options are a great way to hedge against your existing positions to decrease risk. Some traders even
use options instead of or together with stop-loss points. The primary advantage of using options

95 ZC
together with stops is that you have an unlimited profit potential if the price continues to move against
your position.

Conclusion
Although they can be difficult to use, options represent yet another valuable tool that traders can use to
profit or lower risk. Options in FOREX are especially prevalent during important economic reports or
events that cause significant volatility (when cash markets have high spreads and uncertainty).

96 ZC
Charts - Moving Average Explosions
Not only are moving averages used as directional indicators in the forex market, many funds and
speculators have used them for other purposes, including key resistance and support levels as well as
for spotting turnarounds in the market. These situations offer plenty of profit and trading opportunities
for the FX trader, but picking out these situations takes patience. Let's take a look at how a forex trader
can use moving averages to profit in the currency markets.

Setting the Stage

In a broader sense, the simple moving average can be compared to the original market sentiment
application first intended for the indicator. At first glance, traders use the indicator to compare current
closing price to historical or previous closing prices over a specified number of periods. In theory, the
comparison should show the directional bias that would accompany other analyses, be it technical or
fundamental, in working to place a trade. In Figure 1, we can see the application of the 50-day simple
moving average (SMA) (yellow line) applied to the euro/U.S. dollar currency pair. After some
mild consolidation in the early part of 2006, bullish buying took over the market and drove prices higher.
Here, traders can confirm the directional bias, as the long-term measure is indicative of the large
advance higher. The suggestion is even stronger when showing the added 100-day simple moving
average (green line). Not only are moving averages in line with the underlying price action higher,
current prices (50-day SMA) are moving above longer term prices (100-day SMA), which are indicative
of buying momentum. The reverse would be indicative of selling momentum.

Source: FX Trek Intellicharts

Figure 1: Moving averages show the inherent direction

97 ZC
Support and Resistance
Moving averages are not only used in referring to directional bias, they also are used as support and
resistance. The moving average acts as a barrier where prices have already been tested. The more
tests there are, the more fortified the support figure becomes, increasing the likelihood of a bounce
higher. A break below the support would signal sufficient strength for a move lower. As a result, a
flatter moving average will show prices that have stabilized and created an underlying support level
(Figure 2) for the underlying price. Larger firms and institutional trading systems also place a lot of
emphasis on these levels as trigger points where the market is likely to take notice, making the levels
prime targets for volatility and a sudden shift in demand. Knowing this, let's take a look at how you can
take advantage of this points. (To read more, see Support & Resistance Basics and Support And
Resistance Reversals.)

Source: FX Trek Intellicharts

Figure 2: Flatter moving averages are perfect support formations.

Taking Advantage of the Explosion

When institutional investors notice support and resistance levels, these "deeper pockets", along
with algorithmic trading systems, will pepper buy or sell orders at this level. These orders tends to
force the session higher through the support or resistance barrier because every order exacerbates
the directional move. In Figure 3, we see this phenomenon in both directions, most notably to the
downside on the daily perspective of the British pound/U.S. dollar currency pair. In both Point A and
Point B, the chartist can see that once the session breaks through the figure, the price continues to
decline throughout the session until the close, with subsequent momentum taking the price lower in the
98 ZC
intermediate term. Here, once through the support line (the 25-day simple moving average), sellers of
the currency pair enter and combine with larger orders that are placed below the level. This drives the
price farther below the moving average barrier.

Source: FX Trek Intellicharts

Figure 3: Breaks through support or resistance are exacerbated.

Trading this occurrence can be complicated, but it's simple enough to implement. Let's take a look at
how to approach this using our British pound/U.S. dollar example:

1. Identify a short-term opportunity on the longer term perspective. Because the longer moving
averages are usually the ones getting a lot of the attention, the trade must be placed in the longer term
time frame. In this case, the daily perspective is used to identify the opportunity on October 5 (Point B).

2. Zoom into the short term for the entry point. Now we've made the decision for a short sell on the
break of the 25-day simple moving average at Point B in the above example, the trader should look at
the short term to find an entry point. According to the chart, definitive support is at 1.8850. A close
below the support would confirm selling momentum and coincide with the break below the moving
average, which represents a perfect short suggestion.

3. Place the entry. As a result of the preceding analysis, the entry order is placed 1 pip below the low
of the hourly session, a confirmation of the move lower. Subsequently, the stop order is placed slightly
above the broken trendline. With the previous support figure standing at 1.8850, the stop should be set
as a trailing stop at a maximum of 10 pips above the current resistance figure. Therefore, the stop is
placed at 1.8860, one pip above the session high with an entry in at 1.8812, giving us 48 pips in risk.
According to the chart, the trade lasts for almost two days before the price action spikes sharply higher
and is ended by the trailing stop. Before that, however, the price action dips as low as 1.8734,
providing a potential profit of 78 points, almost a 1.5:1 risk/reward ratio.

99 ZC
 Source: FX Trek Intellicharts

Figure 4: Break below SMA coincides with key break below support

A good strategy on its own, the moving average explosion is often associated with the infamous short
squeeze in the market. Here, the volatility and quickness in the reactions of market participants will
exacerbate the directional price action and sometimes exaggerate the market's move. Although often
perceived as risky, the situation can also lead to some very profitable trades. (For related reading,
see What does "squeezing the shorts" mean?)

Defining a Short Squeeze

A short squeeze is when participants in the market who are selling an asset must reverse their
positions quickly as buying demand over-runs them. The situation usually causes a lot of volatility as
buyers pick up the asset quickly while sellers panic and try to exit their positions as fast as they can.
The explosive reaction is much more exaggerated in the FX markets. Technological advancements
that speed up the transactions in the market as well as stop orders larger traders use to protect and
initiate positions result in short squeezes being bigger and more exacerbated in currency pairs.
Combining this theory along with our previous examples of moving averages, opportunities abound as
trading systems and funds usually place such orders around key moving average levels.

Textbook Example: Squeeze'um

For a prime example, let's take a look at this snapshot in the currency market in Figure 5. Here, in the
British pound/Swiss franc synthetic currency pair, the price forms a formidable resistance level. With
such a barrier, most of the market is likely to see a short opportunity, making the area of prices slightly
above the resistance key for stops that are corresponding with the short sell positions. With enough
parties selling, the number of short sellers reaches a low. With the first sign of buying, momentum
starts to build as the price begins to climb and it tests the resistance level. Ultimately, after breaking
above this level, sellers who are still short begin to consider squaring their positions as they start to
100 ZC
incur losses. This, coupled with mounting buying interest, sparks a surge in the price action and
creates the jump above the pivotal 2.3800 handle, continuing 50 points higher.

Source: FX Trek Intellicharts

Figure 5: Textbook squeeze takes out short sides.

Combining the Two

Now that we have gone over both the idea of moving average explosions and the mechanics behind
the short squeeze, let's see how we can isolate a profitable opportunity. In Figure 6, we will deal with a
great example in the European euro / U.S. dollar currency major. Going back to the beginning of 2006,
the U.S. dollar strengthened sharply over three sessions. Retracing back to a former support level,
buyers and sellers were contending over the previous selling momentum, forming a stabilized support
figure. At the start of the range, the body of the candle is as wide as 50-60 points; however, with less
momentum and the struggle between buyers and sellers continuing, the session range narrows to 15-
20 points. In the end, the buyers win out, pushing the currency pair through the simple moving average
and sparking the buying momentum to close almost 200 points above the open price. At the same time,
positions that were previously short flip positions to minimize losses, fully supporting the heightened
move.

101 ZC
 Source: FX Trek Intellicharts

Figure 6: A textbook example comes to life

1. Identify the potential

In Figure 6, the narrow ranges and consolidation in the price action represent a slowing of selling
momentum. With the moving average acting as resistance toward the end of the range, an opportunity
presents itself.

2. Zoom into a detailed entry

With the opportunity identified, the trader looks at the shorter time frame to make a comprehensive
evaluation. In Figure 7, the resistance at 1.1900 is formidable, acting as a topside barrier with the
lower support figure around the 1.1800 / 1.1750 figures. Knowing that a short squeeze is an increasing
probability, the speculator will take the long side on the trade.

3. Place the entry

Now that the analysis has been completed, initiating the trade is simple. Taking the resistance into
account, the trader will place an entry just above the 1.1900 resistance figure or higher. Sometimes an
entry higher above the range high will add an additional confirmation, indicative of the momentum. As
a result, the entry will be placed two points above the high at 1.1913 (Point C). The corresponding stop
will be placed just below the next level of support, in this instance at 1.1849, one point below the
1.1850 figure. Should the price action break down, this will confirm a turnaround and will take the
position out of the market.

4. What's the payoff?

The reward is well worth the 64 points of risk in this example, as the impending move takes the
position higher above the 1.2100 handle, giving the trader a profit of 187 points before making the
102 ZC
move higher to 1.2150. The result is a risk-reward ratio that is almost 3:1, better than the minimum
recommended 2:1 ratio.

Figure 7: Trader's objective is to capture the explosion.

In Closing
Moving averages can offer a lot more insight into the market than many people believe. Combined with
capital flow and a key market sense, the currency trader can maximize profits while keeping indicators
to a minimum, retaining a highly sought after edge. Ultimately, succeeding at the moving average
explosion is about knowing how participants are reacting in the market and combining this with
indicators that can keep knowledgeable short-term traders opportunistic and profitable in the long run.

103 ZC
Charts - Moving Average Strategies
Forex traders use moving averages for different reasons. Some use them as their primary analytical
tool, while others simply use them as a confidence builder to back up their investment decisions. In this
section, we'll present a few different types of strategies - incorporating them into your trading style is
up to you!

Crossovers
A crossover is the most basic type of signal and is favored among many traders because it removes
the element of emotion from trading. The most basic type of crossover occurs when the price of an
asset moves from one side of a moving average and closes on the other. As we've discussed, price
crossovers are used by traders to identify shifts in momentum and can be used as a basic entry or exit
strategy. As you can see in Figure 1, a cross below a moving average can signal the beginning of a
downtrend and would likely be used by traders as a signal to close out any existing long positions.
Conversely, a close above a moving average from below may suggest the beginning of a new
uptrend.

Figure 1

A second type of crossover occurs when a short-term average crosses through a long-term average.
This signal is used by traders to spot when momentum is shifting in one direction and that a strong
move is likely approaching. A buy signal is generated when the short-term average crosses above the
long-term average, while a sell signal is triggered by a short-term average crossing below a long-term
average. As you can see from the chart below, this signal is very objective, which is why it's so
popular.

104 ZC
 Figure 2

Triple Crossover and the Moving Average Ribbon

Supplementary moving averages may be added to the chart to increase the strength of a signal. Many
traders will place the five-, 10-, and 20-day moving averages onto a chart and wait until the five-day
average crosses up through the others – this is generally the primary buy sign. Waiting for the10-day
average to cross above the 20-day average is often used as confirmation, an approach that can
reduce the number of false signals. Increasing the number of moving averages, as seen in the triple
crossover method, is one of the best ways to gauge the strength of a trend and the likelihood that the
trend will continue.

Some traders argue that if one moving average is useful, then 10 or more must be even better. This
leads us to a technique known as the moving average ribbon. As you can see from the chart below,
many moving averages are placed onto the same chart and are used to judge the strength of the
current trend. When all the moving averages are moving in the same direction, the trend is said to be
strong. Reversals are confirmed when the averages cross over and head in the opposite direction.

105 ZC
 Figure 3

The shorter the time periods used in the calculations, the more sensitive the average is to slight price
changes. Often ribbons start with a 50-day moving average and adds averages in 10-day increments
up to the final average of 200. This type of average is good at identifying long-term trends/reversals.

Filters
A filter is any technique used in technical analysis to increase one's confidence about a trade. For
example, many traders may choose to wait until a pair crosses above a moving average and is at least
10% above the average before placing an order. This is an attempt to make sure the crossover is valid
and to reduce the number of false signals. The downside of an over-reliance on filters is that some of
the gain is given up and could lead to you "missing the boat". There are no set rules or things to look
out for when filtering; it's simply an additional tool that will allow you to invest with confidence.

Moving Average Envelope

One more strategy that incorporates the use of moving averages is known as an envelope. This
strategy plots two bands around a moving average, staggered by a specific percentage rate. For
example, in the chart below, a 5% envelope is placed around a 25-day moving average. Notice how
the move often reverses direction after approaching one of the levels. A price move beyond the band
can signal a period of exhaustion, and traders will watch for a reversal toward the center average.

106 ZC
 Figure 4

107 ZC
Charts - Moving Average Flavors
While most moving averages (MAs) take the closing prices of a given asset and factor them into the
calculation, this does not always need to be the case. It is possible to calculate a moving average by
using the open, close, high, low or even the median. Even though there is little difference between
these calculations when plotted on a chart, the slight difference could still impact your analysis.

Finding Appropriate Time Periods

Because most MAs represent the average of all the applicable daily prices, it should be noted that the
time frame does not always need to be in days. Moving averages can also be calculated using minutes,
hours, weeks, months, quarters, years etc. Why would a forex day trader care about how a 50-day
moving average will affect the price over the upcoming weeks? Rather, a day trader would want to pay
attention to a 50-minute average to get an idea of the relative cost of the security compared to the past
hour.

No Average Is Foolproof
As you know, nothing in the forex markets is guaranteed - especially when it comes to using technical
indicators. If a currency pair bounced off the support of a major average every time it came close, we
would all be rich. One of the major disadvantages of using moving averages is that they are relatively
useless when an asset is trending sideways, compared to the times when a strong trend is present. As
you can see in Figure 1, the price of an asset can pass through a moving average many times when
the trend is moving sideways, making it difficult to decide how to trade.

Figure 1

Source: MetaStock

108 ZC
Responsiveness to Price Action
Traders who use moving averages in their trading will quickly admit that there is a battle between
trying to make a moving average responsive to changes in trend while not allowing it to be so sensitive
that it causes a trader to prematurely enter or exit a position. Because the quality of the transaction
signals can vary drastically depending on the time periods used in the calculation, it is highly
recommended that traders look at other technical indicators for confirmation of any move predicted by
a moving average. (For more on various indicators, see Introduction To Technical Analysis.)

Beware of the Lag

Because moving averages are a lagging indicator, transaction signals will always occur after the price
has moved enough in one direction to cause the moving average to respond. This lagging
characteristic can often work against a trader and cause him or her to enter into a position at the least
opportune time. One major problem that regularly arises is that the price may have already
experienced a large increase before the transaction signal is emerges. As you can see in Figure 2, the
large price gap creates a buy signal in late August, but this signal is too late because the price has
already moved up by more than 25% over the past 12 days and is becoming exhausted. In this case,
the lagging aspect of a moving average would work against the trader and likely result in a losing trade.

Figure 2

Source: MetaStock

Moving Average Convergence Divergence (MACD)

One of the most popular technical indicators, the moving average convergence divergence (MACD), is
109 ZC
used by traders to monitor the relationship between two moving averages. It is generally calculated by
subtracting a 26-day exponential moving average from a 12-day EMA. When the MACD has a positive
value, the short-term average is located above the long-term average. This stacking order of the
averages is an indication of upward momentum. A negative value occurs when the short-term average
is below the long-term average - a sign that the current momentum is in the downward direction. Many
traders will also watch for a move above or below the zero line because this signals the position where
the two averages are equal (crossover strategy applies here). A move above zero is used as a buy
sign, while a cross below zero can be used as a sell signal. (For more on this, read Moving Average
Convergence Divergence - Part 1 and Part 2.)

Signal/Trigger Line
Moving averages can be created for any form of data that changes frequently. It is possible to take a
moving average of a technical indicator such as the MACD. For example, a nine-period EMA of the
MACD values is added to the chart in Figure 1 in an attempt to form transaction signals. As you can
see, buy signals are generated when the value of the indicator crosses above the signal line (dotted
line), while short signals are generated from a cross below the signal line. It is important to note that
regardless of the indicator being used, a move beyond a signal line is interpreted in the same manner;
the only thing that varies is the number of time periods used to create it.

Figure 3

Source: MetaStock

Bollinger Band®
A Bollinger Band® technical indicator looks similar to the moving average envelope, but differs in how

110 ZC
the outer bands are created. The bands of this indicator are generally placed two standard
deviations away from a simple moving average. In general, a move toward the upper band can often
suggest that the asset is becoming overbought, while a move close to the lower band can suggest the
asset is becoming oversold. The tightening of the bands is often used by traders as an early indication
that overall volatility is about to increase and that a trader may want to wait for a sharp price move.
(For further reading, check out The Basics Of Bollinger Bands® and our Technical Analysis tutorial.)

Figure 4

Charts - The Bearish Diamond

For years, common formations such as pennants, flags and double bottoms and tops have been used
by traders in the currency markets. A less talked about, but equally useful, pattern that occurs in the
currency markets is the bearish diamond top formation, commonly known as the diamond top.

The diamond top generally occurs at the top of considerable uptrends. It effectively signals impending
shortfalls and retracements with relative accuracy and ease. This formation can also be applied to any
time frame, especially daily and hourly charts, as the wide swings often seen in the currency markets
will offer traders plenty of opportunities to trade.

Identifying and Trading the Formation

The diamond top formation is established by first isolating an off-center head-and-shoulders formation
and applying trendlines dependent on the subsequent peaks and troughs. It gets its name from the fact
that the pattern bears a resemblance to a four-sided diamond.

Let's break the process down step-by-step using the Australian dollar/U.S. dollar (AUD/USD) currency
pair (Figure 1) as our example. First, we identify an off-center head-and-shoulders formation in a
currency pair. Next, we draw resistance trendlines, first from the left shoulder to the head (line A) and
then from the head to the right shoulder (line B). This forms the top of the formation; as a result, the
price action should not break above the upper trendline resistance formed by the right shoulder. The

111 ZC
idea is that the price action consolidates before the impending shortfall, and any penetrations above
the trendline would ultimately make the pattern ineffective, as it would mean that a new peak has been
created. As a result, the trader would be forced to consider either reapplying the trendline (line B) that
runs from the head to the right shoulder, or disregarding the diamond top formation altogether, since
the pattern has been broken.

To establish lower trendline support, the technician will simply eye the lowest trough established in the
formation. Bottom-side support can then be drawn by connecting the bottom tail to the left shoulder
(line C) and then connecting another support trendline from the tail to the right shoulder (line D). This
connects the bottom half with the top and completes the pattern.

Notice how the rightmost angle of the formation also resembles the apex of a symmetrical triangle
pattern and points to a breakout.

Figure 1: Identifying a diamond top formation using the AUD/USD.

Source: FXTrek Intellicharts

Figure 2 below shows a zoomed in view of Figure 1. We can see that a sessioncandle closed below or
"broke" the support trendline (line D.i.), indicating a move lower. The diamond top trader would profit
from this by placing an entry order below the close of the support line at 0.7504, while also placing a
stop-loss slightly above the same line to minimize any potential losses should the price bounce back
above. The standard stop should be placed 50 pips higher at 0.7554. In our example, the stop order
would not have been executed because the price did not bounce back, instead falling 150 pips lower in
one session before falling even further later on.

112 ZC
 Figure 2: A closer look at the diamond top formation using the AUD/USD. Notice
how the position of the entry is just below the support line (D.i.).

Source: FXTrek Intellicharts

Finally, profit targets are calculated by taking the width of the formation from the head of the formation
(the highest price) to the bottom of the tail (the lowest price). Continuing with our example using the
AUD/USD currency pair, Figure 3 shows how this would be done. In Figure 3, the AUD/USD exchange
rate at the top of the formation is 0.8003. The bottom of the diamond top is exactly 0.7250. This leaves
753 pips between the two prices that we use to form the maximum price where we can take profits. To
be safe, you should set two targets in which to take profits. The first target will require taking the full
amount, 753 pips, and taking half that amount and subtracting it from our entry price. Then, the first
target will be 0.7128. The price target that will maximize our profits will be 0.6751, calculated by
subtracting the full 753 pips from the entry price.

113 ZC
 Figure 3: The price target is calculated on the same example of the AUD/USD.

Source: StockCharts.com

Using a Price Oscillator Helps

A key to successful trading is to always receive affirmation, and the diamond top pattern is no different.
Adding a price oscillator such as moving average convergence divergence and the relative strength
index can increase the accuracy of your trade, since tools like these can gauge price action
momentum and be used to confirm the break of support or resistance. (To learn more, see Getting To
Know Oscillators.)

By applying the stochastic oscillator to our example (Figure 4 below), the investor confirms the break
below support through the downward cross that occurs in the price oscillator (point X).

114 ZC
 Figure 4: The cross of the stochastic momentum indicator (point X) is used to
confirm the downward move

Conclusion
The bearish diamond top is often overlooked because it happens so infrequently, but it is still very
effective in displaying potential opportunities in the forex market. When this formation is combined with
a price oscillator, the trade becomes an even better catch - the price oscillator enhances the overall
likelihood of a profitable trade by gauging price momentum and confirming weakness as well as
weeding out false breakout/breakdown trades.

115 ZC
Charts - Fibonacci
There is a special ratio that can be used to describe the proportions of everything from nature's
smallest building blocks, such as atoms, to the most advanced patterns in the universe, such as
unimaginably large celestial bodies. Nature relies on this innate proportion to maintain balance, but
the financial markets also seem to conform to this golden ratio.

Every year new methods are developed for traders to take advantage of the uncanny tendencies of the
market toward derivatives of the golden ratio. In this section we will discuss some of the more popular
non-mainstream uses of Fibonacci, including extensions, clusters and Gartleys, and we'll take a look at
how to use them in conjunction with other patterns and indicators. (For a primer and background on
basic Fibonacci techniques, refer to Fibonacci And The Golden Ratio.)

Fibonacci Extensions
Fibonacci extensions are simply ratio-derived extensions beyond the standard 100% Fibonacci
retracement level. They are popular as forecasting tools, and they are often used in combination with
other technical chart patterns.

Figure 1 below shows a typical implementation of a Fibonacci extension forecast:

Figure 1: An example of how the Fibonacci extension levels of 161.8% and 261.8%
act as future areas of support and resistance.

Source: Tradecision

Here we can see that the original points (0-100%) were used to forecast extensions at 161.8% and
261.8%, which served as support and resistance levels in the future.

Many traders use this technique in conjunction with wave-based studies - such as the Elliott
116 ZC
Wave or Wolfe Wave - to estimate the height of each wave and more clearly define the different waves.
(To learn more about Elliott Waves, see Elliott Wave Theory, and for more information on Wolfe
Waves, see Advanced Channeling Patterns: Wolfe Waves And Gartleys.)

Fibonacci extensions are also commonly used with other chart patterns such as the ascending triangle.
Once the pattern is identified, a forecast can be created by adding 61.8% of the distance between the
upper resistance and the base of the triangle to the entry price. As shown in Figure 2 below, these
levels are generally used as strategic places for traders to consider taking profits.

Figure 2: Many traders use the 161.8% Fibonacci extension level as a price target
for when a security breaks out of an identified chart pattern.

Source: Tradecision

Fibonacci Clusters
The Fibonacci cluster is a culmination of Fibonacci retracements from various significant highs and
lows during a given time period. Each of these Fibonacci levels is then plotted on the "Y" axis (price).
Each overlapping retracement level makes a darker shade on the cluster - the darker the cluster is, the
more significant the support or resistance level tends to be.

117 ZC
 Figure 3: An example of Fibonacci clusters is shown on the right side of the chart.
Dark stripes are considered to be more influential levels of support and resistance
than light ones. Notice the strong resistance just above the $20 level.

Source: Tradecision

Many traders use clusters as a way to quickly gauge support and resistance levels. A popular
technique is to combine a "volume by price" graph on the left side, with a cluster on the right side. This
allows you to see which specific Fibonacci areas represent significant levels of support and/or
resistance - high-volume and dense cluster areas indicate key support and resistance levels.

This technique can be used in conjunction with other Fibonacci techniques or chart patterns to confirm
support and resistance levels. (For other ways of analyzing these levels, see Gauging Support And
Resistance With Price By Volume.)

The Gartley Pattern

The Gartley pattern is a less popular pattern combining the "M" and "W" tops and bottoms with various
Fibonacci levels. The result is a reliable indicator of future price movements. Figure 4 demonstrates
what the Gartley formation looks like.

118 ZC
 Figure 4: An example of what bullish and bearish Gartley patterns look like.

Source: www.harmonictrader.com

Gartley patterns are formed using several rules regarding the distances between points:

X to D - Must be 78.6% of the segment range XA

X to B - Must be near 61.8% of the XA segment
B to D - Must be between 127% and 161.8% of the range BC
A to C - Must be 38.2% of segment XA or 88.6% of segment AB

How can these distances be measured? Well, one way is to use Fibonacci retracements and
extensions to estimate the points. Many traders also use custom software, which often includes tools
developed specifically to identify and trade the Gartley pattern. (You can also download a free Excel-
based spreadsheet from ChartSetups.comto calculate the numbers)

Fibonacci Channels
The Fibonacci pattern can be applied to channels not only vertically, but also diagonally, as shown in
Figure 5.

119 ZC
 Figure 5: Fibonacci retracement when used in combination with Fibonacci
channels can give a trader extra confirmation that a certain price level will
act as support or resistance.

Source: MetaTrader

Again, the same concepts that apply to vertical retracements apply to these channels. One common
technique employed by traders is the combination of diagonal and vertical Fibonacci studies to find
areas where both indicate significant resistance. This can be a sign of a continuation of the
prevailing trend.

Putting It All Together

By combining indicators and chart patterns with the many Fibonacci tools available, you can increase
your chances of a successful trade. Remember, there is no one indicator that predicts everything
perfectly (if there were, we'd all be rich). However, when many indicators are pointing in the same
direction, you can get a pretty good idea of where the price is going.

120 ZC
Charts - Ichimoku Cloud
The Ichimoku Kinko Hyo or equilibrium chart is a technical indicator that isolates higher probability
trades in the forex market. More known for its applications in the futures and equities markets, the
Ichimoku displays a clearer picture because it shows more data points, which provide a more reliable
price action. This technique combines three indicators into one chart, allowing the trader to make the
most informed decision. In this section, we'll learn how the Ichimoku works and how to apply the
indicator in your trading.

Constructing an Ichimoku Chart

Let's take a look at an example of an Ichimoku chart so we have a visual point of reference. The
Ichimoku chart consists of three lines (the red, maroon and pink shown below) and a "cloud":

Figure 1: EUR/USD Ichimoku Chart

Source: ForexWatcher.com

The components of the Ichimoku chart are calculated as follows:

1. Tenkan-Sen, or conversion line (red) - (Highest high + lowest low) / 2, calculated over the past
seven to eight time periods

2. Kijun-Sen, or base line (maroon) - (Highest high + lowest low) / 2, calculated over the past 22 time
periods

3. Chikou Span, or lagging span (pink) - The most current closing price plotted 22 time periods
behind (optional)

4. Senkou Span A (green) - (Tenkan-Sen + Kijun-Sen) / 2, plotted 26 time periods ahead

5. Senkou Span B (blue) - (Highest high + lowest low) / 2, calculated over the past 44 time periods.
Plot 22 periods ahead

121 ZC
The most important component of this indicator is the Ichimoku "cloud", which represents current and
historical price action. It behaves in much the same way as simple support and resistance by creating
formative barriers. The "cloud," known as the Kumo, is the space between Senkou Span A and
Senkou Span B. The time period is most often measured in days; however, this can be modified to the
trader's preference as long as it is consistent throughout all calculations.

Also, the "cloud" is comparatively thicker than your run-of-the-mill support and resistance lines. Instead
of giving the trader a visually thin price level for support and resistance, the thicker cloud will tend to
take the volatility of the currency markets into account. A break through the cloud and a subsequent
move above or below it will suggest a better and more probable trade.

To calculate these figures manually, you can use a spreadsheet program like Excel (with formulas to
speed up the process), and then plot the points on a time series chart. There are also several
commercial charting programs that have this technique installed and can automatically show the
Ichimoku chart in real time.

Interpreting the Chart

Now that we have a chaotic chart filled with colorful lines and strange clouds, we need to know how to
interpret it. The Ichimoku chart can be used to determine several things. The following is a list of
signals and how you can spot them:

Strong Signals
A strong buy signal occurs when the Tenkan-Sen crosses above the Kijun-Sen from below. A
strong sell signal occurs when the opposite occurs. The signals must be above the Kumo.

Normal Signals
A normal buy signal occurs when the Tenkan-Sen crosses above the Kijun-Sen from below. A normal
sell signal occurs when the opposite occurs. The signals must be within the Kumo.

Weak Signals
A weak buy signal occurs when the Tenkan-Sen crosses above the Kijun-Sen from below. A weak sell
signal occurs when the opposite occurs. The signals must be below the Kumo.

Overall Strength
Strength is shown to be with the sellers if the Chikou Span is below the current price. Strength is
shown to be with the buyers when the opposite is true.

Support/Resistance Levels
Support and resistance levels are represented by the presence of the Kumo. If the price is entering the
Kumo from below, then the price is at a resistance level. If the price is falling into the Kumo, then there
is a support level.

Trends
Trends can be determined by simply looking at where the current price is in relation to the Kumo. If the
price stays below the Kumo, then there is a downward trend (bearish); if the price stays above the
Kumo, then there is an upward trend (bullish).

Charts
The Ichimoku charts give us a rare opportunity to predict market timing, support/resistance levels, and
even false breakouts, all in one easy-to-use technique.

The Round Up
Intimidating at first, once the Ichimoku chart is broken down, every trader from novice to advanced will
find the application helpful. Not only does it mesh three indicators into one, but it also offers a more
filtered approach to the price action for the currency trader. Additionally, this approach will not only
122 ZC
increase the probability of the trade in the FX markets, but will assist in isolating only the
true momentum plays. This is opposed to riskier trades where the position has a chance of trading
back former profits.

123 ZC
Charts - Heikin Ashi
Most profits (and losses) are generated when markets are trending - so predicting trends correctly can
be extremely helpful. Many traders use candlestick charts to help them locate such trends amid often
erratic market volatility. The Heikin-Ashi technique - "average bar" in Japanese - is one of many
techniques used in conjunction with candlestick charts to improve the isolation of trends and to predict
future prices.

Defining the Heikin Ashi

Before we get into the uses of the Heikin Ashi, let's dive into some logistics involving the real meaning
behind it. The Heikin Ashi is usually a candlestick chart that is available on some charting packages as
a separate indicator. This allows traders to make a side-to-side comparison between the standard
candlestick and the Heikin Ashi, allowing for a more informed interpretation. In Figure 1, the chartist
can see that the two are very similar but offer different perspectives, as the Heikin Ashi indicator
reduces market noise and concentrates on the smoother trend of the underlying price action in the
euro/U.S. dollar.

Source: FX Trek Intellicharts

Figure 1: A nearlyidentical interpretation (top: price action, bottom: Heikin Ashi)

The reason the Heikin Ashi tends to be smoother is because instead of using a simple low and high of
the session to calculate individual candles, the Heikin Ashi takes the prices per bar and averages them
to create a "smoother" session. This is key in forex markets because currencies tend to offer traders
more volatility and market noise in the price than other markets.

124 ZC
The formula to calculate the Heikin-Ashi candles are as follows:

Close = (Open Price + High + Low +Close) / 4

Open = (Open Price of the previous bar + Close Price of the previous bar) / 2

High = [Maximum value of the (High, Open, Close)]

Low = [Minimum value of the (Low, Open, Close)]

By plugging formulas into each individual session to construct consecutive candles, the chart
continues to be reflective of the underlying price action, isolating the price and excluding currency
market volatility and noise. The resulting picture gives the trader a more visually appealing perspective,
and one that can help in identifying the overall trend.

Now that we've established how the candles are calculated, here is how to interpret them. There are
five primary signals that identify trends and buying opportunities:

1. Positive candles (blue) containing no wicks:

There is strong upward momentum in the session and it will likely persist. Here, the trader will have a
hands-off approach to profits while strongly considering adding on to the position.

2. Positive candles (blue) containing shadows or wicks:

Strength continues to support the price action higher. At this point, with upside potential still present,
the investor will likely consider the notion of adding to the overall position.

3. A smaller candle body with longer wicks:

Similar to the doji candlestick formation, this candle suggests a near-term turnaround in the overall
trend. Signaling uncertainty, market participants are likely to wait for further directional bias before
pushing the market one way or the other. Traders following on the signal will likely prefer confirmation
before initiating any new positions.

4. Negative candles (red) containing shadows or wicks:

Weakness or negative momentum is supporting the price action lower in the market. As a result,
traders will want to begin exiting initial long positions or selling positions at this point.

5. Negative candles (red) containing no shadows or wicks:

Selling momentum is strong and will likely support a move lower in the overall decline. As a result, the
trader would do well to add to existing short holdings.

The Heikin Ashi will still take some time to learn and master; however, once this is achieved, the
Heikin Ashi will act to confirm the overall trend of the price action. Next, let's see how it is used in
market opportunities.

Improve on Opportunities
With a smoother picture, sometimes a more simplified one, a trader can improve on trading the overall
trend by combining the Heikin Ashi with other indicators. As with any other chart application, it's better
to find an indicator that works well with your individual trading style when adding on the Heikin
application. This will not only help traders to establish a directional bias, but it will also clear up entries,

125 ZC
support and resistance and offer additional confirmation of when the trade is becoming profitable. In
Figure 2, the chartist is looking at a prime example using the Australian dollar/Canadian dollar
currency pair.

Source: FX Trek Intellicharts

Figure 2: A pivotal turn confirmed by Heikin Ashi

Taking a look at the price action, the Australian dollar weakened enormously against a rising Canadian
dollar, hence the downtrending channel.Reaching the psychological 0.8300 support, the cross pair
presents an opportunity to the trader. Not only is the AUD/CAD pair testing the support level at 0.8300,
the potential bottom coincides with the lower channel trendline. Confirming the strength of such a
barrier, we overlay the Heikin Ashi and focus on the two dojis that have formed on the chart.The
presented signal gives us the best confirmation in this example, as the trade is signaling for a long
position in Figure 3.

126 ZC
 Source: FX Trek Intellicharts

Figure 3: Two dojis scream out a probable long

Signaling a potential turn in the price action, the dojis appear to set the trade up nicely. Next, the trader
must decide on an entry point. According to industry theory, the best entry point is a break above the
high of the session at Point A in Figure 3. This will set the long buy order at 0.8400 with a
corresponding stop at two points, for example, below the low of the session, at 0.8328. Theoretically,
the trade is looking to profit, not only on a retracement test of the upper trendline, but a potential break.
That's where the profits lie, as the break above would create a longer term advance. The idea
coincides with what is being viewed on the Heikin Ashi. Over the course of the next month, with the
stop fully intact and untriggered as the price never trades back, the long position remains profitable
until the creation of another doji near mid month's time. Taking into account the close of the session -
including the doji, which is precisely set at 0.8554 - the trade has already profited by 154 points.
Looking back, this is more than sufficient, as the risk/reward ratio is well above the 2:1 minimum
prescribed. Subsequently, a trailing stop would be perfect at keeping profits close while letting potential
unfold in the coming weeks.

Breaking It Down
Let's take it down a notch and look into the steps of another example. Here, we'll reference a textbook
example in the New Zealand dollar/Japanese yen currency pair. Taking a look at the overall price
action, we see consolidation in the month of July on the longer term daily chart. Applying the stochastic
oscillator, we see a golden crossform (Point B), suggesting a near-term uptick in Figure 4. (For more
insight, see Getting To Know Oscillators - Part 3: Stochastics.)

127 ZC
 Source: FX Trek Intellicharts

Figure 4: Point B shows trigger on golden cross

1. Identify support or resistance: Although not a full requirement, this helps to establish a
viewpoint where a directional bias can be established. This will likely help in isolating points of
entry, assisting with stop placement and risk assessment. In the example, there is ample
support that is coming in at the 69.25 figure, offering a great opportunity for a long trade.
2. Overlay the technical indicator: The stochastic oscillator assists in suggesting bidding
support as both indicators begin to form a golden cross. The cross at Point B confirms the trade
bias and isolates the point of entry.
3. Confirm with Heikin Ashi: Obtaining the entry point off of support and the technically bullish
crossover in the stochastic, the trader can confirm the strength of the nascent trend by using
the smoother based candles. In the visual example at Point C, the chartist can see that the doji
is indicative of the shift in momentum as sellers begin to exit the market. Simultaneously, the
following longer bodied candle signifies a stronger uptrend in buying.
4. Place Entry Order: Now, with the directional bias confirmed, the trader will do well to place the
entry 5 to 10 points above the doji session high. Although the order can actually be placed at
the high or any other position in the session, the placement in this case is in order to capitalize
on a breakout of price action (Point D). As a result, the entry is placed at 69.90. Placing the
corresponding stop 5 points below the support will ensure a viable test. Should the level be
broken to the downside, the previous trade is negated on overriding selling momentum.
However, in this case, our indicators confirmed the directional bias, profiting 360 points before
topping out for the first time two weeks.

128 ZC
 Source: FX Trek Intellicharts

Figure 5: Point B shows trigger on golden cross

Conclusion
As you can see, although still somewhat new to the currency market analyst, chartist or
trader/speculator, the Heikin Ashi is a viable tool that can help to confirm the momentum of a trend.
Additionally, similar to the moving average, the smooth calculation helps in isolating market
opportunities by removing the noise that will almost always lead a trader astray and clog up the
technical perspective. As a result, by using this application and keeping in mind its longer term uses
and advantages, any participant in the currency market can apply and reap the benefits of such a
simple tool while keeping a finger on the detailed pulse of the market.

129 ZC
Charts - Kagi Charts
Noise removal is one of the most important aspects of active trading. By employing noise removal
techniques, traders can avoid false signals and get a clearer picture of an overall trend. One method of
filtering out this noise, which is also the focus of this section, is known as the kagi chart.

Kagi Chart Construction

Kagi charts are comprised of a series of vertical lines that depend on price action rather than on time
like the mainstream charts such as line, bar or candlestick charts. As seen in the chart below, the first
thing that traders will notice is that the lines on a kagi chart vary in thickness depending on what the
price of the asset is doing. Sometimes the lines are thin, while at other times the lines will be thick and
bolded. The varying thicknesses of the lines and their direction represents the most important aspect
of a kagi chart because this is what traders use to generate transaction signals. (For related reading,
see Analyzing Chart Patterns.)

Figure 1

Source: MetaStock

Kagis and Candlesticks

The different thickness of the lines on a kagi chart may seem confusing at first glance so let's walk
through an example of Apple Computer Inc. (Nasdaq:AAPL) between May 8 and December 1, 2006.
We've also attached a regular candlestick chart to several of the kagi charts to illustrate what the price
of the underlying asset has done to cause a certain change to the kagi chart. This example will make it
easier to fully understand how a kagi chart is created.

As seen in Figure 2, the price of AAPL shares started to fall shortly after the start date of our chart. As
the price fell, a vertical line was created on the kagi chart, and the bottom of this vertical line was equal
130 ZC
to the lowest closing price. If the next period's close were to be lower than the current bottom on the
line, then the line would continue to extend downward to equal the new low. The line will not change
directions until the price moves above the bottom of the kagi line by more than a preset reversal
amount, which is typically set at 4%, although this parameter can change depending on the security or
trader's preference.

Figure 2

Source: MetaStock

The Reversal
On June 1, 2006, AAPL shares closed above the kagi low by 4.02% - more than the 4% preset
reversal amount needed to change the direction of the chart (4%). As seen from the chart below,
the reversal is shown by a small horizontal line to the right followed by a vertical line in the direction of
the reversal. Now, the rising Kagi line will remain in the upward direction until it falls below the high by
more than 4%.

Figure 3

Source: MetaStock

131 ZC
The reversal was good news for many traders because this was the first bullish kagi signal that was
generated since the chart was created in early May. However, unfortunately for the bulls, the move
was short-lived as the bears responded and pushed the price below the high of the Kagi line by more
than the reversal amount of 4%. The downward reversal is shown on the chart as another horizontal
line to the right followed by a line moving in the downward direction.

As you can see from Figure 4 below, the bulls and bears spent the following few weeks fighting over
the direction of Apple shares, causing the kagi chart to reverse directions several times. Three of the
moves higher that occurred between June and July were greater than 4% above the chart's low, which
caused the kagi chart to reverse directions. These moves represented an increasingly bullish
sentiment, but they were not strong enough to fully reverse the downtrend. (To learn more,
read Retracement Or Reversal: Know The Difference and Support And Resistance Reversals.)

Figure 4

Source: MetaStock

The Thick Line

The number of false reversals began to show traders that bullish interest in the stock was increasing,
but that the true overall trend remained in the bears' control. This story changed on July 20, 2006,
because of a gap that was substantially greater than the 4% needed to reverse the chart's direction. In
fact, the gain was large enough to send the price above the previous high drawn on the kagi chart,
shown by the most recent horizontal line drawn near $59. A move that surpasses a previous Kagi high
like the one shown in the figure below causes the line of the kagi chart to become bold.

132 ZC
 Figure 5

Source: MetaStock

A shift from a thin line to a bolded line, or vice versa, is used by traders to to signal buy or sell
transactions. Buy signals are generated when the kagi line rises above the previous high, turning from
thin to thick. Sell signals are generated when the kagi line falls below the previous low and the line
changes from thick to thin. As you can see in Figure 6, the Kagi chart reversed directions after the
sharp run up, but it takes more than a simple reversal to change the thickness of the line or create a
transaction signal. In this example, the bears were unable to send the price below the previous low on
the kagi chart.

When the bullish momentum continued again in mid-August, the price shifted back in the upward
direction, creating a new swing low that will be used to create future sell signals. Ultimately, the bulls
were unable to push the price of Apple shares back below the low, causing the kagi chart to remain in
a bullish state for the remainder of the tested period. The lack of a sell signal enabled traders to benefit
from the strong uptrend without being taken out by random price volatility.

Figure 6

Source: MetaStock

Longer-Term Example
133 ZC
Now that we have an understanding of how a Kagi chart generates transaction signals, let's take a look
at a longer-term example using the chart of Apple Computers (Nasdaq:AAPL) (April 30, 2005-
December 31, 2006). Notice how a move above a previous high causes the line to become bold, while
a move below a low causes the line to become thin again. The changing thickness is the primary key
to determining transaction signals as this fluctuation illustrates whether the bulls or bears are in control
of the momentum. Remember that a change from thin to thick is used by traders as a buy sign, while a
change from thick to thin shows that downward momentum is prevailing and that it may be a good time
to consider selling.

Figure 7

Conclusion
Day-to-day price volatility and noise can make it extremely difficult for traders in the financial markets
to determine the true trend of an asset. Fortunately, methods such as kagi charting have helped put an
end to focusing on unimportant price moves that do not affect future momentum. While first learning it,
a kagi chart can seem like a series of randomly placed lines, but in reality, the movement of each line
depends on the price and can be used to generate very profitable trading signals. This charting
technique is relatively unknown to mainstream active traders, but given its ability to identify the true
trend of an asset, it wouldn't be surprising to see a surge in the number of traders that rely on this chart
when making their decisions in the marketplace.

134 ZC
Economics - Economic Indicators
Every week a number of economic surveys and indicators are released. At one time, experienced
professionals and economists had a distinct advantage in receiving this data in a timely fashion.
Fortunately, the internet has changed this situation by providing access to anyone who wants it.

Economic indicators can have a huge impact on the market; consequently, knowing how to construe
and analyze the information they contain is very important for forex traders. In this section we'll cover
some of the most important economic indicators. You'll learn where to find them, how to read them and
how you can use them to be successful in the forex market.

Top Economic Indicators

• Beige Book
• Business Outlook Survey
• Consumer Confidence Index (CCI)
• Consumer Credit Report
• Consumer Price Index (CPI)
• Durable Goods Report
• Employee Cost Index (ECI)
• Employment Situation Report
• Existing Home Sales
• Factory Orders Report
• Gross Domestic Product (GDP)
• Housing Starts
• Industrial Production
• Jobless Claims Report
• Money Supply
• Mutual Fund Flows
• Non-Manufacturing Report
• Personal Income and Outlays
• Producer Price Index (PPI)
• Productivity Report
• Purchasing Managers Index (PMI)
• Retail Sales Report
• Trade Balance Report
• Wholesale Trade Report

Economics - Producer Price Index

Release Date: Second or third week of each month

Release Time: 8:30am Eastern Standard Time

Coverage: Previous month

Released By: Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS)

Latest Release: http://www.bls.gov/news.release/ppi.toc.htm

135 ZC
Background
The Producer Price Index (PPI) is a weighted index of prices calculated at the wholesale, or producer,
level. Released monthly by the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), the PPI shows trends within the
wholesale markets, manufacturing industries and commodities markets. All of the physical goods-
producing industries that make up the U.S. economy are included; imports are excluded.

The PPI release has three headline index figures, one each for crude, intermediate and finished goods
on the national level:

1. PPI Commodity Index (crude): This figure shows the average price change from the previous
month for commodities such as energy, coal, crude oil and the steel scrap. (For related reading,
see Fueling Futures In The Energy Market.)

2. PPI Stage of Processing (SOP) Index (intermediate): Goods here have been manufactured at
some level but will be sold to further manufacturers to produce the finished good. A few examples of
SOP products are lumber, steel, cotton and diesel fuel.

3. PPI Industry Index (finished): Final stage manufacturing and the source of the core PPI.

The core PPI figure is the primary statistic, which is the finished goods index minus the food and
energy components, which are removed due to their volatility. The PPI percentage change from the
prior period and annual projected rate is the most quoted figure of the release.

The PPI attempts to capture only the prices that are being paid during the survey month itself. Quite
often, companies that do regular business with large customers have long-term contract rates, which
may be known now but not paid until a future date.The PPI excludes such future values or contract
rates.

And as we've previously stated, the PPI does not represent prices at the consumer level - this is left to
the Consumer Price Index (CPI), which is typically released a few trading days after the PPI. Like the
CPI, the PPI uses a benchmark year in which a basket of goods is measured, and every year following
is compared to the base year, which has a value of 100. For the PPI, that year is 1982.

Changes in the PPI should always be presented on a percentage basis, because the nominal changes
can be misleading as the base number is no longer an even 100.

What It Means for Investors

The biggest attribute of the PPI in the eyes of many traders is its ability to predict the CPI. The
prevailing theory is that most cost increases that are experienced by retailers will be passed on to
customers, which the CPI could later validate. Because the CPI is the inflation indicator out there,
traders will look to get a sneak preview by looking at the PPI figures. The Fed also knows this, so it
studies the report intently to get clarity on future policy moves that might have to be made to fight
inflation. (To learn more, read The Consumer Price Index: A Friend To Investors.)

Two downsides to the "basket of goods" approach are worth mentioning here. Firstly, the PPI uses
relative weightings for different industries that may not accurately represent their proportion to real
gross domestic product (GDP); the weightings are adjusted every few years but small differences will
still occur. Secondly, PPI calculations involve an explicit "quality adjustment method" - sometimes
called hedonic adjustments - to account for changes that occur in the quality and usefulness of
products over time. These adjustments may not effectively separate out quality adjustments from price
level changes as intended.

136 ZC
As well, PPI index data for capital equipment is used by the Department of Commerce to calculate
the GDP deflater.

While the PPI used to cover just industries such as mining, manufacturing, and the like, many
services-based industries have been brought into the index over time. Traders can now find PPI
information on air and freight travel, couriers, insurers, healthcare providers, petroleum distribution and
many more in the detailed release.

Strengths:

An accurate indicator of future CPI

Long "operating history" of data series

Good breakdowns for investors in the companies surveyed (mining, commodity info, some services
sectors)

Data is presented with and without seasonal adjustment

Weaknesses:

Volatile elements, such as energy and food, can skew the data.

Not all industries in the economy are covered.

The Closing Line

The PPI gets a lot of exposure for its inflationary foresight. As such, it can be a big market mover and
is therefore a very useful tool for forex traders.

Economics - Home Sales

Release Date: On or around the 17th of each month

Release Time: 8:30am Eastern Standard Time

Coverage: Previous month\'s data

Released By: U.S. Census Bureau

Latest Release: http://www.census.gov/const/www/newresconstindex.html

Background

The New Residential Construction Report, more commonly known as "housing starts" on Wall Street,
is a monthly report issued by the U.S. Census Bureau jointly with the U.S. Department of Housing and
Urban Development (HUD). The data is derived from surveys of homebuilders nationwide, and three
metrics are provided: housing starts, building permits and housing completions. A housing start is
defined as beginning the foundation of the home itself, while building permits are counted as of when
they are granted.

137 ZC
Both building permits and housing starts will be shown as a percentage change from the prior month
and year-over-year period. In addition, both data sets are divided geographically into four regions:
Northeast, Midwest, South and West. This helps to reflect the vast differences in real estate markets in
different areas of the country. On the national aggregates, the data will be segmented between single-
family and multiple-unit housing, and all information is presented with and without seasonal adjustment.

Housing starts and building permits are both considered leading indicators, and building permit figures
are used to calculate the Conference Board's U.S. Leading Index. Construction growth usually picks
up at the beginning of the business cycle (the Leading Indicator Index is used to identify business
cycle patterns in the economy, and is used by the Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC) during
policy meetings).

What It Means for You

The housing market may show the first signs of stalling following a rate hike by the Federal Reserve.
This is because rising mortgage rates may be enough to convince homebuilders to slow down on new
home starts. For traders looking to evaluate the real estate market, housing starts should be looked at
in conjunction with existing home sales, the rental element of the Consumer Price Index and the
Housing Price Index (also available from the Census Bureau). (For related reading, see Investing In
Real Estate.)

According to the Census Bureau, "it may take four months to establish an underlying trend for building
permit authorizations, five months for total starts and six months for total completions", so smart
traders will look more closely at the forming patterns to see through often-volatile month to month
results.

Strengths

-Very forward-looking, especially building permits; a good gauge for future real estate supply levels

-Often used to identify business cycle pivot points

-Sample size covers approximately 95% of all residential construction in the U.S.

Weaknesses
-No differentiation between size and quality of homes being initiated, only the nominal amount
-Only focuses on one component of the economy

Economics - Durable Goods

On or around the 20th of each month (advance release; revised release
Release Date:
about six weeks after period end with Factory Orders)

Release Time: 8:30am Eastern Standard Time

Coverage: Previous month

Released By: U.S. Census Bureau

Latest Release: http://www.census.gov/indicator/www/m3/adv/

138 ZC
Background

The Advance Report on Durable Goods Manufacturer's Shipments, Inventories and Orders, better
known as the Durable Goods Report, provides data on new orders received from thousands of
manufacturers of durable goods. These are generally defined as higher-priced capital goods orders
with a useful life of at least three years, such as cars, semiconductor equipment and turbines. More
than 85 industries are represented in the sample, which covers the entire United States.

Figures are provided in current dollars along with percentage changes from the prior month and the
prior year for new orders, total shipments, total unfilled orders and inventories. Revisions are also
included for the prior three months if they materially affect previously released results.

The data compiled for consumer durable goods is one of the 10 components of the Conference
Board's U.S. Leading Index, as growth at this level has typically occurred in advance of general
economic expansion.

What It Means for You

The headline figure will often leave out transportation and defense orders, as they can show higher
volatility than the other components. In these industries, the ticket prices are sufficiently high that
the sample error alone could swing the presented figure considerably.

Traders can play with the numbers here and look at things such as the rates of growth of inventories
versus shipments; changes in the inventory/shipments ratio over time can point to either demand
(falling ratio) or supply (rising ratio) imbalances in the economy to trade the U.S. dollar.

You should be cautious to see through the high levels of volatility found in areas of the Durable Goods
Report. Month-to-month changes should be compared with year-over-year figures and year-to-date
estimates, looking for the overall trends that tend to define the business cycle.

Strengths:

-Excellent industry breakdowns

-Data provided raw and with seasonal adjustments

-Provides forward-looking data such as inventory levels and new business, which count toward future
earnings.

Weaknesses

-The survey sample does not carry a statistical standard deviation to measure error.

-Highly volatile; moving averages should be used to identify long-term trends.

Economics - Consumer Confidence Index

Release Date: Last Tuesday of each month

Release Time: 10am Eastern Standard Time

Coverage: Previous Month\'s Data

139 ZC
 Released By: The Conference Board

Latest Release: http://www.conference-board.org/economics/consumerConfidence.cfm

Background

The Consumer Confidence Index (CCI) is a monthly release from the Conference Board, a non-profit
business group that is highly regarded by investors and the Federal Reserve. CCI is a distinctive
indicator, formed from survey results of more than 5,000 households and designed to gauge the
relative financial health, spending power and overall confidence of the average American consumer.

There are three separate headline figures: one for how citizens feel currently (Index of Consumer
Sentiment), one for how they feel the general economy is going (Current Economic Conditions), and
the third for how they feel the economy will look in six months' time (Index of Consumer Expectations).

The Consumer Sentiment Index is a component of the Conference Board's template of economic
indicators. Traditionally, changes in this index have tracked the leading edge of the business cycle
relatively well.

What It Means for You

A strong consumer confidence report, especially at a time when the economy is lagging behind
prevailing estimates, can move the currency markets quickly. The idea behind consumer confidence is
that a happy consumer - one who feels that his or her standard of living is increasing - is more likely to
spend more and make bigger purchases, like a new car or home, leading to a stronger domestic
economy and consequently a stronger currency.

This is a highly subjective survey, and the results should be interpreted as such. People can grab onto
a small state of affairs that garners a lot of mainstream press, such as gas prices, and use that as their
basis for overall economic conditions.

As a result of its subjective nature and relatively small sample size, many economists will use moving
averages of between three and six months for consumer confidence figures before predicting a major
shift in sentiment. Some also feel that index level changes of at least five points or higher are
necessary before calling for the reversal of an existing trend. In general, however, rising consumer
confidence will trend in line with rising retail sales and personal consumption and expenditures -
consumer-driven indicators that relate to spending patterns.

Strengths

-One of few indicators that reaches out to average households

-Has historically been a good predictor of consumer spending and, therefore, the gross domestic
product (consumer spending makes upmore than two-thirdsof real GDP)

Weaknesses:

-A subjective survey with no physical data sets

-Small sample size (only 5,000 households)

-Survey results may contradict other indicators, such as GDP and the Labor Report
140 ZC
Economics - Commodities
It is widely known that economic growth and exports are directly related to a country's domestic
industry, so it is natural for some currencies to be heavily correlated with commodity prices. The three
currencies with the tightest correlations to commodities are the Australian dollar, the Canadian dollar
and the New Zealand dollar. Other currencies that are also impacted by commodity prices but have a
weaker correlation are the Swiss franc and the Japanese yen. Knowing which currency is correlated to
which commodity can help traders recognize and predict market movements. Here we will look at
currencies correlated with oil and gold and show you how you can use this information in your trading.

Oil and the Canadian Dollar

Over the past few years, the price of commodities has fluctuated considerably. Oil, for example,
surged from $60 a barrel in 2006 to a high of $147.27 a barrel in 2008 before plummeting back below
$40 a barrel in the first quarter of 2009. Similar volatility has been seen in the price of gold. Knowing
which currencies are affected by what commodities will help you make more educated trading
decisions.

Oil is one of the world's basic necessities - at least for now, most people in developed countries cannot
live without it. In February 2009, the price of oil was nearly 70% below its all-time high of $147.27 set
on July 11, 2008. A drop in oil prices is every oil producer's nightmare, while oil consumers enjoy the
benefits of greater purchasing power. This is a complete 180-degree change from the situation at the
beginning of 2008, when record-high oil prices had oil producers doing back-flips while forcing
consumers to pinch pennies. There are a number of reasons to explain the fall in oil prices, including a
stronger dollar (since oil is priced in dollars) and weaker global demand. As a net oil exporter, Canada
is severely hurt by declines in oil, while Japan - a major net oil importer - tends to benefit.

Between the years 2006-2009, for example, the correlation between the Canadian dollar and oil prices
was roughly 80%. On a day-to-day basis, the correlation will often break, but over the long term it has
been strong because the value of the Canadian dollar has good reason to be sensitive to the price of
oil: Canada is the seventh-largest producer of crude oil in the world and continues to climb up the list,
with production in oil sands increasing regularly. In 2000, Canada surpassed Saudi Arabia as the
United States' most significant oil supplier. Most are unaware that the size of Canada's oil reserves is
second only to those in Saudi Arabia. The geographical proximity between the U.S. and Canada, as
well as the growing political uncertainty in the Middle East and South America, makes Canada one of
the more desirable locales from which the U.S. imports oil.

Figure 1 shows the positive relationship between oil and the Canadian loonie. In fact, it should come
as no surprise that the price of oil actually acts as a leading indicator for the price action of
the CAD/USD. Since the traded instrument is the inverse, or USD/CAD, it's important to note that
based on the historical relationship, when oil prices go up, USD/CAD falls and when oil prices go down,
USD/CAD rises.

141 ZC
 Figure 1: A look at the correlation between the price of oil and the price action in
the CAD/USD from January 2005 to March 2009

Oil and the Japanese Economy

At the other end of the scale is Japan, which imports almost all of its oil (compared to the U.S., which
imports approximately 50%). As of 2009, it is the world's third-largest net oil importer behind the U.S.
and China. Japan's lack of domestic sources of energy, and its need to import vast amounts of crude
oil, natural gas and other energy resources, make it particularly susceptible to changes in oil prices.
Therefore, when oil prices rise dramatically, the Japanese economy suffers.

An Attractive Oil Play: CAD/JPY

Looking at this from a net oil exporter/importer perspective, the currency pair that tops the list of
currencies to watch is the Canadian dollar against the Japanese yen. Figure 2 illustrates the tight
correlation between oil prices and CAD/JPY. As with the USD/CAD, oil prices tend to be the leading
indicator for CAD/JPY price action with a noticeable delay. As oil prices continued to fall during this
period, CAD/JPY broke the 100 level to hit a low of 76.

142 ZC
 Figure 2: A look at the correlation between the price of oil and the price action in
the CAD/JPY from January 2005 to March 2009

Going for Gold

Gold traders may also be surprised to hear that trading the Australian dollar is just like trading gold in
several ways. Australia is the world's third-largest producer of gold, and the Australian dollar had an 84%
positive correlation with the precious metal between 1999 and 2008. Generally speaking, this means
that when gold prices rise, the Australian dollar appreciates as well. The proximity of New Zealand to
Australia makes Australia a preferred destination for exporting New Zealand goods. Therefore, the
health of New Zealand's economy is very closely tied to the health of the Australian economy, which
explains why the NZD/USD and the AUD/USD have had a 96% positive correlation over the same time
period. The correlation of the NZD/USD with gold is slightly less than that of the Australia dollar but it
remained strong at 78%.

143 ZC
 Figure 3: A look at the correlation between the price of gold and the price action in
the NZD/USD from January 2005 to March 2009

A weaker, but still significant, correlation is that of gold prices and the Swiss franc. Switzerland's
political neutrality and the fact that its currency used to be backed by gold have made the franc the
currency of choice in times of political insecurity. From January 2006 until January 2009, USD/CHF
and gold prices had a 77% positive correlation. However, the relationship broke down somewhat in
September 2005 as the U.S. dollar decoupled from gold price movements.

Trading Currencies as a Supplement to Trading Oil or Gold

For seasoned commodity traders, it may also be worthwhile to look at trading currencies as a
substitute or a complement to trading commodities. In addition to being able to capitalize on a similar
outlook (e.g. higher oil), traders may also be able to earn interest if they are on 2% margin or higher
with most brokers. When trading currencies, you are dealing with countries, and countries have
interest rates, of course. For example, a trader who may have bought the AUD/USD in March 2009
would be able to earn up to 3% in interest income if Australian interest rates remained at 3.25% and
U.S. interest rates remained at 0.25% for the entire year. These are unleveraged rates, which means
that with 10 times leverage, for example, net of any exchange rate adjustments, the interest income
would be that much higher. Leverage also makes the trade riskier, which means that if the trade turns
against you, losses could add up.

Along the same lines, if you shorted AUD/USD to play a short gold view, you would end up paying
interest. If you're a commodity trader looking for a bit of a change from the usual pro-gold trade (for
example), commodity currencies such as the AUD/USD and NZD/USD provide good opportunities
worth looking into.

Conclusion

If you want to trade commodity currencies, the greatest way to use commodity prices in your trading is
to always keep one eye on movements in the oil or gold market and the other on the currency market
to see how quickly it responds. Due to the slightly delayed impact of these movements on the currency
144 ZC
market, there is generally an opportunity to overlay a broader movement that is happening in the
commodity market to that of the currency market. Bottom line: It never hurts to be informed about
commodity prices and how they drive currency movements.

Economics - Economic Theories

Now that you have been exposed to the basics of charting, we are now going to shift gears a little bit
and delve further into the fundamental analysis aspect of forex by looking at some of the economic
theories that affect currency rates. When it comes to forex, a currency's relative worth depends on its
parity with another currency. Aparity condition is a relationship based around concepts (such as
inflation and interest rates) that predict the price at which two currencies should be exchanged.

Other theories are based on economic factors such as trade, capital flows and the way a country runs
its operations. However, be aware that while economic theories help to illustrate the basic
fundamentals of currencies and how they are impacted by economic factors, they are based on
assumptions and perfect situations. There are so many complexities involved when all of many of
these factors are combined. This increases the difficulty in any one of them being 100% accurate in
predicting currency fluctuations. The main value will likely vary based on the market environment, but it
is still important to know the fundamental basis behind each of the theories.

Purchasing Power Parity

The basis behind this theory is that the cost of a good should be relatively the same around the world
(assuming that supply and demand levels are universal). More specifically, the Purchasing Power
Parity (PPP) contends that price levels between two countries should be equivalent to one another
after an exchange-rate adjustment. In the example that we will be talking about, inflation will determine
the currency's exchange-rate adjustment.

The relative version of PPP is as follows:

Where 'e' represents the rate of change in the exchange rate and 'π1' and 'π2'represent the rates of
inflation for country 1 and country 2, respectively.

For example, if country XYZ's inflation rate is 10% and country ABC's inflation rate is 5%, then ABC's
currency should appreciate 4.76% against that of XYZ.

Therefore, if you were trading the ABC/XYZ currency pair and your analysis of the PPP indicates ABC
will appreciate shortly, you should sell XYZ to buy ABC.

Interest Rate Parity

Interest Rate Parity (IRP) contends that two assets in two different countries should have similar
interest rates, as long as the country's risk is the same. Keep in mind that in this case, interest rates
represent the amount of return generated.

145 ZC
So iIn other words, buying one investment asset in a country should yield the same return as the exact
same asset in another country; otherwise, exchange rates would have to adjust to make up for the
difference.

The formula for determining IRP can be found by:

Where 'F' represents the forward exchange rate; 'S' represents the spot exchange rate; 'i1' represents
the interest rate in country 1; and 'i2' represents the interest rate in country 2.

For example, the interest rate for ABC and XYZ was respectively 10% and 5%, and the spot rate was
10 ABC dollars for each 1 XYZ dollar. The forward exchange rate should be 10.5 ABC dollars for each
XYZ dollar.

Connected to this theory is the real interest rate differential model, which suggests that countries with
higher real interest rates will see their currencies appreciate against countries with lower interest rates.
Global investors tend to allocate their capital to countries with higher real rates in order to earn higher
returns, which in turn bids up the price of the higher real rate currency.

International Fisher Effect

The International Fisher Effect (IFE) theory suggests that the exchange rate between two countries
should change by an amount similar to the difference between their nominal interest rates. If the
nominal rate in one country is lower than another, the currency of the country with the lower nominal
rate should appreciate against the higher rate country by the same amount.

The formula for IFE is as follows:

Where 'e' represents the rate of change in the exchange rate and 'i1' and 'i2'represent the rates of
inflation for country 1 and country 2, respectively.

Balance of Payments Theory

The balance of payments is comprised of two segments - a country's current account and capital
account - which measure the net inflows and outflows of goods and capital, respectively. A country that
is running a large current account surplus or deficit is indicating that its exchange rate is out of
equilibrium. In order to bring the current account back into equilibrium, the exchange rate will be
adjusted over time. A large current account deficit (more imports than exports) will result in the
domestic currency depreciating. On the other hand, a surplus is likely going to cause currency
appreciation.

The balance of payments identity is found by:

146 ZC
Where:
BCA represents the current account balance
BKA represents the capital account balance
BRA represents the reserves account balance

Monetary Model
The monetary model focuses on the effects of a country's monetary policy in influencing the exchange
rate. A country's monetary policy affects the money supply of that country by both the interest rate set
by the central bank and the amount of money printed by the Treasury. The basic lesson to understand
is that when countries adopt a monetary policy that rapidly grows its monetary supply, inflationary
pressure due to the increased amount of money in circulation will lead to currency devaluation. (For
more on how monetary policy works, see Formulating Monetary Policy.)

Economic Data
Economic theories may move currencies in the long term, but on a shorter term, day-to-day or week-
to-week basis, economic data has a more significant impact. It is often said the biggest companies in
the world are actually countries and that their currency is essentially shares in that country. Economic
data, such as the latest gross domestic product (GDP) numbers, are often considered to be like a
company's latest earnings data. In the same way that financial news and current events can affect a
company's stock price, news and information about a country can have a major impact on the direction
of that country's currency. Changes in interest rates, inflation, unemployment, consumer confidence,
GDP, political stability etc. can all lead to extremely large gains/losses depending on the nature of the
announcement and the current state of the country.

The number of economic announcements made each day from around the world can be intimidating,
but as one spends more time learning about the forex market it becomes clear which announcements
have the greatest influence.

Macroeconomic and Geopolitical Events

The biggest changes in the forex market often come from macroeconomic and geopolitical events
such as wars, elections, monetary policy changes and financial crises. These events have the ability to
change or reshape the country, including its fundamentals. For example, wars can put a huge
economic strain on a country and greatly increase the volatility in a region, which could impact the
value of its currency. It is important to keep up to date on these macroeconomic and geopolitical
events.

There is so much data that is released in the forex market that it can be very difficult for the average
individual to know which data to follow. Despite this, it is important to know what news releases will
affect the currencies you trade.

Now that you know a little more about what drives the market, we will look next at the two main trading
strategies used by traders in the forex market – fundamental and technical analysis.

147 ZC
Trading - Pivot Points
For many years, traders and market makers have used pivot points to identify critical support and/or
resistance levels. Pivots are also frequently used in the forex market and can be an extremely useful
tool for range-bound traders to identify points of entry and for trend traders and breakout traders to
spot the key levels that need to be broken for a move to qualify as a breakout. In this section, we'll
explain how pivot points are calculated, their applications in the forex market, and how they can be
combined with other indicators to develop alternative trading strategies.

Calculating Pivot Points

By definition, a pivot point is a point of rotation. The input prices used to calculate the pivot point are
the previous period's high, low and closing prices for a security. These prices are typically taken from a
stock's daily charts, but the pivot point can also be calculated using information from hourly charts.
Many traders prefer to take the pivots, as well as the support and resistance levels, off of the daily
charts and then apply those to the intraday charts (for example, every 60 minutes, every 30 minutes or
every 15 minutes). If a pivot point is calculated using price information from a shorter time frame, this
tends to reduce its accuracy and significance.

The textbook calculation for a pivot point is as follows:

Central Pivot Point (P) = (High + Low + Close) / 3

Support and resistance levels are then calculated off of this pivot point using the following formulas:

First level support and resistance:

First Resistance (R1) = (2*P) - Low

First Support (S1) = (2*P) - High

Likewise, the second level of support and resistance is calculated as follows:

Second Resistance (R2) = P + (R1-S1)

Second Support (S2) = P - (R1- S1)

Common practice is to calculate two support and resistance levels, but it's not unusual to derive a third
support and resistance level as well. (However, third-level support and resistances are a bit too
esoteric to be useful for the purposes of trading strategies.) It's also possible to go further into pivot
point analysis - for example, some traders go beyond the traditional support and resistance levels and
also track the mid-point between each of those levels.

Applying Pivot Points to the FX Market

148 ZC
Generally speaking, the pivot point is seen as the primary support or resistance level. The following
chart is a 30-minute chart of the currency pair GBP/USD with pivot levels calculated using the daily
high, low and close prices.

The green line is the pivot point (P).

The red lines are resistance levels (R).

The blue lines are support levels (S).

The yellow lines are mid-points (M).

Figure 1 demonstrates how the pivot line served as support for the GBP/USD pair for most of the
European trading hours. Once the U.S. market opened and U.S. traders joined the market, however,
prices began to break higher, with each of the breaks first testing and resisting either the midpoint or
the R1 and R2 levels; then the break occurred off of those levels (see areas circled). This chart also
shows something that occurs often in the forex market, which is that the initial break occurs at a
market open. There are three market opens in the FX market: the U.S. open, (at approximately 8am
EST), the European open (at 2am EST), and the Asian open (at 7pm EST).

Figure 1: This chart shows a common day in the FX market. The price of a major
currency pair (GBP/USD) tends to fluctuate between the support and resistance
levels identified by the pivot point calculation. The areas circled in the chart are
good illustrations of the importance of a break above these levels.

What we also observe when trading pivots in the forex market is that the trading range for the session
usually stays between the pivot point and the first support and resistance levels because a large
149 ZC
proportion of traders play this range. In Figure 2 (a chart of the USD/JPY), you can see in the areas
circled that prices initially stayed between the pivot point and the first resistance level with the pivot
acting as support. Once the price broke through the pivot level, the chart moved lower and stayed
predominately within the pivot and the first support zone.

Figure 2: This chart shows an example of the strength of the support and resistance
calculated using the pivot calculations.

The Significance of Market Opens

A key point to understand when trading pivot points in the forex market is that breaks tend to occur
around one of the three market opens. The main reason for this is the immediate influx of traders
entering the market at the same time. These traders all go to the office at roughly the same time, take
a look at what happened overnight and then adjust their portfolios accordingly. During the quieter time
periods, such as between the U.S. close (4pm EST) and the Asian open (7pm EST) (and sometimes
even throughout the Asian session, which is the quietest trading session), prices may remain confined
for hours between the pivot level and either the support or resistance level. This provides the perfect
environment for range-bound traders.

Two Strategies Using Pivot Points

Several strategies can be developed using the pivot level as a reference point, but the accuracy of
using pivot lines increases when Japanese candlestick formations can also be identified. For instance,
if prices traded below the central pivot (P) for most of the session and then made a foray above the

150 ZC
pivot while simultaneously creating a reversal indication (such as a shooting star, doji or hanging man),
you could sell short in anticipation of the price resuming trading back below the pivot point.

A perfect example of this is shown in Figure 3, a 30-minute USD/CHF chart. The USD/CHF had
remained range-bound between the first support zone and the pivot level for most of the Asian trading
session. When the Europe market opened, traders began taking the USD/CHF higher to break above
the central pivot. Bulls lost control as the second candle formed into a doji formation. Prices then
began to reverse back below the central pivot to spend the next six hours between the central pivot
and the first support zone. Traders watching for this formation might have sold USD/CHF in the candle
right after the doji formation to take advantage of at least 80 pipsworth of profit between the pivot point
and the first level of support.

Figure 3: This chart shows a pivot point being used in cooperation with a candlestick
pattern to predict a trend reversal. Notice how the descent was stopped by the
second support level.

Another strategy traders can use is to look for prices to obey the pivot level, therefore confirming the
level as a valid support or resistance zone. In this type of strategy, you're looking to see the price
break the pivot level, reverse and then trend back toward the pivot level. If the price proceeds to drive
through the pivot point, this is a sign that the pivot level is weak and likely not useful for trading
decisions. However, if prices hesitate around that level or "validate" it, then the pivot level is much
more significant and suggests that the move lower is an actual break, which indicates that there may
be a continuation move.

151 ZC
The 15-minute GBP/CHF chart in Figure 4 shows an example of prices "obeying" and validating a pivot
line. Initially, prices were trading between the mid-point and pivot level. At the European open (2am
EST), GBP/CHF rallied and broke above the pivot level. Prices then reverted back to pivot level, held it
and proceeded to rally once again. The level was tested another time right before the U.S. market
open (7am EST), at which point traders should have placed a buy order for GBP/CHF since the pivot
level had already proved to be a significant support level. Traders who did were rewarded as the
GBP/CHF rallied again.

Figure 4: This is an example of a currency pair "obeying" the support and resistance
identified by the pivot point calculation. These levels become more significant the
more times the pair tries to break through.

Conclusion

Traders and market makers have been using pivot points for years to determine critical support and/or
resistance levels. As seen in our examples, pivots can be especially popular in the forex market since
many currency pairs do tend to fluctuate between these levels. Range-bound traders will enter a buy
order near identified levels of support and a sell order when the asset nears the upper resistance.
Pivot points also allow trend and breakout traders to spot key levels that need to be broken for a move
to qualify as a breakout. Furthermore, these technical indicators can be especially useful at market
opens.

Having an awareness of where these potential turning points are located is an excellent way for
individual investors to become more attuned to market movements and make more educated
transaction decisions. Given their ease of calculation, pivot points can also be incorporated into many
trading strategies. The ease of use and flexibility of pivot points definitely makes them a useful addition
to your trading toolbox. In the next section, we'll take you through another advanced topic - the use of
bond spreads as a leading indicator for the forex market.

152 ZC
153 ZC
Trading - Bond Spreads
The global markets are becoming more and more interconnected. We often see the prices of
commodities and futures impact the movements of currencies, and vice versa. The same can be seen
in the relationship between currencies and bond spreads (the difference between countries' interest
rates); the price of currencies can impact the monetary policy decisions of central banks around the
world, but monetary policy decisions and interest rates can also affect the price action of currencies.
For example, a stronger currency helps to hold down inflation, while a weaker currency will fuel
inflation. Central banks take advantage of this relationship as an indirect means to effectively manage
their respective countries' monetary policies.

By understanding and observing these relationships and their patterns, investors have a window into
the currency market, and thereby a means to predict and capitalize on the movements of currencies.

What Does Interest Have to Do With Currencies?

We can look at history to see an example of how interest rates play a role in currencies. After the burst
of the tech bubble in 2000, traders became risk averse and went from seeking the highest possible
returns to focusing on capital preservation. But since the U.S. was offering interest rates below 2%
(and these were headed even lower), many hedge funds and investors with access to the international
markets went abroad in search of higher returns. Australia, which had about the same risk factor as
the U.S., offered interest rates in excess of 5%. As such, it attracted large streams of investment
money into the country and, in turn, assets denominated in the Australian dollar.

Large differences in interest rates between countries allow traders to use the carry trade, an interest
rate arbitrage strategy that takes advantage of the interest rate differentials between two major
economies, while aiming to benefit from the general direction or trend of a currency pair. This strategy
involves buying one currency that's paying a high interest rate and funding it with another that is paying
a low interest rate. The popularity of the carry trade is one of the main reasons for the strength seen in
pairs such as the Australian dollar and the Japanese yen (AUD/JPY), the Australian dollar and the U.S.
dollar (AUD/USD), and the New Zealand dollar and the U.S. dollar (NZD/USD).

However, it is often difficult and expensive for individual investors to send money back and forth
between bank accounts around the world. The relatively high retail spread on exchange rates can
offset any potential yield they are seeking. On the other hand, large institutions such as investment
banks, hedge funds, institutional investors and large commodity trading advisors (CTAs) generally
have the scale to command lower spreads. As a result, they shift money back and forth in search of
the highest yields with the lowest sovereign risk (or risk of default). When it comes to the bottom line,
exchange rates move based on changes in money flows.

The Insight for Investors

Retail investors can take advantage of these shifts in flows by monitoring yield spreads and the
expectations for changes in interest rates that may be embedded in those yield spreads. The following
chart is just one example of the strong relationship between interest rate differentials and the price of a
currency.

154 ZC
 Figure 1

Notice how the blips on the charts are roughly mirror images. The chart shows us that the five-year
yield spread between the AUD and the USD (represented by the blue line) was declining between
1989 and 1998. At the same time, this coincided with a broad sell-off of the Australian dollar against
the U.S. dollar.

When the yield spread began to rise once again in the summer of 2000, the AUD/USD followed suit
with a similar rise a few months later. The 2.5% spread of the AUD over the USD over the next three
years equated to a 37% rise in the AUD/USD. Those traders who managed to get into this trade not
only enjoyed the sizable capital appreciation, but also earned the annualized interest rate differential.

This connection between interest rate differentials and currency rates is not unique to the AUD/USD;
the same sort of pattern can be seen in numerous currencies such as the USD/CAD, NZD/USD and
the GBP/USD. The next example takes a look at the interest rate differential of New Zealand and U.S.
five-year bonds versus the NZD/USD.

155 ZC
 Figure 2

The chart provides an even better example of bond spreads as a leading indicator. The interest rate
spread bottomed out in the spring of 1999, while the NZD/USD did not bottom out until over one year
later. By the same token, the yield spread began to steadily rise in 2000, but the NZD/USD only began
to rise in the early fall of 2001. History shows that the movement in interest rate difference between
New Zealand and the U.S. is eventually mirrored by the currency pair. If the interest rate differential
between New Zealand and the U.S. continued to fall, then one could expect the NZD/USD to hit its top
as well.

Other Factors of Assessment

The spreads of both the five- and 10-year bond yields can be used to predict currency movements.
The rule of thumb is that when the yield spread widens in favor of a certain currency, then that
currency will tend to appreciate against other currencies. But even though currency movements are
impacted by actual interest rate changes, they are also affected by the shift in economic assessment
or plans by a central bank to raise or lower interest rates. The chart below demonstrates this point.

Figure 3

According to Figure 3, shifts in the economic assessment of the Federal Reserve tend to lead to sharp
movements in the U.S. dollar. In 1998, when the Fed shifted from an outlook of economic tightening
(meaning the Fed intended to raise rates) to a neutral outlook, the dollar fell even before the Fed
moved on rates (note that on July 5, 1998, the blue line plummets before the red one). A similar
movement of the dollar was seen when the Fed moved from a neutral to a tightening bias in late 1999,
and again when it moved to an easier monetary policy in 2001. In fact, once the Fed began
considering loosening monetary policy and lowering rates, the dollar reacted with a sharp sell-off.

When Using Interest Rates to Predict Currencies Will Not Work

Despite the various scenarios in which this strategy for forecasting currency movements does tend to
work, it is certainly not the Holy Grail to making money in the currency markets. There are a number of

156 ZC
other scenarios and mistakes traders can make that may cause this strategy to fail. The two most
common are impatience and excessive leverage.

Impatience

As indicated in the examples above, these relationships foster a long-term strategy. The bottoming out
of currencies may not occur until a year after interest rate differentials may have bottomed out. If a
trader cannot commit to a time horizon of a minimum of six to 12 months, the success of this strategy
may decrease significantly.

Too Much Leverage

Traders using too much leverage may also be ill-suited to the broadness of this strategy. Since interest
rate differentials tend to be fairly small, traders tend to want to increase the leverage to increase the
interest rate return. For example, if a trader uses 10 times leverage on a yield differential of 2%, it
would effectively turn an annual rate of 2% into 20%, and the effect would increase with additional
leverage. However, excessive leverage can prematurely kick an investor out of a long-term trade
because he or she will not be able to weather short-term fluctuations in the market.

Conclusion

Although there may be risks to using bond spreads to forecast currency movements,
proper diversification and close attention to the risk environment will improve returns. This strategy has
worked for many years and can still work, but determining which currencies are the emerging high
yielders versus which currencies are the emerging low yielders may shift with time.

Trading - Tweezers
It's always most desirable to get in at the start of a trend, rather than to be at the end of it. That's why
traders are always looking for early signals to get in the door as the market makes a turn. And some
even desire a better edge, maybe looking to get in before a trend reversal starts.

One pattern that we're going to discuss in this section that can help support our inclinations that the
herd may be changing directions is called the tweezer. Although it's relatively unknown to the
mainstream, the tweezer may be one of the best indications that a short- (or long-) term trend may be
nearing its end. The tweezer shares similarities with the more popular double top/bottom, and can
produce high probability setups in the foreign exchange market. (Learn more about double tops and
bottoms in Analyzing Chart Patterns.)

Double Tops/Bottoms: A Classic

One of the first technical formations that many traders learn about is the double top or bottom. Simply,
the double top (or bottom) reversal is a pattern that tends to form after a prolonged extension upward
(or downward). It signifies that the momentum from the uptrend has stalled and may be coming to and
end. The following battle between buyers and sellers lasts temporarily and ends with buyers
attempting a final push upward before we see the price action decline. This final push creates a
second peak in an otherwise stable channel pattern, forming a double top. (Learn more about technical
analysis in our Technical Analysis Tutorial.)

Figure 1 shows a textbook example of a double top in the EUR/USD currency pair. Here,
the euro makes a high against the U.S. dollar just shy of the $1.6050 figure in April 2008. After two and
a half months of stable, range-bound trading, buyers make a final push higher in July before
surrendering to sellers. The result is a sharp and violent drop until final support is reached at just
above the $1.2250 figure.
157 ZC
 Figure 1

Tweezers: The New

Similar to the bearish diamond formation in popularity, tweezers (or kenuki) are relatively unknown,
partly because they seem very similar to the double tops/bottoms. The key difference is in the timing of
these two formations. Tweezers are normally used for the short term, and are composed of two or
more consecutive candle sessions. Any more than approximately eight to 10 candle sessions and we
may actually be looking at a double top or bottom formation. However, given the short time frame,
complete tweezer formations tend to take shape rather quickly. Price is another important factor with
the tweezer. In a top or bottom formation, the prongs have exactly the same high prices (in a tweezer
top) or low prices (in a tweezer bottom). This idea is key as it establishes the fact that the price level
itself was not broken.

158 ZC
 Figure 2

In Figure 2, we have a classic tweezer top in the five-minute chart of the EUR/USD pair. After an
advance higher from previous support of $1.3210, buyers seemed to be losing steam. As a result, the
first high (point A) is set at $1.3284. After a short, four-session downturn, buyers attempted a final
push higher, marking the second high (point B) at the exact same price of $1.3284. This falls within our
definition of a top. The strength of the resistance, and fact that the price was tested again and was not
able to break through, helps underlying selling pressure spark the short-term price decline.

Keep In Mind

1. The same high or low has to be tested (this is critical).

2. The formation follows an extended advance or decline.

3. Tweezer tops and bottoms tend to form with two or more candles.

4. Additional formations are better. Dojis or hammers that create the second peak will
add to the signal as it confirms a shift in sentiment.

159 ZC
Trading the Formation
Now let's take a look at an application of the tweezer pattern in the market. Taking the GBP/USD
currency pair, we see a perfect example in the short-term, five-minute charts (Figure 3). Here, the
tweezer occurs relatively quickly with just two candle sessions following an extension lower from
$1.4360 resistance.

1. The first low (point A) is established as the last candle in the downtrend closes at
$1.4279 in the GBP/USD.

2. The second low (point B) is established as the following candle session opens at the
$1.4279 low and does not proceed to break it. As a result, we have made the low price
twice without violating $1.4279.

3. After the second candle session has closed, we place an entry two pips above the
close price. A corresponding stop order will be placed just five pips below the $1.4279.

4. As a result, keeping with a 2-to-1 risk/reward profile, the take-profit point is at $1.4319
(point C), 30 pips higher.

Figure 3

For a slightly longer-term trade, an oscillator is typically a good confirmation tool. In Figure 4, we
simply add a MACD to confirm our USD/CAD short-term trade opportunity.

160 ZC
 1. The first low is set at $1.2201 (point A).

2. The second low is set at $1.2201 (point B) three candle sessions apart. Confirmation
of this trade opportunity surfaces as it appears a MACD bullish convergence has
emerged (point X), lending an upside bias.

3. After the close of the second candle, we place an entry order two pips above the
close price of $1.2207, or $1.2209.

4. At the same time, a stop order is placed five pips below the low at $1.2196.

5. The take-profit or limit order is placed 22 pips above, corresponding to a 2-to-1

risk/reward ratio at $1.2231 (point C).

Figure 4

Conclusion
Although not widely used, the tweezer pattern setup is a great formation that can be used by the
currency trader due to the more technical nature of the forex market relative to other markets.
Opportunities to use the formation will arise support and resistance are tested. Adding strict discipline
and rigid risk management rules will help these setups increase a trader's arsenal.

161 ZC
Trading - Options
Delta, gamma, and volatility are concepts familiar to nearly all options traders. However, these same
tools used to trade currency options can also be useful in predicting movements in the underlying spot
price in the forex market. In this section, we look at how volatility can be used to determine upcoming
market activity, how delta can be used to calculate the probability of spot movements, and how gamma
can predict trading environments.

Using Volatility to Forecast Market Activity

Option volatility information is widely available. In using volatility to forecast market activity, the trader
needs to make certain comparisons. The most reliable comparison is implied versus actual volatility,
but the availability of actual data is limited. Alternatively, comparing historical implied volatilities are
also effective. One-month and three-month implied volatilities are two of the most commonly
benchmarked time frames used for comparison (the numbers below represent percentages).

Here is what the comparisons indicate:

• If short-term option volatilities are significantly lower than long-term volatilities, expect a
potential breakout.
• If short-term option volatilities are significantly higher than long-term volatilities, expect
reversion to range trading.

Typically in range-trading scenarios, implied option volatilities are below average or declining because
in periods of range trading, there tends to be little movement.When option volatilities take a sharp dive,
it can be a good signal for a potential upcoming trading opportunity. This is very important for both
range and breakout traders. Traders who usually sell at the top of the range and buy at bottom can use
option volatilities to predict when their strategy might stop working - more specifically, if volatility
contracts become very low, the probability of continued range trading decreases.

Breakout traders, on the other hand, can also monitor option volatilities to make sure that they are not
buying or selling into a false breakout. If volatility is at average levels, the probability of a false
breakout increases. Alternatively, if volatility is very low, the probability of a real breakout increases.
162 ZC
These guidelines typically work well, but traders also have to be careful. Volatilities can have long
downward trends (as they did between June and October 2002) during which time volatilities can be
misleading and misinterpreted. Traders need to look for sudden sharp movements in volatilities, not
gradual ones.

The following is a chart of USD/JPY currency pair. The green line represents short-term volatility, the
red line represents long-term volatility and the blue is line price action. The arrows with no labels are
pointing to periods when short-term volatility rises significantly above long-term volatility. You can see
such divergence in volatility tends to be followed by periods of range trading. The "1M implied" arrow is
pointing to a period when short-term volatility dips below long-term volatility. At price action above that,
a breakout occurs when short-term volatility reverts back toward long-term volatility.

Source: Figure 1

Using Delta to Calculate Spot Probabilities

What Is Delta?
Options price can be seen as a representation of the market's expectation of the future distribution of
spot prices. The delta of an option can be thought of roughly as the probability that the option will
finish in the money. For example, given a one-month USD/JPY call option struck at 104 with a delta of
50, the probability of USD/JPY finishing above 104 one month from now would be approximately 50%.

Calculating Spot Probabilities

With information on deltas, one can approximate the market's expectation of the likelihood of different
spot levels over time. When it is likely that the spot will finish above a certain level, call-option deltas
are used. Similarly, when the spot is likely to finish below a certain level, put-option deltas are used.

We will be using conditional probability to calculate expected spot values. Given two events, A and B,
the probability of event A and B occurring is calculated as follows:
163 ZC
 P(A and B) = P(A)*P(B|A)

In other words, the probability of A and B occurring is equal to the probability of A times the probability
of B given that A has occurred. Applying this formula to the problem of calculating the probability that
spot will touch a certain level, we get:

P(touching and finishing above spot level) =

P(touching spot level) * P(finishing above spot | touched spot level)

In other words, the probability of spot touching and finishing above a certain level (or delta) is equal to
the probability of the spot touching that level multiplied by the probability of the spot finishing above a
certain level given that is has already touched that level.

Example
Suppose that we want to know the probability that the EUR/USD will touch 1.26 in the next two
weeks. Because we are interested in spot finishing above this level, we look at the EUR call
option. Given current spot and volatilities, the delta of this option is 30. Therefore, the market's
view is that the odds of EUR/USD finishing above 1.26 in two weeks are roughly 30%.
If we assume that EUR/USD does touch 1.26, the option delta then would become 50. By
definition an at-the-money option has a delta of 50, and thus has a 1/2 chance of finishing in the
money.
Here is the calculation using the above equation:
0.3 = P(touching 1.26) * 0.5
This means the odds of EUR/USD touching 1.26 in two weeks equals 60% (0.3/ 0.5). The
market's "best guess" then is that EUR/USD has a 60% chance of touching 1.26 in two weeks,
given the information from options.

Given options prices and their corresponding deltas, this probability calculation can be used to get a
general sense of the market's expectations of various spot levels. The rule of thumb this methodology
yields is that the probability of spot touching a certain level is roughly equivalent to two times the delta
of an option struck at that level.

Using Gamma to Predict Trading Environments

What Is Gamma?
Gamma represents the change in delta for a given change in the spot rate. In trading terms, players
become long gamma when they buy standard puts or calls, and short gamma when they sell them.
When market commentators speak of the entire market being long or short gamma, they are usually
referring to market makers in the interbank market.

How Market Makers View Gamma

Generally, options market makers look to be delta neutral - that is, they want to hedge their portfolios
against changes in the underlying spot rate. The amount by which their delta, or hedge ratio, changes
is known as gamma.
164 ZC
If, for example, a trader is long gamma, this means he or she has bought some standard vanilla
options. Assume they are USD/JPY options and that the delta position of these options is $10 million
at USD/JPY 107; in this case, the trader will need to sell $10 million USD/JPY at 107 in order to be
fully insulated against spot movement.

If USD/JPY rises to 108, the trader will need to sell another $10 million, this time at 108, as the total
delta position becomes $20 million. What happens if USD/JPY goes back to 107? The delta position
goes back to $10 million, as before. Because the trader is now short $20 million, he or she will need to
buy back $10 million at 107. The net effect then is a 100-pip profit, selling a 108 and buying at 107.

In sum, when traders are long gamma, they are continually buying low and selling high, or vice versa,
in order to hedge. When the spot market is very volatile, traders earn a lot of profits through their
hedging activity. But these profits are not free, as there is a premium to own the options. In theory, the
amount you make from delta hedging should exactly offset the premium, but in practice this depends
on the actual volatility of the spot rate.

The reverse is true when a trader has sold options. When short gamma, in order to hedge the trader
must continually buy high and sell low. As such, he or she loses money on the hedges. In theory, it's
the exact same amount earned in options premium through the sales.

Why Is Gamma Important for Spot Traders?

But what relevance does all this have for regular spot traders? The answer is that spot movement is
increasingly driven by the activity in the options market. When the market is long gamma, market
makers as a whole will be buying spot when the exchange rate falls and selling spot when it rises. This
behavior can generally keep the spot rate in a relatively tight range.

When the market is short gamma, however, the spot rate can be prone to wide swings as players are
either continually selling when prices fall, or buying when prices rise. A market that is short gamma will
exacerbate price movement through its hedging activity. Thus:

• When market makers are long gamma, spot generally trades in a tighter range.
• When market makers are short gamma, spot can be prone to wide swings.

Summary
There are many tools used by seasoned options traders that can also be useful to trading spot FX.
Volatility can be used to forecast market activity in the cash component through comparing short-term
versus longer term implied volatilities. Delta can help estimate the probability of the spot rate reaching
a certain level. And gamma can predict whether spot will trade in a tighter range if it is vulnerable to
wider swings.

165 ZC
Short Term - Memory Of Price
Is there anything more annoying than getting stopped out of a short trade on the absolute top tick of
the move or being taken out of a long trade on the lowest possible bottom tick, only to have prices
reverse and then ultimately move in your direction for profit? Anyone who has ever
traded currencies has experienced that unpleasant reality more than once. The memory of price setup
is specifically designed to take advantage of these spike moves in currencies by carefully scaling into
the trade in anticipation of a reversal. Read on to find out how to use this strategy in your next trade.

The Strategy
The memory of price setup should appeal to traders who despise taking frequent stops and like to
bank consistent, small profits. However, anyone who trades this setup must understand that while it
misses infrequently, when it does miss, the losses can be very large. Therefore, it is absolutely critical
to honor the stops in this setup because when it fails it can morph into a relentless runaway move that
could blow up your entire account if you continue to fade it. (For background reading, see Place Forex
Orders Properly.)

This setup rests on the assumption that the support and resistance points of double tops and double
bottoms exert an influence on price action even after they are broken. They act almost like magnetic
fields, attracting price action back to those points after the majority of the stops have been cleared.
The thesis behind this setup is that it takes an enormous amount of buying power to exceed the value
of the prior range of the double top breakout, and vice versa for the double bottom breakdown. In the
case of a double top, for example, breaking above a previous top requires that buyers not only expend
capital and power to overcome the topside resistance, but also retain enough additional momentum to
fuel the rally further. By that time, much of the momentum has been expended on the challenge to the
double top, and it is unlikely that we will see a move of the same amplitude as the one that created the
first top.

Determining Risk
We use a symmetrical approach to determine risk. Using our double-top example, we measure the
amplitude of the retrace in the double top and then add that value to the swing high to create our zone
of resistance.

166 ZC
In Figure 1 the price pushes higher above the initial swing high of 1.2060, but cannot extend the
upward move by the full amplitude of the initial retracement. We see this happen quite often on the
hourly charts as well as daily charts. On the dailies, the setup will suffer fewer failures because the
range extensions will be much larger, but it will also generate larger losses. Therefore, traders must
weigh the advantages and disadvantages of each approach and adapt their risk parameters
accordingly.

Rules for the Short Trade

1. Look for an established uptrend that is making consistently higher lows.
2. Note when this up-move makes a retrace on the daily or hourly charts.
3. Make sure that this retrace is at least 38.2% of the original move.
4. Enter short half the position (position No.1) when the price rallies to the swing high, making a double
top.
5. Measure the amplitude of the retrace segment.
6. Add the value of the amplitude to the swing high and make that your ultimate stop.
7. Target 50% of the retrace segment as your profit. So, if the retrace segment is 100, target 50 points
as your profit.
8. If the position moves against you, add the second half of the position (position No. 2) at the 50%
point between the swing high and the ultimate stop.
9. Keep the stop on both units at the ultimate stop value.
10. If position No.2 moves back to the entry price of position No.1, take profit on position No.2, move
the stop to breakeven and continue holding position No.1 for the initial target.

Rules for the Long Trade

167 ZC
1. Look for an established downtrend that is making consistently lower highs.
2. Note when this down-move makes a retrace on the daily or hourly charts.
3. Make sure that this retrace is at least 38.2% of the original move.
4. Enter long half the position (position No.1) when the price falls to the swing low, making a double
bottom.
5. Measure the amplitude of the retrace segment.
6. Add the value of the amplitude to the swing low and make that your ultimate stop.
7. Target 50% of the retrace segment as your profit. If the retrace segment is 100, target 50 points as
your profit.
8. If the position moves against you, add the second half of the position (position No.2) at the 50%
point between the swing low and the ultimate stop.
9. Keep the stop on both units at the ultimate stop value.
10. If position No.2 moves back to the entry price of position No.1, take profit on position No.2, move
the stop to breakeven and continue holding position No.1 for the initial target.

Short Trades
Let's see how this setup works on both the long and short time frames.

Let's look at a long setup in GBP/USD, which begins to form on November 12, 2005. Notice that prices
first rally but then begin to drop, setting up for a possible double bottom. According to the rules of our
setup, we take half our position at 1.7386, expecting prices to bounce back up. When this setup is
traded on the daily charts, the stops can be enormous. In the case of this long setup, the stop is more

168 ZC
than 500 points. The amplitude of the counter-move up is 1.7907-1.7386 = 521 points.

A wide stop is necessary because a trader should never risk more that 2% per trade. On a hypothetical
$10,000 account, the trader should never trade more than two mini lots which are 10,000 units where a
one-point move is worth $1. This will already violate our "no more than 2% risk per trade" rule because
the total drawdown will exceed 7.5% if the setup fails (521 points + 260 points =$780 or 7.8% on a
$10,000 account). You can compensate for this risk by toning down the leverage if you are trading the
memory of price strategy, although the high probability nature of the setup allows us to be more liberal
with risk control. Nevertheless, the bottom line is that on the dailies, leverage should be extremely
conservative, not exceeding a factor of two. This means that for a hypothetical $10,000 account the
trader should not assume a position larger than $20,000 in size.

As the trade proceeds, we see that the support at 1.7386 fails; we therefore place a second buy order
at 1.7126, halfway below our ultimate stop of 1.6865. We now have a full position on and wait for
market action to respond. Sure enough, having expended so much effort on the downside move,
prices begin to stall way ahead of our ultimate stop. As the price bounces back, we sell the one lot,
which we purchased at 1.7126, back at 1.7386, our initial entry point in the trade, banking 260 points
for our efforts. We then immediately move our stop on the remaining lot to 1.7126, ensuring that the
trade won't lose capital should the price fail to rally to our second profit target. However, on November
23, 2005, the price does reach our second target of 1.7646, generating a gain of another 260 points for
a total profit on the trade of 521 points. Therefore, what could wind up as a loss under most standard
setups because support was broken by a material amount turns into a profitable, high-probability trade.

Now let's take a look at the setup on a shorter time frame using the hourly charts. In this example, the
GBP/USD traces out a countertrend move of 177 points that lasts from 1.7313 to 1.7490. The move
starts at approximately 9am EST on March 29, 2006, and lasts until 2pm EST the following day. As the
price trades back down to 1.7313, we place a buy order and set our stop 177 points lower at 1.7136. In
this case, the price does not retreat much more, leaving us with only the first half of the position as it
creates a very shallow fake out double bottom.

We take our profits at 50% of risk, exiting at 1.7402 at 8pm EST on April 3, 2006. The trade lasts
approximately four days, with very little drawdown, and produces a healthy profit in the process. On
the shorter time frames, the risk of this setup is considerably less than the daily version, with the
ultimate stop only 177 points away from entry, versus the prior example where the stops were 521
points away.

169 ZC
Short Trades
Turning now to the short side, we look at the daily chart in the EUR/USD trading a relatively small
retrace at the beginning of 2006 from 1.2181 to 1.2004. As price once again approaches the 1.2181
level on January 23, 2006, we go short with half of the total position, placing a stop at 1.2358. Prices
then verticalize, and at this point the strategy of the setup really comes into play as we short the
second half at 1.2278.

Prices push higher, beyond even our second entry, but the move exhausts before hitting our stop. We
exit half of the trade as prices come back to 1.2181 and move our stop to breakeven on the whole
position. Prices then proceed to collapse even further as we cover the second half at 1.2092, banking
the full profit on the trade.

170 ZC
In another short example of this setup, we look at the hourly chart in the USD/JPY as it forms a retrace
between 8am EST March 29, 2006, and 8am EST March 30, 2006. The amplitude of that range is
118.22 to 117.08, or 116 points. We then add 116 points to the swing high of 118.22 to establish our
ultimate stop of 119.36. As it trades back up to 118.22 on April 3, 2006, we short half of our position
size and then short the rest of the position at 118.78. Prices do not trade much higher and by 10am
EST the next day we are able to cover half of our short at 118.22. Just 10 hours later, at 8pm EST, we
are able to close out the rest of the position for profit.

171 ZC
This example illustrates once again the power of this setup on the shorter time frames. The small risk
parameters and the relatively short time frames allow nimble forex traders to take advantage of the
natural daily ebb and flow of the markets. Clearly this setup works best in range-bound markets, which
occur a majority of the time.

When This Trade Fails

The gravest danger to the memory of price setup is a one-way market during which prices do not
retrace. This is why keeping disciplined stops is so essential to the strategy because one runaway
trade could blow up the trader's entire portfolio.

172 ZC
In the preceding example, we see how the daily trend on the USD/JPY pair during the fourth quarter of
2006 reached such powerful momentum that traders had no chance to recoup their losses, and shorts
were simply steamrolled. Starting with the initial entry on September 20, 2005, off the countertrend
move at 111.78, we proceeded to short the pair at half position value, adding yet another half position
seven days later on September 27, 2005, at 113.33. Unfortunately, prices did not pause in their ascent,
and the whole trade was stopped out at 114.88 on October 13, 2005, for a total loss of 465 points
((114.88-111.78) + (114.88-113.33) = 465).

Conclusion
The memory of price strategy works well for traders who don't like to take frequent stops and prefer to
bank small profits along the way. Although losses can be large when the strategy does miss, it can
prevent traders from being stopped out of a short trade on the top tick or a long trade on the lowest
possible bottom tick right before prices reverse and move in the trader's favor.

173 ZC
Short Term - Pivot Points
Trading requires reference points (support and resistance), which are used to determine when to enter
the market, place stops and take profits. However, many beginning traders divert too much attention to
technical indicators such as moving average convergence divergence (MACD) and relative strength
index (RSI) (to name a few) and fail to identify a point that defines risk. Unknown risk can lead to
margin calls, but calculated risk significantly improves the odds of success over the long haul.

One tool that actually provides potential support and resistance and helps minimize risk is the pivot
point and its derivatives. In this article, we'll argue why a combination of pivot points and traditional
technical tools is far more powerful than technical tools alone and show how this combination can be
used effectively in the FX market.

Pivot Points 101

Originally employed by floor traders on equity and futures exchanges, pivot point have proved
exceptionally useful in the FX market. In fact, the projected support and resistance generated by pivot
points tends to work better in FX (especially with the most liquid pairs) because the large size of the
market guards against market manipulation. In essence, the FX market adheres to technical principles
such as support and resistance better than less liquid markets. (For related reading, see Using Pivot
Points For Predictions and Pivot Strategies: A Handy Tool.)

Calculating Pivots
Pivot points can be calculated for any time frame. That is, the previous day's prices are used to
calculate the pivot point for the current trading day.

Pivot Point for Current = High (previous) + Low (previous) + Close (previous)
3

The pivot point can then be used to calculate estimated support and resistance for the current trading
day.

Resistance 1 = (2 x Pivot Point) – Low (previous period)

Support 1 = (2 x Pivot Point) – High (previous period)
Resistance 2 = (Pivot Point – Support 1) + Resistance 1
Support 2 = Pivot Point – (Resistance 1 – Support 1)
Resistance 3 = (Pivot Point – Support 2) + Resistance 2
Support 3 = Pivot Point – (Resistance 2 – Support 2)

To get a full understanding of how well pivot points can work, compile statistics for the EUR/USD on
how distant each high and low has been from each calculated resistance (R1, R2, R3) and support
level (S1, S2, S3).

To do the calculation yourself:

• Calculate the pivot points, support levels and resistance levels for X number of days.
• Subtract the support pivot points from the actual low of the day (Low – S1, Low – S2, Low – S3).
• Subtract the resistance pivot points from the actual high of the day (High – R1, High – R2, High
– R3).
174 ZC
 • Calculate the average for each difference.

The results since the inception of the euro (January 1, 1999, with the first trading day on January 4,
1999):

• The actual low is, on average, 1 pip below Support 1

• The actual high is, on average, 1 pip below Resistance 1
• The actual low is, on average, 53 pips above Support 2
• The actual high is, on average, 53 pips below Resistance 2
• The actual low is, on average, 158 pips above Support 3
• The actual high is, on average, 159 pips below Resistance 3

Judging Probabilities
The statistics indicate that the calculated pivot points of S1 and R1 are a decent gauge for the actual
high and low of the trading day.

Going a step farther, we calculated the number of days that the low was lower than each S1, S2 and
S3 and the number of days that the high was higher than the each R1, R2 and R3.

The result: there have been 2,026 trading days since the inception of the euro as of October 12, 2006.

• The actual low has been lower than S1 892 times, or 44% of the time
• The actual high has been higher than R1 853 times, or 42% of the time
• The actual low has been lower than S2 342 times, or 17% of the time
• The actual high has been higher than R2 354 times, or 17% of the time
• The actual low has been lower than S3 63 times, or 3% of the time
• The actual high has been higher than R3 52 times, or 3% of the time

This information is useful to a trader; if you know that the pair slips below S1 44% of the time, you can
place a stop below S1 with confidence, understanding that probability is on your side. Additionally, you
may want to take profits just below R1 because you know that the high for the day exceeds R1 only 42%
of the time. Again, the probabilities are with you.

It is important to understand, however, that theses are probabilities and not certainties. On average,
the high is 1 pip below R1 and exceeds R1 42% of the time. This neither means that the high will
exceed R1 four days out of the next 10, nor that the high is always going to be one pip below R1. The
power in this information lies in the fact that you can confidently gauge potential support and
resistance ahead of time, have reference points to place stops and limits and, most importantly, limit
risk while putting yourself in a position to profit.

Using the Information

The pivot point and its derivatives are potential support and resistance. The examples below show a
setup using pivot point in conjunction with the popular RSI oscillator.

RSI Divergence at Pivot Resistance/Support

175 ZC
 Figure 1

This is typically a high reward-to-risk trade. The risk is well-defined due to the recent high (or low for a
buy).The pivot points in the above examples are calculated using weekly data. The above example
shows that from August 16 to 17, R1 held as solid resistance (first circle) at 1.2854 and the
RSI divergence suggested that the upside was limited. This suggests that there is an opportunity to go
short on a break below R1 with a stop at the recent high and a limit at the pivot point, which is now a
support:

• Sell Short at 1.2853.

• Stop at the recent high at 1.2885.
• Limit at the pivot point at 1.2784.

This first trade netted a 69 pip profit with 32 pips of risk. The reward to risk ratio was 2.16.

The next week produced nearly the exact same setup. The week began with a rally to and just above
R1 at 1.2908, which was also accompanied by bearish divergence. The short signal is generated on
the decline back below R1 at which point we can sell short with a stop at the recent high and a limit at
the pivot point (which is now support):

• Sell short at 1.2907.

• Stop at the recent high at 1.2939.
• Limit at the pivot point at 1.2802.

This trade netted a 105 pip profit with just 32 pips of risk. The reward to risk ratio was 3.28.

The rules for the setup are simple:

176 ZC
For shorts:

1. Identify bearish divergence at the pivot point, either R1, R2 or R3 (most commonly at R1).
2. When price declines back below the reference point (it could be the pivot point R1, R2, R3), initiate
a short position with a stop at the recent swing high.
3. Place a limit (take profit) order at the next level. If you sold at R2, your first target would be R1. In
this case, former resistance becomes support and vice versa.

For longs:

1. Identify bullish divergence at the pivot point, either S1, S2 or S3 (most common at S1).
2. When price rallies back above the reference point (it could be the pivot point, S1, S2, S3), initiate a
long position with a stop at the recent swing low.
3. Place a limit (take profit) order at the next level (if you bought at S2, your first target would be S1 …
former support becomes resistance and vice versa).

Summary
A day trader can use daily data to calculate the pivot points each day, a swing trader can use weekly
data to calculate the pivot points for each week and a position trader can use monthly data to calculate
the pivot points at the beginning of each month. Investors can even use yearly data to approximate
significant levels for the coming year. The trading philosophy remains the same regardless of the time
frame. That is, the calculated pivot points give the trader an idea of where support and resistance is for
the coming period, but the trader - because nothing in trading is more important than preparedness -
must always be prepared to act.

177 ZC
Short Term - Gaps
Gaps are areas on a chart where the price of a stock (or another financial instrument) moves sharply
up or down with little or no trading in between. As a result, the asset's chart shows a "gap" in the
normal price pattern. The enterprising trader can interpret and exploit these gaps for profit. Here we'll
help you understand how and why gaps occur, and how you can use them to make profitable trades.

Gap Basics
Gaps occur as a result of underlying fundamental or technical factors. For example, if a
company's earnings are much higher than expected, the company's stock may gap up the next day.
This means that the stock price opened higher than it closed the day before, thereby leaving a gap. In
the forex market, it is not uncommon for a report to generate so much buzz that it widens the bid and
ask spread to a point where a significant gap can be seen. Similarly, a stock breaking a new high in
the current session may open higher in the next session, thus gapping up for technical reasons.

Gaps can be classified into four groups:

• Breakaway gaps are those that occur at the end of a price pattern and signal the beginning of
a new trend.
• Exhaustion gaps occur near the end of a price pattern and signal a final attempt to hit new
highs or lows.
• Common gaps are those that cannot be placed in a price pattern - they simply represent an
area where the price has "gapped".
• Continuation gaps occur in the middle of a price pattern and signal a rush of buyers or sellers
who share a common belief in the underlying stock's future direction.

To Fill or Not to Fill

When someone says that a gap has been "filled", that means that the price has moved back to the
original pre-gap level. These fills are quite common and occur as a result of the following:

• Irrational Exuberance: The initial spike may have been overly optimistic or pessimistic,
therefore inviting a correction.
• Technical Resistance: When a price moves up or down sharply, it doesn't leave behind
any support or resistance.
• Price Pattern: Price patterns are used to classify gaps; as a result, they can also tell you if a
gap will be filled or not. Exhaustion gaps are typically the most likely to be filled because they
signal the end of a price trend, while continuation and breakaway gaps are significantly less
likely to be filled since they are used to confirm the direction of the current trend.

When gaps are filled within the same trading day on which they occur, this is referred to as fading. For
example, let's say a company announces great earnings per share for this quarter, and it gaps up at
open (meaning it opened significantly higher than its previous close). Now let's say that, as the day
progresses, people realize that thecash flow statement shows some weaknesses, so they start selling.
Eventually the price hits yesterday's close, and the gap is filled. Many day traders use this strategy
during earnings season or at other times when irrational exuberance is at a high.

How To Play the Gaps

There are many ways to take advantage of these gaps. Here are a few popular strategies:

• Some traders will buy when fundamental or technical factors favor a gap on the next trading
day. For example, they'll buy a stock after hours when a positive earnings report is released,
hoping for a gap up on the following trading day.
• Traders might buy or sell into highly liquid or illiquid positions at the beginning of a price
movement, hoping for a good fill and a continued trend. For example, they may buy a currency
178 ZC
 when it is gapping up very quickly on low liquidity and there is no significant resistance
overhead.
• Some traders will fade gaps in the opposite direction once a high or low point has been
determined (often through other forms of technical analysis). For example, if a stock gaps up on
some speculative report, experienced traders may fade the gap by shorting the stock.
• Traders might buy when the price level reaches the prior support after the gap has been filled.
An example of this strategy is outlined below.

Here are the key things you will want to remember when trading gaps:

• Once a stock has started to fill the gap, it will rarely stop, because there is often no immediate
support or resistance.
• Exhaustion gaps and continuation gaps predict the price moving in two different directions - be
sure that you correctly classify the gap you are going to play.
• Retail investors are the ones who usually exhibit irrational exuberance; however, institutional
investors may play along to help their portfolios - so be careful when using this indicator, and
make sure to wait for the price to start to break before taking a position.
• Be sure to watch the volume. High volume should be present in breakaway gaps, while low
volume should occur in exhaustion gaps.

Example
To tie these ideas together, let's look at a basic gap trading system developed for the forex market.
This system uses gaps in order to predict retracements to a prior price. Here are the rules:

1. The trade must always be in the overall direction of the price (check hourly charts).
2. The currency must gap significantly above or below a key resistance level on the 30-minute
charts.
3. The price must retrace to the original resistance level. This will indicate that the gap has been
filled, and the price has returned to prior resistance turned support.
4. There must be a candle signifying a continuation of the price in the direction of the gap. This will
help ensure that the support will remain intact.

Note that because the forex market is a 24-hour market (it is open 24 hours a day from 5pm EST on
Sunday until 4pm EST Friday), gaps in the forex market appear on a chart as large candles. These
large candles often occur as a result of the release of a report that causes sharp price movements with
little to no liquidity. In the forex market, the only visible gaps that occur on a chart happen when the
market opens after the weekend.

Let's look at an example of this system in action:

179 ZC
 Figure 1: The large candlestick identified by the left arrow on this GBP/USD chart is
an example of a gap found in the forex market. This does not look like a regular
gap, but the lack of liquidity between the prices makes it so. Notice how these
levels act as strong levels of support and resistance.

We can see in Figure 1 that the price gapped up above some consolidation resistance, retraced and
filled the gap, and finally resumed its way up before heading back down. Technically, we can see that
there is little support below the gap until the prior support (where we buy). A trader could also short the
currency on the way down to this point if he or she were able to identify a top.

Conclusion - Minimizing Risk

Those who study the underlying factors behind a gap and correctly identify its type can often trade with
a high probability of success. However, there is always a risk that a trade can go bad. You can avoid
this by doing the following:

• Watching the real-time electronic communication network (ECN) and volume: This will
give you an idea of where different open trades stand. If you see high-volume resistance
preventing a gap from being filled, then double check the premise of your trade and consider
not trading it if you are not completely certain that it is correct.
• Being sure that the rally is over: Irrational exuberance is not necessarily immediately
corrected by the market. Sometimes stocks can rise for years at extremely high valuations and
trade high on rumors without a correction. Be sure to wait for declining and negative volume
before taking a position.
• Using a stop-loss: Always be sure to use a stop-loss when trading. It is best to place the stop-
loss point below key support levels, or at a set percentage, such as -8%.

Remember, gaps are risky (due to low liquidity and volatility), but if properly traded, they offer
opportunities for quick profits.

180 ZC
Short Term - Momentum
Some traders are extremely patient and love to wait for the perfect setup while others are extremely
impatient and need to see a move happen quickly or they'll abandon their positions. These impatient
traders make perfect momentum traders because they wait for the market to have enough strength to
push a currency in the desired direction and piggyback on the momentum in the hope of an extension
move. However, once the move shows signs of losing strength, an impatient momentum trader will
also be the first to jump ship. Therefore, a true momentum strategy needs to have solid exit rules to
protect profits while still being able to ride as much of the extension move as possible.

In this article, we'll take a look at strategy that does just that: the five-minute momo trade.

What's a Momo?
The five-minute momo trade looks for a momentum or "momo" burst on very short-term (five-minute)
charts. First, traders lay on two indicators, the first of which is the 20-period exponential moving
average (EMA). The EMA is chosen over the simple moving average because it places higher weight
on recent movements, which is needed for fast momentum trades. The moving average is used to help
determine the trend. The second indicator to use is the moving average convergence
divergence (MACD) histogram, which helps us gauge momentum. The settings for the MACD
histogram is the default, which is first EMA = 12, second EMA = 26, signal EMA = 9, all using the close
price. (For more insight, read A Primer On The MACD.)

This strategy waits for a reversal trade but only takes advantage of it when momentum supports the
reversal move enough to create a larger extension burst. The position is exited in two separate
segments; the first half helps us lock in gains and ensures that we never turn a winner into a loser. The
second half lets us attempt to catch what could become a very large move with no risk because the
stop has already been moved to breakeven.

Rules for a Long Trade

1. Look for currency pair trading below the 20-period EMA and MACD to be negative.
2. Wait for price to cross above the 20-period EMA, then make sure that MACD is either in the
process of crossing from negative to positive or has crossed into positive territory no longer
than five bars ago.
3. Go long 10 pips above the 20-period EMA.
4. For an aggressive trade, place a stop at the swing low on the five-minute chart. For a
conservative trade, place a stop 20 pips below the 20-period EMA.
5. Sell half of the position at entry plus the amount risked; move the stop on the second half to
breakeven.
6. Trail the stop by breakeven or the 20-period EMA minus 15 pips, whichever is higher.

Rules for a Short Trade

1. Look for the currency pair to be trading above the 20-period EMA and for MACD to be positive.
2. Wait for the price to cross below the 20-period EMA; make sure that MACD is either in the
process of crossing from positive to negative or has crossed into negative territory within the
past five bars.
3. Go short 10 pips below the 20-period EMA.
4. For an aggressive trade, place a stop at the swing high on a five-minute chart. For a
conservative trade, place the stop 20 pips above the 20-period EMA
5. Buy back half of the position at entry minus the amount risked and move the stop on the second
half to breakeven.
6. Trail the stop by breakeven or the 20-period EMA plus 15 pips, whichever is lower.

181 ZC
Long Trades

Our first example in Figure 1 is the EUR/USD on March 16, 2006, when we see the price move above
the 20-period EMA as the MACD histogram crosses above the zero line. Although there were a few
instances of the price attempting to move above the 20-period EMA between 1:30 and 2am EST, a
trade was not triggered at that time because the MACD histogram was below the zero line.

We waited for the MACD histogram to cross the zero line and when it did, the trade was triggered at
1.2044. We enter at 1.2046 + 10 pips = 1.2056 with a stop at 1.2046 - 20 pips = 1.2026. Our first target
was 1.2056 + 30 pips = 1.2084. It was triggered approximately two and a half hours later. We exit half
of the position and trail the remaining half by the 20-period EMA minus 15 pips. The second half is
eventually closed at 1.2157 at 9:35pm EST for a total profit on the trade of 65.5 pips.

182 ZC
The next example, shown in Figure 2, is USD/JPY on March 21, 2006, when we see the price move
above the 20-period EMA. Like in the previous EUR/USD example, there were also a few instances in
which the price crossed above the 20-period EMA right before our entry point, but we did not take the
trade because the MACD histogram was below the zero line.

The MACD turned first, so we waited for the price to cross the EMA by 10 pips and when it did, we
entered the trade at 116.67 (EMA was at 116.57).

The math is a bit more complicated on this one. The stop is at the 20-EMA minus 20 pips or 116.57 -
20 pips = 116.37. The first target is entry plus the amount risked, or 116.67 + (116.67-116.37) = 116.97.
It gets triggered five minutes later. We exit half of the position and trail the remaining half by the 20-
period EMA minus 15 pips. The second half is eventually closed at 117.07 at 6am EST for a total
average profit on the trade of 35 pips. Although the profit was not as attractive as the first trade, the
chart shows a clean and smooth move that indicates that price action conformed well to our rules.

Short Trades
On the short side, our first example is the NZD/USD on March 20, 2006 (Figure 3). We see the price
cross below the 20-period EMA, but the MACD histogram is still positive, so we wait for it to cross
below the zero line 25 minutes later. Our trade is then triggered at 0.6294. Like the earlier USD/JPY
example, the math is a bit messy on this one because the cross of the moving average did not occur at
the same time as when MACD moved below the zero line like it did in our first EUR/USD example. As
a result, we enter at 0.6294.

183 ZC
Our stop is the 20-EMA plus 20 pips. At the time, the 20-EMA was at 0.6301, so that puts our entry at
0.6291 and our stop at 0.6301 + 20 pips = 0.6321. Our first target is the entry price minus the amount
risked, or 0.6291 - (0.6321-0.6291) = 0.6261. The target is hit two hours later and the stop on the
second half is moved to breakeven. We then proceed to trail the second half of the position by the 20-
period EMA plus 15 pips. The second half is then closed at 0.6262 at 7:10am EST for a total profit on
the trade of 29.5 pips.

The example in Figure 4 is based on an opportunity that developed on March 10, 2006, in the
GBP/USD. In the chart below, the price crosses below the 20-period EMA and we wait for 10 minutes
for the MACD histogram to move into negative territory, thereby triggering our entry order at 1.7375.
Based on the rules above, as soon as the trade is triggered, we put our stop at the 20-EMA plus 20
pips or 1.7385 + 20 = 1.7405. Our first target is the entry price minus the amount risked, or 1.7375 -
(1.7405 - 1.7375) = 1.7345. It gets triggered shortly thereafter. We then proceed to trail the second half
of the position by the 20-period EMA plus 15 pips. The second half of the position is eventually closed
at 1.7268 at 2:35pm EST for a total profit on the trade of 68.5 pips. Coincidently enough, the trade was
also closed at the exact moment when the MACD histogram flipped into positive territory.

184 ZC
Momo Trade Failure
As you can see, the five-minute momo trade is an extremely powerful strategy to capture momentum-
based reversal moves. However, it does not always work and it is important to explore an example of
where it fails and to understand why this happens.

185 ZC
The final example of the five-minute momo trade is EUR/CHF on March 21, 2006. In Figure 5, the
price crosses below the 20-period EMA and we wait for 20 minutes for the MACD histogram to move
into negative territory, putting our entry order at 1.5711. We place our stop at the 20-EMA plus 20 pips
or 1.5721 + 20 = 1.5741. Our first target is the entry price minus the amount risked or 1.5711 -
(1.5741-1.5711) = 1.5681. The price trades down to a low of 1.5696, which is not low enough to reach
our trigger. It then proceeds to reverse course, eventually hitting our stop, causing a total trade loss of
30 pips.

When trading the five-minute momo strategy, the most important thing to be wary of is trading ranges
that are too tight or too wide. In quiet trading hours where the price simply fluctuates around the 20-
EMA, the MACD histogram may flip back and forth causing many false signals. Alternatively, if this
strategy is implemented in a currency paid with a trading range that is too wide, the stop might be hit
before the target is triggered.

Conclusion
The five-minute momo trade allows traders to profit on short bursts of momentum, while also providing
the solid exit rules required to protect profits.

186 ZC
Short Term - Stops
The forex market is the most leveraged financial market in the world. In equities, standard margin is
set at 2:1, which means that a trader must put up at least $50 cash to control $100 worth of stock. In
options, the leverage increases to 10:1, with $10 controlling $100. In the futures markets, the leverage
factor is increased to 20:1. For example, in a Dow Jones futures e-mini contract, a trader only needs
$2,500 to control $50,000 worth of stock. However, none of these markets approaches the intensity of
the forex market, where the default leverage at most dealers is set at 100:1 and can rise up to 200:1.
That means that a mere $50 can control up to $10,000 worth of currency.

Why is this important? First and foremost, the high degree of leverage can make FX either extremely
lucrative or extraordinarily dangerous, depending on which side of the trade you are on. In FX, retail
traders can literally double their accounts overnight or lose it all in a matter of hours if they employ the
full margin at their disposal, although most professional traders limit their leverage to no more than
10:1 and never assume such enormous risk. But regardless of whether they trade on 200:1 leverage
or 2:1 leverage, almost everyone in FX trades with stops. In this article, you'll learn how to use stops to
set up the "stop hunting with the big specs" strategy.

Stops Are Key

Precisely because the forex market is so leveraged, most market players understand that stops are
critical to long-term survival. The notion of "waiting it out", as some equity investors might do, simply
does not exist for most forex traders. Trading without stops in the currency market means that the
trader will inevitably face forced liquidation in the form of a margin call. With the exception of a few
long-term investors who may trade on a cash basis, a large portion of forex market participants are
believed to be speculators; therefore, they simply do not have the luxury of nursing a losing trade for
too long because their positions are highly leveraged. (For related reading, see Trading Trend Or
Range?)

Because of this unusual duality of the FX market (high leverage and almost universal use of stops),
stop hunting is a very common practice. Although it may have negative connotations to some readers,
stop hunting is a legitimate form of trading. It is nothing more than the art of flushing the losing players
out of the market. In forex-speak, they are known as weak longs or weak shorts. Much like a strong
poker player may take out less capable opponents by raising stakes and "buying the pot", large
speculative players (like investment banks, hedge funds and money center banks) like to gun stops in
the hope of generating further directional momentum. In fact, the practice is so common in FX that any
trader unaware of these price dynamics will probably suffer unnecessary losses. (To learn more, check
out Keep An Eye On Momentum.)

Because the human mind naturally seeks order, most stops are clustered around round numbers
ending in "00". For example, if the EUR/USD pair was trading at 1.2470 and rising in value, most stops
would reside within one or two points of the 1.2500 price point rather than, say, 1.2517. This fact alone
is valuable knowledge, as it clearly indicates that most retail traders should place their stops at less
crowded and more unusual locations.

More interesting, however, is the possibility of profit from this unique dynamic of the currency market.
The fact that the FX market is so stop driven gives scope to several opportunistic setups for short-term
traders. In her book "Day Trading The Currency Market" (2005), Kathy Lien describes one such setup
based on fading the "00" level. The approach discussed here is based on the opposite notion of joining
the short-term momentum.

Taking Advantage of the Hunt

The "stop hunting with the big specs" is an exceedingly simple setup, requiring nothing more than a
price chart and one indicator. Here is the setup in a nutshell: On a one-hour chart, mark lines 15 points
of either side of the round number. For example, if the EUR/USD is approaching the 1.2500 figure, the

187 ZC
trader would mark off 1.2485 and 1.2515 on the chart. This 30-point area is known as the "trade zone",
much like the 20-yard line on the football field is known as the "red zone". Both names communicate
the same idea - namely that the participants have a high probability of scoring once they enter that
area.

The idea behind this setup is straightforward. Once prices approach the round-number level,
speculators will try to target the stops clustered in that region. Because FX is a decentralized market,
no one knows the exact number of stops at any particular "00" level, but traders hope that the size is
large enough to trigger further liquidation of positions - a cascade of stop orders that will push price
farther in that direction than it would move under normal conditions.

Therefore, in the case of a long setup, if the price in the EUR/USD was climbing toward the 1.2500
level, the trader would go long the pair with two units as soon as it crossed the 1.2485 threshold. The
stop on the trade would be 15 points back of the entry because this is a strict momentum trade. If
prices do not immediately follow through, chances are the setup failed. The profit target on the first unit
would be the amount of initial risk or approximately 1.2500, at which point the trader would move the
stop on the second unit to breakeven to lock in profit. The target on the second unit would be two times
initial risk, or 1.2515, allowing the trader to exit on a momentum burst.

Aside from watching these key chart levels, there is only one other rule that a trader must follow in
order to optimize the probability of success. Because this setup is basically a derivative of momentum
trading, it should be traded only in the direction of the larger trend. There are numerous ways to
ascertain direction using technical analysis, but the 200-period simple moving average (SMA) on the
hourly charts may be particularly effective in this case. By using a longer term average on the short-
term charts, you can stay on the right side of the price action without being subject to near-term
whipsaw moves. (For more insight, see Momentum Trading With Discipline.)

Let's take a look at two trades - one a short and the other a long - to see how this setup is traded in
real time.

Figure 1

188 ZC
Note that on June 8, 2006, the EUR/USD is trading well below its 200 SMA, indicating that the pair is
in a strong downtrend (Figure 1). As prices approach the 1.2700 level from the downside, the trader
would initiate a short the moment price crosses the 1.2715 level, putting a stop 15 points above the
entry at 1.2730. In this particular example, the downside momentum is extremely strong as traders gun
stops at the 1.2700 level within the hour. The first half of the trade is exited at 1.2700 for a 15-point
profit and the second half is exited at 1.2685 generating 45 points of reward for only 30 points of risk.

Figure 2

The example illustrated in Figure 2 also takes place on June 8, 2006, but this time in the USD/JPY, the
"trade-zone" setup generates several opportunities for profit over a short period of time as key stop
cluster areas are probed over and over. In this case, the pair trades well above its 200 period SMA and,
therefore, the trader would only look to take long setups. At 3am EST, the pair trades through the
113.85 level, triggering a long entry. In the next hour, the longs are able to push the pair through the
114.00 stop cluster level and the trader would sell one unit for a 15-point profit, immediately moving
the stop to breakeven at 113.85. The longs can't sustain the buying momentum and the pair trades
back below 113.85, taking the trader out of the market. Only two hours later, however, prices once
again rally through 113.85 and the trader gets long once more. This time, both profit targets are hit as
buying momentum overwhelms the shorts and they are forced to cover their positions, creating a
cascade of stops that verticalize prices by 100 points in only two hours.

Conclusion
The "stop hunt with the big specs" is one of the simplest and most efficient FX setups available to
short-term traders. It requires nothing more than focus and a basic understanding of currency market
dynamics. Instead of being victims of stop hunting expeditions, retail traders can finally turn the tables
and join the move with the big players, banking short-term profits in the process.

189 ZC
Short Term - Non-Farm Payroll
The non-farm payroll (NFP) report is a key economic indicator for the United States. It is intended to
represent the total number of paid workers in the U.S. minus farm employees, government employees,
private household employees and employees of nonprofit organizations.

The NFP report causes one of the consistently largest rate movements of any news announcement in
the forex market. As a result, many analysts, traders, funds, investors and speculators anticipate the
NFP number - and the directional movement it will cause. With so many different parties watching this
report and interpreting it, even when the number comes in line with estimates it can cause large rate
swings. Read on to find out how to trade this move without getting knocked out by the
irrational volatility it can create. (For background reading, see A Guide To Conference Board
Indicators.)

Trading News Releases

Trading news releases can be very profitable, but it is not for the faint of the heart. This is
because speculating on the direction of a given currency pair upon the release can be very dangerous.
Fortunately, it is possible to wait for the wild rate swings to subside. Then, traders can attempt to
capitalize on the real market move after the speculators have been wiped out or have taken profits or
losses. The purpose of this is to attempt to capture rational movement after the announcement,
instead of the irrational volatility that pervades the first few minutes after an announcement. (For more,
see Trading On News Releases.)

The release of the NFP generally occurs on the first Friday of every month at 8:30am EST. This news
release creates a favorable environment for active traders in that it provides a near guarantee of a
tradable move following the announcement. As with all aspects of trading, whether we make money on
it is not assured. Approaching the trade from a logical standpoint based on how the market is reacting
can provide us with more consistent results than simply anticipating the directional movement the
event will cause. (For related reading, see Economic Indicators For The Do-It-Yourself Investor.)

The Strategy
The NFP report generally affects all major currency pairs, but one of the favorites among traders is
the GBP/USD. Because the forex market is open 24 hours a day, all traders have the capability to
trade the news event.

The logic behind the strategy is to wait for the market to digest the information's significance. After the
initial swings have occurred, and after market participants have had a bit of time to reflect on what the
number means, we will enter a trade in the direction of the dominating momentum. We wait for a signal
that indicates the market may have chosen a direction to take rates. This helps avoid getting in too
early and decreases the probability of being whipsawed out of the market before it has chosen a
direction.

The Rules
The strategy can be traded off of five- or 15-minute charts. For the rules and examples, a 15-minute
chart will be used, although the same rules apply to a five-minute chart. Signals may appear on
different time frames, so stick with one or the other.

1. Nothing is done during the first bar after the NFP report (8:30-8:45am in the case of the 15-
minute chart).
2. The bar created at 8:30-8:45 will be wide ranging. We wait for an inside bar to occur after this
initial bar (it does not need to be the very next bar). In other words, we are waiting for the most
recent bar's range to be completely inside the previous bar's range. (For a variation of this
strategy, see Inside Day Bollinger Band® Turn Trades.)

190 ZC
 3. This inside bar's high and low rate sets up our potential trade triggers. When a subsequent bar
closes above or below the inside bar, we take a trade in the direction of the breakout. We can
also enter a trade as soon as the bar moves past the high or low without waiting for the bar to
close. Whichever method you choose, stick to it.
4. Place a 30-pip stop on the trade you entered. (For more, see A Logical Method Of Stop
Placement.)
5. Make up to a maximum of two trades. If both get stopped out, don't re-enter. The inside bar's
high and low are used again for a second trade if needed.
6. Our target is a time target. Generally, most of the move occurs within four hours. Thus, we exit
four hours after our entry time. A trailing stop is an alternative if traders wish to stay in the trade.

Example

Figure 1: February 6, 2009. GBP/USD 15-minute chart. Time is GMT.

Looking at Figure 1, the vertical line marks the 8:30am EST release of the NFP report. As you can see
from the chart, there are three bars, or 45 minutes, of back-and-forth action following the release.
During this time, we do not trade until we see an inside bar. The inside bar has a square around it on
the chart. This bar's price range is fully contained by the previous bar. We will enter when a bar closes
higher or lower than the inside bar. The next bar's close is circled, as that is our entry; it closed above
the inside bar's high. Our stop is 30 pips below the entry price, which is marked by a solid black
horizontal bar.

Because our entry occurred at approximately at 9:45am EST (2:45pm GMT), we will close out our
position four hours later. By entering the trade at 1.4670 and exiting four hours later at 1.4820, 150
pips were captured while risking only 30 pips. However, it should be noted that not every trade will be
this profitable. (Before attempting to trade any strategy, be sure to read Stimulate Your Skills With
Simulated Trading.)

Strategy Downfall
While this strategy can be very profitable, it does have some pitfalls to be aware of. For one, the
market may move in one direction aggressively and thus may be beginning to fade by the time we get
an inside bar signal. In other words, if a strong move occurs prior to the inside bar, it is possible a
191 ZC
move could exhaust itself before we get a signal. It is also important to note that in high volatility times,
even after waiting for a pattern setup, rates can reverse quickly. This is why it very important to have a
stop in place.

Summary
The logic behind this strategy of trading the NFP report is based on waiting for a small consolidation,
the inside bar, after the initial volatility of the report has subsided and the market is choosing which
direction it will go. By controlling risk with a moderate stop we are poised to make a potentially large
profit from a huge move that almost always occurs each time the NFP is released.

192 ZC
Medium Term - Why Medium Term?
Retail traders just starting out in the forex market are often unprepared for what lies ahead and, as
such, end up undergoing the same life cycle: first they dive in head first - usually losing their first
account - and then they either give up, or they take a step back and do a little more research and open
a demo account to practice. Those who do this will often eventually open another live account, and
experience a little more success - breaking even or turning a profit. To help avoid the losses from
hastily diving into forex trading, this article will introduce you to a framework for a medium-term forex
trading system to get you started on the right foot, help you save money and ultimately become a
profitable retail forex trader.

Why Medium Term?

So, why are we focusing on medium-term forex trading? Why not long-term or short-term strategies?
To answer that question, let's take a look at the following comparison table:

Type of
Definition Good Points Bad Points
Trader

A trader who looks to open and Large capital and/or risk

Short- close a trade within minutes, Quick realization of profits or requirements due to the large
Term often taking advantage of small losses due to the rapid-fire amount of leverage needed to
(Scalper) price movements with a large nature of this type of trading. profit from such small
amount of leverage. movements.

A trader typically looking to hold

positions for one or more days, Lowest capital requirements of Fewer opportunities because
Medium-
often taking advantage of the three because leverage is these types of trades are more
Term
opportunistic technical necessary only to boost profits. difficult to find and execute.
situations.

A trader looking to hold

More reliable long-run profits Large capital requirements to
Long- positions for months or years,
because this depends on reliable cover volatile movements
Term often basing decisions on long-
fundamental factors. against any open position.
term fundamental factors.

Now, you will notice that both short-term and long-term traders require a large amount of capital - the
first type needs it to generate enough leverage, and the second relies on it to cover volatility. Although
these two types of traders exist in the marketplace, they are often high-net-worth individuals or larger
funds. For these reasons, retail traders are most likely to succeed using a medium-term strategy.

The Basic Framework

The framework of the strategy covered in this section will focus on one central concept: trading with
the odds. To do this, we will look at a variety of techniques in multiple time frames to determine
whether a given trade is worth taking. Keep in mind, however, that this is not a mechanical/automatic
trading system; rather, it is a system by which you will receive technical input and make a decision
based upon it. The key is finding situations where all (or most) of the technical signals point in the
same direction. These high-probability trading situations will, in turn, generally be profitable.

Chart Creation and Markup

193 ZC
Selecting a Trading Program
We will be using a free program called MetaTrader to illustrate this trading strategy; however, many
other similar programs can also be used that will yield the same results. There are two basic things the
trading program must have:

• the ability to display three different time frames simultaneously

• the ability to plot technical indicators, such as moving averages (EMA and SMA), relative
strength index (RSI), stochastics and moving average convergence divergence (MACD)

Setting up the Indicators

Now we will look at how to set up this strategy in your chosen trading program. We will also define a
collection of technical indicators with rules associated with them. These technical indicators are used
as a filter for your trades.

If you choose to use more indicators than shown here, you will create a more reliable system that will
generate fewer trading opportunities. Conversely, if you choose to use fewer indicators than shown
here, you will create a less-reliable system that will generate more trading opportunities. Here are the
settings that we will use for this article:

• Minute-by-minute candlestick chart

• RSI (15)
• stochastics (15,3,3)
• MACD (Default)
• Hourly candlestick chart
• EMA (100)
• EMA (10)
• EMA (5)
• MACD (Default)
• Daily candlestick chart
• SMA (100)

Adding in Other Studies

Now you will want to incorporate the use of some of the more subjective studies, such as:

• significant trendlines that you see in any of the time frames

• Fibonacci retracements, arcs or fans that you see in the hourly or daily charts
• support or resistance that you see in any of the time frames
• pivot points calculated from the previous day to the hourly and minutely charts
• chart patterns that you see in any of the time frames

In the end, your screen should look something like this:

194 ZC
Finding Entry and Exit Points
The key to finding entry points is to look for times in which all of the indicators point in the same
direction. Moreover, the signals of each time frame should support the timing and direction of the trade.
There are a few particular instances that you should look for:

Bullish

• Bullish candlestick engulfings or other formations

• Trendline/channel breakouts upwards
• Positive divergences in RSI, stochastics and MACD
• Moving average crossovers (shorter crossing over longer)
• Strong, close support and weak, distant resistance

Bearish

• Bearish candlestick engulfings or other formations

• Trendline/channel breakouts downwards
• Negative divergences in RSI, stochastics and MACD
• Moving average crossovers (shorter crossing under longer)
• Strong, close resistance and weak, distant support

It is a good idea to place exit points (both stop losses and take profits) before even placing the trade.
These points should be placed at key levels and modified only if there is a change in the premise for
your trade (oftentimes as a result of fundamentals coming into play). You can place these exit points at
key levels, including:

• Just before areas of strong support or resistance

• At key Fibonacci levels (retracements, fans or arcs)
• Just inside of key trendlines or channels

Let's take a look at a couple of examples of individual charts using a combination of indicators to locate
specific entry and exit points. Again, make sure any trades that you intend to place are supported in all
three time frames.

195 ZC
Here you can see that a number of indicators are pointing in the same direction. There is a
bearish head-and-shoulders pattern, a MACD, Fibonacci resistance and bearish EMA crossover (five-
and 10-day). We also see that a Fibonacci support provides a nice exit point. This trade is good for
50 pips, and takes place over less than two days.

196 ZC
Here we can see many indicators that point to a long position. We have a bullish engulfing, a Fibonacci
support and a 100-day SMA support. Again, we see a Fibonacci resistance level that provides an
excellent exit point. This trade is good for almost 200 pips in only a few weeks. Note that we could
break this trade into smaller trades on the hourly chart.

Money Management and Risk

Money management is key to success in any marketplace but particularly for the forex market, which is
one of the most volatile markets to trade. Many times fundamental factors can send currency rates
swinging in one direction only to whipsaw into another in mere minutes. So, it is important to limit your
downside by always utilizing stop-loss points and trading only when good opportunities arise. (For
more on money management in trading, see Losing To Win.)

Here are a few specific ways in which you can limit risk:

• Increase the amount of indicators that you are using. This will result in a harsher filter through
which your trades are screened. Note that this will result in fewer opportunities.
• Place stop-loss points at the closest resistance levels. Note that this may result in forfeited
gains.
• Use trailing stop losses to lock in profits and limit losses when you trade turns favorable. Note,
however, that this may also result in forfeited gains.

Conclusion
Anyone can make money in the forex market, but it requires patience and a well-defined strategy. This
article is a framework from which you can build your own unique, profitable trading system using
indicators with which you feel comfortable.

197 ZC
Medium Term - Gold And The Aussie
The relationships between different financial markets are almost as old as the markets themselves. For
example, in many cases when benchmark equities rise, bonds fall. Many traders will watch for
correlations like this and try to capitalize on the opportunity. The same types of relationships exist in
the global foreign exchange market. Take, for instance, the closely related tie between the Australian
dollar and gold. Due mostly to the fact that Australia remains a major producer of this precious metal,
the correlation is an opportunity that not only exists, but is one that traders on every level can
capitalize on. Let's take a look at why this relationship exists, and how you can use it to produce solid-
gold returns.

Being Productive Is Key

The U.S. dollar/crude oil relationship exists for one simple reason: the commodity is priced in dollars.
However, the same cannot be said about the Aussie correlation. The gold/Australian dollar relationship
stems from production. Australia is one of the largest gold producers in the world, along with China,
South Africa and the United States. Even though it may not be the largest producer, the "Land Down
Under" produces an estimated 225 metric tons of gold per year, according to the consultancy firm
GFMS. As a result, it is only natural that the underlying currency of a major commodity producer
follows a similar pattern to that commodity. With the ebb and flow of production, the exchange rate will
follow supply and demand as money exchanges hands between miner and manufacturer. (For related
reading, see Commodity Prices And Currency Movements.)

Capitalizing on the Relationship

Although the macro strategy does work on all levels, it is best suited for portfolios that are set in longer
time frames. Traders are not going to see strong correlations on every single day of trading, much like
other broader market dynamics. As a result, it's advantageous to cushion the blow of daily volatility and
risk through a longer time horizon.

Fundamentally oriented traders will tend to trade one or both instruments, taking trading cues from the
other. These cues can be gathered from a list of topics including:

1. Commodity reserve reports

2. COT Futures Reports
3. Australian economic developments
4. Interest rates
5. Safe haven investing

As a result, these trades tend to be longer than day-trade considerations as the portfolio is looking to
capture the overall market tone rather than just an intraday pop or drop.

Technically, traders tend to find their cues in technical formations with the hope that corresponding
correlations will seep into the related market. Whether the formation is in the gold chart or the Aussie
chart, it is better to find one solid formation first, rather than looking for both charts to correlate
perfectly. An example of this is clearly seen in the chart examples below.

198 ZC
 Figure 1

Source: FX Trek Intellicharts

199 ZC
 Figure 2

Source: MetaTrader

As shown in Figure 2, with the market in turmoil and the investor deleveraging that was "en vogue" in
2008, traders saw an opportunity to jump on the bandwagon as both the Aussie and gold experienced
a temporary uptick in price. Already knowing that this would be a blow-off top in an otherwise bearish
market, the savvy technical investor could visibly see both assets moving in sync. As a result,
technically speaking, a short opportunity shone through as the commodity approached the $905.50
figure, which corresponded with the pivotal 0.8500 figure in the FX market. The double top in gold all
but ensured further depression in the Australian dollar/U.S. dollar currency pair. (For more insight,
see The Midas Touch For Gold Investors.)

Trying It Out: A Trade Setup

Now let's take a look at a shorter trade setup involving both the Australian dollar and gold.

First, the broad macro picture. Taking a look at Figure 2, we see that gold has taken a hard dive down
as investors and traders have deleveraged and sold off riskier assets. Following this move,
subsequent consolidation lends to the belief that a turnaround may be lingering in the market. The idea
is supported by the likelihood that equity investors will elect to move some money into the safe haven
commodity as global benchmark indexes continue to decline in value. (To read more about gold's
reputation as a safe haven, see 8 Reasons To Own Gold.)

200 ZC
 Figure 3

Source: MetaTrader

We see a similar position developing in the Australian dollar following a spike down to just below the
0.6045 figure, shown in Figure 4 below. At this time, the currency was under extreme pressure as
global speculators deemed the Australian dollar a risky currency. Putting these two factors together,
portfolio direction is looking to be upward.

Next, we take a look at our charts and apply basic support and resistance techniques. Following our
initial trade idea with gold, we first project a textbook channel to our chart as price action has displayed
three defining technical points (labeled A, B and C). The gold channel corresponds with a short-term
channel developing in the AUD/USD currency pair in Figure 4.

201 ZC
 Figure 4

Source: MetaTrader

The combination culminates on December 10, 2008 (Figure 3 Point C). Not only do both assets test
the support or lower channel trendline, but we also have a bullish MACD convergence confirming the
move higher in the AUD/USD currency pair.

Finally, we place the corresponding entry at the close of the session, 0.6561. The
subsequent stop would be placed at the swing low. In this case, that would be the December 5 low of
0.6290, a roughly 271 pip stop. Taking proper risk/reward management into account, we place our
target at 0.7103 to give us a 2:1 risk-to-reward ratio. Luckily, the trade takes no longer than a week as
the target is triggered on December 18 for a 542 pip profit.

Conclusion
Intermarket strategies like the Australian dollar and gold present ample opportunities for the savvy
investor and trader. Whether it's to produce a higher profit/loss ratio or increase overall portfolio returns,
market correlations are sure to add value to a market participant's repertoire.

202 ZC
Medium Term - Turn Trade
Most traders have an extremely hard time trading with the trend. This observation may seem
counterintuitive, as the majority of traders claim that trend trading is their preferred approach to the
market. However, after analyzing the records of thousands of retail traders, we are convinced the
opposite is true. While everyone pays lip service to the idiom "the trend is your friend", in reality, most
traders love to pick tops and bottoms and constantly fade rather than trade with the trend. In this article,
we'll cover the turn trade, a setup which allows traders to have their cake and eat it too: buying low and
selling high while still trading with the trend. (For related reading, see Inside Day Bollinger Band® Turn
Trade.)

Turn Trade Basics

The turn trade recognizes the desire of most traders to find turns in the price action (that is to buy low
and sell high), but it does so in the overarching framework of trading with the trend. The setup uses
multiple time frames, moving averages and Bollinger Band® "bands" as its tools of entry. (For
background reading, see The Basics Of Bollinger Bands®.)

Getting Started
We begin by looking at the daily charts to ascertain whether a pair is in a trend, and used a 20-period
daily simple moving average to determine the trend. In technical analysis, there are a number tools
that can help us diagnose trend, but none is as simple and effective as the 20-period SMA. It includes
a full month's worth of data (20 business days) and, as such, it provides us with a very good idea of an
average price. Therefore, if price action is above the "average" price, we assume the pair is in an
uptrend and vice versa.

Next, we move to the hourly charts to pinpoint our entries. In the turn to trend setup, we will only trade
in the direction of the trend by buying highly oversold prices in an uptrend and selling highly
overbought prices in a downtrend. How will we determine our overbought and oversold extremes? The
answer is by using Bollinger Band® "bands" to help us gauge the price action. Bollinger Bands®
measure price extremes by calculating the standard deviation of price from its 20-period moving
average. In the case of hourly charts, we will use Bollinger Bands® with three standard deviations
(3SD) and Bollinger Bands® with two standard deviations (2SD) to create a set of Bollinger Band®
channels. When price trades in a trend channel, most of the price action will be contained within the
Bollinger Band® "bands" of 2SD and 1SD.

Why do we use the 3SD and 2SD settings in this particular setup? Because the Bollinger Band® rule
applies to price action on the daily scale. In order to properly trade the hourly charts, which are more
short term and therefore more volatile, we need to accommodate to those extremes in order to
generate the most accurate signals possible. In fact, a good rule of thumb to remember is that traders
should increase their Bollinger Band® values with every decrease in time frame. So, for example, with
five-minute charts, traders may want to use Bollinger Bands® with setting of 3.5SD or even 4SD to
focus on only the most oversold or overbought conditions.

Moving back to our setup, after having established the direction of the trend, we now observe the price
action on the hourly charts. If price is in an uptrend on the dailies, we watch the hourlies for a turn back
to the trend. If price continues to trade between the 3SD and the 2SD lower Bollinger Band® "bands",
we stay away, as it indicates a strong downward momentum.

The beauty of this setup is that it prevents us from guessing the turn prematurely by forcing us to wait
until the price action confirms a swing bottom or a swing top. In our example, if the price trades above
the 2SD lower Bollinger Band® on the closing basis, we enter at market using the prior swing low
minus five points as the stop. We set our target for the first unit at half the amount of risk; if it is hit, we
move the stop to breakeven for the rest of the position. We then look for the second unit to trade up to
the upper Bollinger Band® and exit the position only if the pair closes out of the 3SD-2SD Bollinger

203 ZC
Band® channel, suggesting that the uptrend move is over.

Rules for the Long Trade

1. On the daily setup, place a 20-period SMA and make sure that the price is above the moving
average on a closing basis.
2. Take only long trades in the direction of the trend.
3. Move to the hourly charts and place two sets of Bollinger Bands® on the chart. The first pair of
Bollinger Bands® should be set to 3SD and the second pair should be set to 2SD.
4. Once the price breaks through and closes above the lower 3SD-2SD Bollinger Band® channel on
an hourly basis, buy at market price.
5. Set stop at swing low minus five points and calculate your risk (Risk = Entry Price - Stop Price).
(Traders who want to give the setup a little more room can use swing low minus 10 points as their
stop.)
6. Set a profit target for the first unit at 50% of risk (i.e., if you are risking 40 points on the trade then
place a take-profit limit order 20 points above entry.)
7. Move the stop to breakeven when the first profit target is hit.
8. Exit the second unit when the price closes below the upper 3SD-2SD Bollinger Band® channel or at
breakeven, whichever comes first.

Rules for the Short Trade

1. On the daily setup, place a 20-period SMA and make sure that the price is below the moving
average on the closing basis.
2. Take only short trades in the direction of the trend.
3. Move to the hourly charts and place two sets of Bollinger Bands® on the chart. The first pair of
Bollinger Bands® should be set to 3SD and the second pair should be set to 2SD.
4. Once price breaks through and closes above the upper 3SD-2SD Bollinger Band® channel on an
hourly basis, sell at market.
5. Set a stop at swing low plus five points and calculate your risk (Risk = Entry Price - Stop Price).
(Traders who want to give the setup a little more room can use swing high plus 10 points as their stop.)
6. Set profit target for the first unit at 50% of risk (i.e., if you are risking 40 points on the trade, then
place a take-profit limit order 20 points above entry).
7. Move the stop to breakeven when the first profit target is hit.
8. Exit the second unit when price closes above the lower 3SD-2SD Bollinger Band® channel or at
breakeven, whichever comes first.

The Turn Trade In Action

Now let's look at some examples:

204 ZC
 Figure 1: Turn to the Trend, EUR/CHF

Taking a look at the EUR/CHF daily chart in Figure 1, we see that since the middle of March 2006,
EUR/CHF has traded above its 20-day SMA, indicating that it is in a clear uptrend.

205 ZC
 Figure 2: Turn to the Trend, EUR/CHF

Turning to the hourlies, we wait until the pair breaks out of the lower Bollinger Band® 3SD-2SD zone
to go long at market at 6pm EST on March 15, 2006, at 1.5635 with a stop at 1.5623, risking only 12
points. (Note that EUR/CHF tends to be a very low volatility currency pair providing us with very small
risk setups. Because the risk is so small, we may choose to set our target at 100% of risk rather than
the usual 50% of risk.)

Regardless of our choice, we are able to take profits at 3am EST on March 16, 2006, at 1.5651,
banking 16 points on the first unit. We then move our stop to breakeven on the rest of the position and
target the upper Bollinger Band®. We wait for the price to pierce the upper Bollinger Band®; only when
it falls out of the upper Bollinger 3SD-2SD band channel do we exit the rest of the position at 1pm EST
on March 16, 2006, at 1.5692, earning 57 points on the second lot. Not bad for a trade on which we
risked only 12 points.

206 ZC
 Figure 3: Turn to the Trend, USD/CAD

The example of USD/CAD shown in Figure 3 and Figure 4 shows a classic turn to trend setup after it
establishes an uptrend on March 7, 2006.

207 ZC
 Figure 4: Turn to the Trend, USD/CAD

We move from the dailies to the hourly charts and wait until the prices recover above the lower
Bollinger Band®, entering a long at market at 11am EST on March 16, 2006, at 1.1524. We place our
stop at 1.1505, which is the swing low minus five pips for a miniscule 19-point risk.

At 10pm EST on March 16, 2006, as price makes a burst upward, we sell half the position at 1.1540
and move our stop to breakeven, locking in 16 points of profit. After the price makes another burst
higher, we exit at the first hint of weakness, when the hourly candle closes below the 3SD-2SD
Bollinger Band® zone. This occurs at 11am on March 17, 2006, and we close out the rest of our
position at 1.1587, for a 63-point profit on the second half of the trade.

208 ZC
 Figure 5: Turn to the Trend, GBP/USD

The example in Figure 5 shows a short trade. On February 15, 2006, we look at the daily chart and
see that the GBP/USD is trading below its 20-day SMA, which indicates that it is in a clear downtrend.

In Figure 6, we turn our attention to the hourly chart and try to enter a high probability short when the
price becomes overbought on a shorter-term time frame. We do this by waiting for the GBP/USD to
close below the 3SD-2SD upper Bollinger Band® channel, at which time we sell at market (1.7440)
and place our stop at approximately 1.7500, risking 60 points. As per our rules, we cover half the
position at 1pm EST when price approaches the 1.7410 level, which is 30 points, or 50% of our risk.

Next, we move our stop at breakeven and hold the position, targeting the lower 3SD Bollinger Band®.
Notice that the downtrend re-establishes itself with a vengeance and the price declines into our zone.
We stay in the trade until the price breaks back out of the lower Bollinger Band® channel, indicating
that downward momentum is waning. At 6am on February 16, 2006, we cover the rest of the trade at
1.7338, for a profit of 102 points.

209 ZC
 Figure 6: Turn to the Trend, GBP/USD

Figure 7 shows another good example of why we always scale out of our positions. On March 15,
2006, USD/CHF is in a downtrend, but the pair begins to trade back up to the 20-period SMA on the
dailies. Because we can never be certain beforehand whether this is a retrace or a real turn in the
trend, we adhere to the rules of the setup to control our risk.

210 ZC
 Figure 7: Turn to the Trend, USD/CHF

Looking on the hourly charts in Figure 8, we see that at 1pm EST on March 21, 2006, the price closes
below the upper Bollinger Band® 3SD-2SD level, and we enter a short at market at 1.3021. Our stop is
placed five points above the swing high at 1.3042, for total risk of 21 points.

At 6pm EST on March 21, 2006, the price reaches our first target of 1.3008, and we cover one lot for
12 points of profit or approximately 50% of risk. We simultaneously move our stop to breakeven. At
this point, the trade begins to move against us, but our breakeven stop insures that we do not lose any
money and, in fact, still bank 12 points of profit on the first half of the position.

211 ZC
 Figure 8: Turn to the Trend, USD/CHF

When the Setup Fails

Finally, let's take a look at an example of a failed setup in Figure 9. Starting on March 3, 2006, the
EUR/GBP breaks above the 20-period SMA and establishes an uptrend on the daily charts.

212 ZC
 Figure 9: Turn to the Trend, EUR/GBP

Using our turn-to-trend approach, we wait for the pair to make a swing low in the 3SD-2SD Bollinger
Band® zone and then enter long at .6881 at 10am EST on March 14, 2006. The swing low was
created at 7am EST that same day at .6878, so we place our stop at .6873, five points below the swing
low, risking a total of eight points. Note that the EUR/GBP pair is a very slow-moving cross with very
high pip values. A point in the EUR/GBP is worth approximately 175% of a point in EUR/USD, so an
eight-point risk in EUR/GBP would translate into a 14-point risk in EUR/USD.

213 ZC
 Figure 10: Turn to the Trend, EUR/GBP

Initially, the price makes a small rally but then drops to 0.6873 at noon EST on March 14, 2006, taking
out our stop. This turns out to be the exact low of the move, and many traders may find it incredibly
frustrating to be taken out of a trade just before it has a chance to turn around and generate profits.
Not us, however. We realize that getting stopped on a bottom tick is just a part of trading and will
probably happen more times than we care to remember. Far more important is to appreciate the risk
management aspect of the trade, which leaves us only with a slight loss of eight points, thus
preserving our capital and allowing us to look for other high probability setups.

To truly appreciate the importance of this dynamic, just imagine the following scenario. Instead of a
stop loss, we leave the trade open and instead of turning around, it proceeds to drop even further.
Before long, we may be looking at a floating loss in hundreds of points - something that would be
inordinately more difficult to make up than our eight-point stop.

Conclusion
Most traders love to pick tops and bottoms, rather than trade with the trend. The turn trade allows you
to do both by using multiple time frames, moving averages and Bollinger Band® "bands" as its tools of
entry.

214 ZC
Medium Term - Commodity Channel
Breakouts
Often in life, the right action is the hardest to take. The same dynamic occurs in trading. For most
traders it is extremely difficult to buy tops and sell bottoms because from a very early age we are
conditioned to look for value and buy "cheap" while selling "dear". This is why although most traders
proclaim their love for trading with the trend, in reality, the majority love to pick tops or bottoms. While
these types of "turn" trades can be very profitable, turn trading can sometimes seem like a Sisyphean
task as price trends relentlessly in one direction, constantly stopping out the bottom and top pickers.

Most traders are reluctant to buy breakouts for fear of being the last one to the party before prices
reverse with a vengeance. So, how can they learn to trade breakouts confidently and successfully?
The "do the right thing" setup is designed to deal with just such a predicament. It tells the trader to buy
or sell when most ingrained lessons are against doing so. Furthermore, it puts the trader on the right
side of the trend at the times when many other traders are trying to fade the price action. Read on as
we cover this strategy and show you some examples of how it can be used.

Do the Right Thing - Trade Breakouts

In the "do the right thing" strategy, the capitulation of top and bottom pickers in the face of a massive
buildup of momentum forces a covering of positions, allowing you to exit profitably within a very short
period of time after putting on a trade.

"Do the right thing" employs a rarely used indicator in FX called the commodity channel index (CCI),
which was invented by Donald Lambert in 1980 and was originally designed to solve engineering
problems regarding signals. The primary focus of CCI is to measure the deviation of the price of the
currency pair from its statistical average. As such, CCI is an extremely good and sensitive measure of
momentum and helps us to optimize only the highest probability entries for our setup. (For background
reading, see Timing Trades With The Commodity Channel Index.)

Without resorting to the mathematics of the indicator, please note that CCI is an unbound oscillator
with a reading of +100 typically considered to be overbought, while any reading of -100 is considered
oversold. For our purposes, however, we will use these levels as our trigger points as we put a twist on
the traditional interpretation of CCI. We actually look to buy if the currency pair makes a new high
above 100 and sell if the currency pair makes a new low below -100. In "do the right thing" we are
looking for new peaks or spikes in momentum that are likely to carry the currency pair higher or lower.
The thesis behind this setup is that much like a body in motion will remain so until it's slowed by
counterforces, new highs or lows in CCI will propel the currency farther in the direction of the move
before new prices finally put a halt to the advance or the decline.

Rules for the Long Trade

1. On the daily or the hourly charts, place the CCI indicator with standard input of 20.
2. Note the very last time the CCI registered a reading of greater than +100 before dropping back
below the +100 zone.
3. Take a measure of the peak CCI reading and record it.
4. If CCI once again trades above the +100 and if its value exceeds the prior peak reading, go long at
market at the close of the candle.
5. Measure the low of the candle and use it as your stop.
6. If the position moves in your favor by the amount of your original stop, sell half and move the stop to
breakeven.
7. Take profit on the rest of the trade when the position moves to two times your stop.

Rules for the Short Trade

1. On the daily or the hourly charts, place the CCI indicator with standard input of 20.
215 ZC
2. Note the very last time the CCI registered a reading of less than -100 before poking above the -100
zone.
3. Take a measure of the peak CCI reading and record it.
4. If CCI once again trades below the -100 and if its value exceeds the prior low reading, go short at
market at the close of the candle.
5. Measure the high of the candle and use it as your stop.
6. If the position moves in your favor by the amount of your original stop, sell half and move the stop
on the remainder of the position to breakeven.
7. Take profit on the rest of the trade when the position moves to two times your stop.

CCI Setup on Longer Time Frames

In the daily chart of the EUR/USD pair (Figure 1) we see that the former peak high above the CCI +100
level was recorded on September 5, 2005, when it reached a reading of 130. Not until more than three
months later on December 13, 2005, did the CCI produce a value that would exceed this number.

Throughout this time, we can see that EUR/USD was in a severe decline with many false breakouts to
the upside that fizzled as soon as they appeared on the chart. On December 13, 2005, however, CCI
hit 162.61 and we immediately went long on the close at 1.1945 using the low of the candle at 1.1906
as our stop. Our first target was 100% of our risk, or approximately 40 points. We exited half the
position at 1.1985 and the second half of the position at two times our risk at 1.2035. Our total reward-
to-risk ratio on this trade was 1.5:1, which means that if we are only 50% accurate, the setup will still
have positive expectancy. Note also that we were able to capture our gains in less than 24 hours as
the momentum of the move carried our position to profit very quickly.

Figure 1: Do the Right Thing CCI Trade, EUR/USD

216 ZC
For traders who do not like to wait nearly a quarter of a year between setups, the hourly chart offers far
more opportunities for the "do the right thing" setup. It is still infrequent, which is one of the reasons
that makes this setup so powerful (the common wisdom in trading is "the rarer the trade, the better the
trade"). Nevertheless, it occurs on the hourly charts far more often than on the dailies.

In Figure 2, we look at the hourly chart of the EUR/USD between March 24 and March 28 of 2006. At
1pm on March 24, the EUR/USD reaches a CCI peak of 142.96. Several days later at 4am on March
28, the CCI reading reaches a new high of 184.72. We go long at market on the close of the candle at
1.2063. The low of the candle is 1.2027 and we set our stop there.

The pair consolidates for several hours and then makes a burst to our first target of 1.2103 at 9am on
March 28. We move the stop to breakeven to protect our profits and are stopped out a few hours later,
banking 40 pips of profit. As the saying goes, half a loaf is better than none, and it is amazing how they
can add up to a whole bakery full of profits if we simply take what the market gives us.

Figure 2: Do the Right Thing CCI Trade, EUR/USD

CCI Setup on Shorter Time Frames

Figure 3 shows a short in the USD/CHF. This example is the opposite of the approach shown above.
On October 11, 2004, USD/CHF makes a CCI low of -131.05. A few days later, on October 14, the CCI
prints at -133.68. We enter short at market on the close of the candle at 1.2445. Our stop is the high of
that candle at 1.2545. Our first exit is hit just two days later at 1.2345. We stay in the trade with the rest
of the position and move the stop to breakeven. Our second target is hit on October 19 - no more than
five days after we've entered the trade.

The total profit on the trade? 300 points. Our total risk was only 200 points, and we never even

217 ZC
experienced any serious drawdown as the momentum pulled prices farther down. The key is high
probability, and that is exactly what the "do the right thing" setup provides.

Figure 3: Do the Right Thing CCI Trade, USD/CHF

Figure 4 shows another example of a short-term trade, this time to the downside in the EUR/JPY. At
9pm on March 21, 2006, EUR/JPY recorded a reading of -115.19 before recovering above the -100
CCI zone. The "do the right thing" setup triggered almost perfectly five days later, at 8pm on March 26.
The CCI value reached a low of -133.68 and we went short on the close of the candle. This was a very
large candle on the hourly charts, and we had to risk 74 points as our entry was 140.79 and our stop
was at 141.51.

Many traders would have been afraid to enter short at that time, thinking that most of the selling had
been done, but we had faith in our strategy and followed the setup. Prices then consolidated a bit and
trended lower until 1pm on March 27. Less than 24 hours later we were able to hit our first target,
which was a very substantial 74 points. Again we moved our stop to breakeven. The pair proceeded to
bottom out and rally, taking us out at breakeven. Although we did not achieve our second target overall,
it was a good trade as we banked 74 points without ever really being in a significant drawdown.

218 ZC
 Figure 4: Do the Right Thing CCI Trade, EUR/JPY

When "Do the Right Thing" Does You Wrong

Figure 5 shows how this setup can go wrong and why it is critical to always use stops. The "do the
right thing" setup relies on momentum to generate profits. When the momentum fails to materialize, it
signals that a turn may be in the making. Here is how it played out on the hourly charts in AUD/USD.
We note that CCI makes a near-term peak at 132.58 at 10pm on May 2, 2006. A few days later at
11am on May 4, CCI reaches 149.44 prompting a long entry at 0.7721. The stop is placed at 0.7709
and is taken out the very same hour. Notice that instead of rallying higher, the pair reversed rapidly.
Furthermore, as the downside move gained speed, prices reached a low of 0.7675. A trader who did
not take the 12-point stop as prescribed by the setup would have learned a very expensive lesson
indeed as his losses could have been magnified by a factor of three. Therefore, the key idea to
remember with our "do the right thing" setup is - "I am right or I am out!"

219 ZC
 Figure 5: Do the Right Thing CCI Trade, AUD/USD

Conclusion
"Do the right thing" allows traders to trade breakouts confidently and successfully. CCI can put you on
the right side of a trade when many others are trying to fade the price action. However, this setup only
works if you apply it along with disciplined stops to protect you from major losses if the expected
momentum fails to materialize.

220 ZC
Long Term - Directional Tactics
Forex was once a marketplace available only to governments, central banks, commercial and
investment banks and other institutional investors like hedge funds. Today, however, there are many
venues where just about anyone can trade currencies. These include currency futures, options on
futures, PHLX-listed foreign currency options and the largely unregulated over-the-counter (OTC) forex
market. Once the forex trader has decided which venue(s) and instrument(s) he or she will trade, it's
time to develop a well-conceived trading strategy before putting any trading capital at risk. Successful
traders must also predetermine their exit strategies and otherrisk-management tactics, which will be
used if the trade goes against them. Here we look at how to develop a trading strategy for the currency
markets based on directional trading.(To review some of the concepts in this piece, check out Basic
Concepts For The Forex Market and Common Questions About Currency Trading.)

Develop a Trading Strategy

One way to organize the multitude of potential strategies is to group them into directional and non-
directional approaches. Directional trading strategies take net long or short positions in a market, as
opposed to nondirectional (market-neutral) strategies. Most investors are familiar with the directional
approach; for example, millions of people participate in some form of retirement program, which is
basically a long-term portfolio of equity and/or debt securities held long by the investor. Net long
strategies are profitable in rising markets, while net short investors should profit in falling markets.
Directional strategies can be loosely grouped into the following subcategories:

• Trend-following strategies
• Moving average crossover systems
• Breakout systems
• Pattern-recognition strategies

This list is not all-inclusive, as there are many other approaches to trading forex. (For more,
read Trading Double Tops And Double Bottoms and Identifying Trending & Range-Bound Currencies.)

Trend-Following Strategies
Trend-following systems create signals for traders to initiate positions once a specific price move has
occurred. These systems are based on the technical premise that once a trend has been established,
it is more likely to continue rather than reverse. (Read more about trends in the forex market in Trading
Trend Or Range?)

Moving-Average (MA) Crossover

The moving average (MA) crossover trading system is one of the most common directional systems in
use today. This system uses two MAs. Buy signals are generated when the shorter-term, faster-
moving MA crosses over the longer average. This indicates that the near-term price action is
accelerating to the upside.

These systems are susceptible to false signals, or "whipsaws". As such, traders should experiment
with different time periods and conduct other backtesting before trading.

221 ZC
 Figure 1

This crossover system posted a buy signal when the five-day crossed over the 20-day to the upside in
March 2008. The position is closed once either a downside crossover occurs (as posted in May, right
side of chart), or the trade reaches a predetermined price objective.

Breakout Systems
Breakout systems are extremely easy to develop. They are basically a set of predefined trading rules
based on the simple premise that a price move to a new high or low is an indication of a continuing
trend. Therefore, the system triggers an action to open a position in the direction of the new high/low.

For example, a breakout system may state that the trader should close all shorts and open a long
position if the day's closing price exceeds the high price for the past X days. Part two of the same
breakout system will state that the trader must close longs and open a short position if the day's close
is below the X day's low print. The secret is to determine the length of the period you'd like to trade.
Shorter time periods (faster systems) will detect trending markets faster than slower systems. The
drawback is that more whipsaws will occur with faster systems.

Pattern-Recognition Strategies
A thorough discussion of every pattern used by forex traders is obviously beyond the scope of this
article. As such, we will look at a few popular continuation patterns used by traders. (For more on
charts patterns, read Price Patterns - Part 1.)

Triangles
Triangles can signal trend reversals, but most often they are continuation patterns (meaning that the
resolution of the triangle will result in the resumption of the prior trend). There are several different
types of triangles, each possessing its own unique characteristics and forecasting implications.

Traders should open positions once the price action breaks out beyond the converging boundaries of
the triangle. In this case, the trader will buy the British pound once the price breaks out above the
upper boundary near 1.99.

One way to forecast the extent of the resulting move is to measure the distance of the triangle base

222 ZC
and add that distance to the level where the breakout occurred (~.04 to ~.05 + 1.99 = 2.04)

Figure 2: Symmetrical pattern at the midpoint of a bullish move

Flags
Flags are continuation or consolidation patterns that usually display a period of back-and-forth action
sloped against the primary trend. Pennants have shown to be extremely reliable. They almost always
consolidate the prevailing trend and very rarely signifying a trend reversal. As with triangles, traders
should open positions upon a breach of the boundary. Like other continuation patterns, flags often
occur near the midpoint of a primary move.

Figure 3: Textbook bullish flag, sloped against the direction of the primary trend

223 ZC
Risk-Management Tactics
There are a number of ways traders can reduce risk and avoid the catastrophic losses that will wipe
out trading capital. Traders can set arbitrary points at which they must exit losing positions. They can
also place stop orders. Another popular way to trade is to design mechanical trading systems or so-
called black-box systems that use an overriding preprogrammed logic to make all trading decisions.

There are several perceived benefits to using mechanical trading systems. One is that the core danger
emotions of fear and greed are eliminated from the bulk of your trading. These systems help traders
avoid common mistakes such as excessive trading and closing positions prematurely. Another benefit
is consistency. All signals are followed because the market conditions required to trigger a signal are
detected by the system. Mechanical systems naturally force traders to control losses, since a reversal
will arbitrarily trigger a new signal, reversing or closing the open position. (Read more about the effects
of excessive trading on your portfolio in Tips For Avoiding Excessive Trading.)

Mechanical systems are only as good as the input data and backtesting conducted before beginning
the trading campaign. The simple reality is that there is no perfect way to simulate real market
conditions. Eventually, the trader must enter the markets and put real money at risk. You can paper-
trade and backtest all you want, but the true test is when you go live.

Parting Words
Traders must always review and evaluate the efficacy of their strategies. Market conditions are
constantly changing, and traders must adapt their systems to whatever market conditions they find
themselves in.

224 ZC
Long Term - Multiple Time Frames
Most technical traders in the foreign exchange market, whether they are novices or seasoned pros,
have come across the concept of multiple time frame analysis in their market educations. However,
this well-founded means of reading charts and developing strategies is often the first level of analysis
to be forgotten when a trader pursues an edge over the market.

In specializing as a day trader, momentum trader, breakout trader or event risk trader, among other
styles, many market participants lose sight of the larger trend, miss clear levels
of support and resistance and overlook high probability entry and stop levels. In this article, we will
describe what multiple time frame analysis is and how to choose the various periods and how to put it
all together. (For related reading, see Multiple Time Frames Can Multiply Returns.)

What Is Multiple Time Frame Analysis?

Multiple time frame analysis involves monitoring the same currency pair across different frequencies
(or time compressions). While there is no real limit as to how many frequencies can be monitored or
which specific ones to choose, there are general guidelines that most practitioners will follow.

Typically, using three different periods gives a broad enough reading on the market - using fewer than
this can result in a considerable loss of data, while using more typically provides redundant analysis.
When choosing the three time frequencies, a simple strategy can be to follow a "rule of four". This
means that a medium-term period should first be determined and it should represent a standard as to
how long the average trade is held. From there, a shorter term time frame should be chosen and it
should be at least one-fourth the intermediate period (for example, a 15-minute chart for the short-term
time frame and 60-minute chart for the medium or intermediate time frame). Through the same
calculation, the long-term time frame should be at least four times greater than the intermediate one
(so, keeping with the previous example, the 240-minute, or four-hour, chart would round out the three
time frequencies).

It is imperative to select the correct time frame when choosing the range of the three periods. Clearly,
a long-term trader who holds positions for months will find little use for a 15-minute, 60-minute and
240-minute combination. At the same time, a day trader who holds positions for hours and rarely
longer than a day would find little advantage in daily, weekly and monthly arrangements. This is not to
say that the long-term trader would not benefit from keeping an eye on the 240-minute chart or the
short-term trader from keeping a daily chart in the repertoire, but these should come at the extremes
rather than anchoring the entire range.

Long-Term Time Frame

Equipped with the groundwork for describing multiple time frame analysis, it is now time to apply it to
the forex market. With this method of studying charts, it is generally the best policy to start with the
long-term time frame and work down to the more granular frequencies. By looking at the long-term
time frame, the dominant trend is established. It is best to remember the most overused adage in
trading for this frequency - "The trend is your friend." (For more on this topic, read Trading Trend Or
Range?)

Positions should not be executed on this wide angled chart, but the trades that are taken should be in
the same direction as this frequency's trend is heading. This doesn't mean that trades can't be taken
against the larger trend, but that those that are will likely have a lower probability of success and the
profit target should be smaller than if it was heading in the direction of the overall trend.

In the currency markets, when the long-term time frame has a daily, weekly or monthly
periodicity, fundamentals tend to have a significant impact on direction. Therefore, a trader should
monitor the major economic trends when following the general trend on this time frame. Whether the
primary economic concern is current accountdeficits, consumer spending, business investment or any

225 ZC
other number of influences, these developments should be monitored to better understand the
direction in price action. At the same time, such dynamics tend to change infrequently, just as the trend
in price on this time frame, so they need only be checked occasionally. (For related reading,
see Fundamental Analysis For Traders.)

Another consideration for a higher time frame in this range is the interest rate. Partially a reflection of
an economy's health, the interest rate is a basic component in pricing exchange rates. Under most
circumstances, capital will flow toward the currency with the higher rate in a pair as this equates to
greater returns on investments.

Medium-Term Time Frame

Increasing the granularity of the same chart to the intermediate time frame, smaller moves within the
broader trend become visible. This is the most versatile of the three frequencies because a sense of
both the short-term and longer term time frames can be obtained from this level. As we said above, the
expected holding period for an average trade should define this anchor for the time frame range. In
fact, this level should be the most frequently followed chart when planning a trade while the trade is on
and as the position nears either its profit target or stop loss. (To learn more, check out Devising A
Medium-Term Forex Trading System.)

Short-Term Time Frame

Finally, trades should be executed on the short-term time frame. As the smaller fluctuations in price
action become clearer, a trader is better able to pick an attractive entry for a position whose direction
has already been defined by the higher frequency charts.

Another consideration for this period is that fundamentals once again hold a heavy influence over price
action in these charts, although in a very different way than they do for the higher time frame.
Fundamental trends are no longer discernible when charts are below a four-hour frequency. Instead,
the short-term time frame will respond with increased volatility to those indicators dubbed market
moving. The more granular this lower time frame is, the bigger the reaction to economic indicators will
seem. Often, these sharp moves last for a very short time and, as such, are sometimes described
as noise. However, a trader will often avoid taking poor trades on these temporary imbalances as they
monitor the progression of the other time frames.

Putting It All Together

When all three time frames are combined to evaluate a currency pair, a trader will easily improve the
odds of success for a trade, regardless of the other rules applied for a strategy. Performing the top-
down analysis encourages trading with the larger trend. This alone lowers risk as there is a higher
probability that price action will eventually continue on the longer trend. Applying this theory, the
confidence level in a trade should be measured by how the time frames line up. For example, if the
larger trend is to the upside but the medium- and short-term trends are heading lower, cautious shorts
should be taken with reasonable profit targets and stops. Alternatively, a trader may wait until a
bearish wave runs its course on the lower frequency charts and look to go long at a good level when
the three time frames line up once again. (To learn more, read A Top-Down Approach To Investing.)

Another clear benefit from incorporating multiple time frames into analyzing trades is the ability to
identify support and resistance readings as well as strong entry and exit levels. A trade's chance of
success improves when it is followed on a short-term chart because of the ability for a trader to avoid
poor entry prices, ill-placed stops, and/or unreasonable targets.

Example
To put this theory into action, we will analyze the EUR/USD.

226 ZC
 Figure 1: Monthly frequency over a long-term (10-year) time frame.

In Figure 1 a monthly frequency was chosen for the long-term time frame. It is clear from this chart that
EUR/USD has been in an uptrend for a number of years. More precisely, the pair has formed a rather
consistent rising trendline from a swing low in late 2005. Over a few months, the spot pulled away from
this trendline.

Figure 2: A daily frequency over a medium-term time frame (one year).

Moving down to the medium-term time frame, the general uptrend seen in the monthly chart is still
identifiable. However, it is now evident that the spot price has broken a different, yet notable, rising
trendline on this period and a correction back to the bigger trend may be underway. Taking this into
consideration, a trade can be fleshed out. For the best chance at profit, a long position should only be
considered when the price pulls back to the trendline on the long-term time frame. Another possible
227 ZC
trade is to short the break of this medium-term trendline and set the profit target above the monthly
chart's technical level.

Figure 3: A short-term frequency (four hours) over a shorter time frame (40 days).

Depending on what direction we take from the higher period charts, the lower time frame can better
frame entry for a short or monitor the decline toward the major trendline. On the four-hour chart shown
in Figure 3, a support level at 1.4525 has just recently fallen. Often, former support turns into new
resistance (and vice versa) so a short limit entry order can be set just below this technical level and a
stop can be placed above 1.4750 to ensure the trade's integrity should spot move up to test the new,
short-term falling trend.

Conclusion

Using multiple time frame analysis can drastically improve the odds of making a successful trade.
Unfortunately, many traders ignore the usefulness of this technique once they start to find a
specialized niche. As we've shown in this article, it may be time for many novice traders to revisit this
method because it is a simple way to ensure that a position benefits from the direction of the
underlying trend.

228 ZC
Long Term - Open Interest
Market sentiment is the most important factor that drives the currency market, but assessing market
sentiment is one aspect of trading that is often overlooked by traders. While there are quite a few ways
of gauging what the majority of market participants are thinking or feeling about the market, in this
article, we'll take a look at how to do this using interest analysis.

Open Interest in Forex

Open interest analysis is not uncommon among those who trade futures, but it is a different story for
those who trade spot forex. One of the most important points to note about the spot forex market is
that information pertaining to open interest and volume is not available because transactions are
carried out over-the-counter, and not through exchanges. As a result, there is no record of all the
transactions that have taken place or are taking place in all the "back alleys". Without open interest
and volume as vital indicators of the strength of spot price moves, the next best thing would be to
examine the open interest data on currency futures.

Spot FX Vs. FX Futures

Open interest and volume data on currency futures allow you to gauge market sentiment in the
currency futures market, which also influences, and is influenced by, the spot forex market. Currency
futures are basically spot prices, which are adjusted by the forward swaps (derived by interest rate
differentials) to arrive at a future delivery price. Unlike spot forex, which does not have a centralized
exchange, currency futures are cleared at exchanges, such as the Chicago Mercantile
Exchange (CME), which is the world's largest market for exchange-traded currency futures. Currency
ffutures are generally based on standard contract sizes, with typical durations of three months. Spot
forex, on the other hand, involves a two-day cash delivery transaction.

One of the many differences between spot forex and currency futures lies in their quoting
convention. In the currency futures market, currency futures are mostly quoted as the foreign currency
directly against the U.S. dollar. For example, Swiss francs are quoted versus the U.S. dollar in futures
(CHF/USD), unlike the USD/CHF notation in the spot forex market. Therefore, if the Swiss franc
depreciates in value against the U.S. dollar, USD/CHF will rise, and the Swiss franc futures will decline.
On the other hand, EUR/USD in spot forex is quoted in the same manner as euro futures, so if the
euro appreciates in value, euro futures will rise as the EUR/USD goes up.

The spot and futures prices of a currency (not currency pair) tend to move in tandem; when either the
spot or futures price of a currency rises, the other also tends to rise, and when either falls, the other
also tends to fall. For example, if the GBP futures price goes up, spot GBP/USD goes up (because
GBP gains in strength). However, if the CHF futures price goes up, spot USD/CHF goes down
(because CHF gains in strength), as both the spot and futures prices of CHF move in tandem.

What Is Open Interest?

Many people tend to get open interest mixed up with volume. Open interest refers to the total number
of contracts entered into, but not yet offset, by a transaction or delivery. In other words, these contracts
are still outstanding or "open". Open interest that is held by a trader can be referred to as that trader's
position. When a new buyer wants to establish a new long position and buys a contract, and the seller
on the opposite side is also opening a new short position, the open interest is increased by one
contract.

It is important to note that if this new buyer buys from another old buyer who intends to sell, the open
interest does not increase because no new contracts have been created. Open interest is reduced
when traders offset their positions. If you add up all the long open interest, you will find that the
aggregate number is equal to all of the short open interest. This reflects the fact that for every buyer,
there is a seller on the opposite side of transaction.

229 ZC
Relationship Between Open Interest and Price Trend
Overall, open interest tends to increase when new money is poured into the market, meaning
that speculators are betting more aggressively on the current market direction. Thus, an increase in
total open interest is generally supportive of the current trend, and tends to point to a continuation of
the trend, unless sentiment changes based on an influx of new information.

Conversely, overall open interest tends to decrease when speculators are pulling money out of the
market, showing a change in sentiment, especially if open interest has been rising before.

In a steady uptrend or downtrend, open interest should (ideally) increase. This implies that longs are in
control during an uptrend, or shorts are dominating in a downtrend. Decreasing open interest serves
as a potential warning sign that the current price trend may be lacking real power, as no significant
amount of money has entered the market.

Therefore, as a general rule of thumb, rising open interest should point to a continuation of the current
price move, whether in an uptrend or downtrend. Declining or flat open interest signals that the trend is
waning and is probably near its end.

Putting It Together
Take, for example, the period between October and November 2004, when the euro futures
(in candlesticks) embarked on a trend of higher highs and higher lows (as seen in Figure 1 below). As
depicted in the upper chart window, there were several opportunities to go long on the euro, whether
by trading breakouts of resistance levels or by trading bounces off the daily up trendline. You can see
in the lower window that open interest of euro futures had been increasing gradually as the euro went
up against the U.S. dollar. Note that the price movements of spot EUR/USD (seen as blue line) moved
in tandem with euro futures (candlesticks). In this case, the rising open interest accompanied the
existing medium-term trend, hence, it would have given you a signal that the trend is backed by new
money.

230 ZC
 Figure 1: composite daily chart of euro futures
(candlesticks) overlay with spot EUR/USD prices (dark blue
line).

However, sometimes you may get a strong clue that a trend is of a suspect nature. This clue usually
comes in the form of falling open interest that accompanies a trend, whether it is an uptrend or
downtrend. In Figure 2, you can see that the pound sterling futures (in candlesticks) trended down
between September and October 2006 (as did spot GBP/USD, seen as dark blue line). During this
same period, open interest fell, signifying that people were not shorting more contracts; therefore, the
overall sentiment is not bearish at all. The trend then promptly reversed, and open interest started
increasing.

231 ZC
 Figure 2: A composite daily chart of sterlingfutures
(candlesticks) overlay with spot GBP/USD prices (dark
blue line).

Conclusion
Whether you are trading currency futures or spot forex, you can make use of the futures open interest
to gauge the overall market sentiment. Open interest analysis can help you confirm the strength or
weakness of a current trend and also to confirm your trade.

232 ZC
Long Term - COT Report
Most short-term traders or speculators trade FX based on technical analysis, so equity and futures
traders who use technical analysis have made the switch to FX fairly easily. However, one type of
analysis that traders have not been able to transfer over to currencies is volume-based trading.

Since the currency market is decentralized and there is no one exchange that tracks all trading
activities, it is difficult to quantify volume traded at each price level. But in place of volume-based
trading, many traders have turned to the Commodity Futures Trading Commission's Commitments of
Traders (COT) report, which details positioning on the futures market, for more information on
positioning and volume. Here we look at how historical trends of the COT report can help FX traders.
(Find out how to gauge the psychological state of a currency market in Gauging Major Turns With
Psychology.)

What Is the COT Report?

The Commitments of Traders report was first published by the CFTC in 1962 for 13 agricultural
commodities to inform the public about the current conditions in futures market operations (you can
find the report on the CFTC website here). The data was originally released just once a month, but
moved to once every week in 2000. Along with reporting more often, the COT report has become more
extensive and - luckily for FX traders - it has also expanded to include information on foreign currency
futures. If used wisely, the COT data can be a pretty strong gauge of price action. The caveat here is
that examining the data can be tricky, and the data release is delayed as the numbers are published
every Friday for the previous Tuesday's contracts, so the information comes out three business days
after the actual transactions take place.

Reading the COT Report

Figure 1 is a sample euro FX weekly COT report for June 7, 2005, published by the CFTC. Here is a
quick list of some of the items appearing in the report and what they mean:

• Commercial - Describes an entity involved in the production, processing, or merchandising of a

commodity, using futures contracts primarily for hedging
• Long Report - Includes all of the information on the "short report", along with the concentration
of positions held by the largest traders
• Open Interest - The total number of futures or options contracts not yet offset by a transaction,
by delivery or exercise
• Noncommercial (Speculators) - Traders, such as individual traders, hedge funds and large
institutions, who use futures market for speculative purposes and meet the reportable
requirements set forth by the CFTC
• Nonreportable Positions - Long and short open-interest positions that don't meet reportable
requirements set forth by the CFTC
• Number of Traders - The total number of traders who are required to report positions to the
CFTC
• Reportable Positions - The futures and option positions that are held above specific reporting
levels set by CFTC regulations
• Short Report - Shows open interest separately by reportable and non-reportable positions
• Spreading - Measures the extent to which a non-commercial trader holds equal long and short
futures positions

233 ZC
 Figure 1

Taking a look at the sample report, we see that open interest on Tuesday June 7, 2005, was 193,707
contracts, an increase of 3,213 contracts from the previous week. Noncommercial traders or
speculators were long 22,939 contracts and short 40,710 contracts, making them net
short. Commercial traders, on the other hand, were net long, with 19,936 more long contracts than
short contracts (125,244 - 105,308). The change in open interest was primarily caused by an increase
in commercial positions as noncommercials or speculators reduced their net-short positions.

Using the COT Report

In using the COT report, commercial positioning is less relevant than noncommercial positioning
because the majority of commercial currency trading is done in the spot currency market, so any
commercial futures positions are highly unlikely to provide an accurate representation of real market
positioning. Noncommercial data, on the other hand, is more reliable because it captures traders'
positions in a specific market. There are three primary premises on which to base trading with the COT
data:

• Flips in market positioning may be accurate trending indicators.

• Extreme positioning in the currency futures market has historically been accurate in identifying
important market reversals.
• Changes in open interest can be used to determine strength of trend.

Flips in Market Positioning

Before looking at the chart shown in Figure 2, we should mention that in the futures market all foreign
currency exchange futures use the U.S. dollar as the base currency. For Figure 2, this means that net-
short open interest in the futures market for Swiss francs (CHF) shows bullish sentiment for USD/CHF.
In other words, the futures market for CHF represents futures for CHF/USD, on which long and short

234 ZC
positions will be the exact opposite of long and short positions on USD/CHF. For this reason, the axis
on the left shows negative numbers above the center line and positive numbers below it.

The chart below shows that trends of noncommercial futures traders tend to follow the trends very well
for CHF. In fact, a study by the Federal Reserve shows that using open interest in CHF futures will
allow the trader to correctly guess the direction of USD/CHF 73% of the time.

Figure 2: Net positions of noncommercial traders in the futures for Swiss francs
(corresponding axis is on the left-hand side) on the International Monetary Market
(IMM) and price action of USD/CHF from April 2003 to May 2005 (corresponding axis
is on the right-hand side). Each bar represents one week.

Flips - where net noncommercial open-interest positions cross the zero line - offer a particularly good
way to use COT data for Swiss futures. Keeping important notation conventions in mind (that is,
knowing which currency in a pair is the base currency), we see that when net futures positions flip
above the line, price action tends to climb and vice versa.

In Figure 2, we see that noncommercial traders flip from net long to net short Swiss francs (and long
dollars) in June 2003, coinciding with a break higher in USD/CHF. The next flip occurs in September
2003, when noncommercial traders become net long once again. Using only this data, we could have
potentially traded a 700-pip gain in four months (the buy at 1.31 and the sell at 1.38). On the chart we
continue to see various buy and sell signals, represented by points at which green (buy) and red (sell)
arrows cross the price line.

Even though this strategy of relying on flips clearly works well for USD/CHF, the flip may not be a
perfect indicator for all currency pairs. Each currency pair has different characteristics, especially the
high-yielding ones, which rarely see flips since most positioning tends to be net long for extended
periods as speculators take interest-earning positions.

Extreme Positioning
Extreme positioning in the currency futures market has historically also been accurate in identifying
important market reversals. As indicated in Figure 3 below, abnormally large positions in futures
for GBP/USD by noncommercial traders has coincided with tops in price action. (In this example, the
left axis of the chart is reversed compared to Figure 2 because the GBP is the base currency.) The
reason why these extreme positions are applicable is that they are points at which there are so many
speculators weighted in one direction that there is no one left to buy or sell. In the cases of extreme
235 ZC
positions illustrated by Figure 3, every one who wants to be long is already long. As a result,
exhaustion ensues and prices begin reversing.

Figure 3: Net noncommercial positions in GBP futures on IMM (corresponding axis

is on the left-hand side) and price action of GBP/USD (corresponding axis is on the
right-hand side) from May 2004 to April 2005. Each bar represents one week.

Changes in Open Interest

Open interest is a secondary trading tool that can be used to understand the price behavior of a
particular market. The data is most useful for position traders and investors as they try to capitalize on
a longer-term trend. Open interest can basically be used to gauge the overall health of a specific
futures market; that is, rising and falling open interest levels help to measure the strength or weakness
of a particular price trend. (To learn more, read Gauging Forex Market Sentiment With Open Interest.)

For example, if a market has been in a long-lasting uptrend or downtrend with increasing levels of
open interest, a leveling off or decrease in open interest can be a red flag, signaling that the trend may
be nearing its end. Rising open interest generally indicates that the strength of the trend is increasing
because new money or aggressive buyers are entering into the market. Declining open interest
indicates that money is leaving the market and that the recent trend is running out of momentum.
Trends accompanied by declining open interest and volume become suspect. Rising prices and falling
open interest signals the recent trend may be nearing its end as fewer traders are participating in the
rally.

The chart in Figure 4 displays open interest in the EUR/USD and price action. Notice that market
trends tend to be confirmed when total open interest is on the rise. In early May 2004, we see that
price action starts moving higher, and overall open interest is also on the rise. However, once open
interest dipped in a later week, we saw the rally topped out. The same sort of scenario was seen in
late November and early December 2004, when the EUR/USD rallied significantly on rising open
interest, but once open interest leveled off and then fell, the EUR/USD began to sell off.

236 ZC
 Figure 4: Open interest in the EUR/USD (corresponding axis is on the left-hand side)
and price action (corresponding axis on right-hand side) from January 2004 to May
2005. Each bar represents one week.

Summary
One of the drawbacks of the FX spot market is the lack of volume data. To compensate for this, many
traders have turned to the futures market to gauge positioning. Every week, the CFTC publishes a
Commitment of Traders report, detailing commercial and non-commercial positioning. Based on
empirical analysis, there are three different ways that futures positioning can be used to forecast price
trends in the foreign-exchange spot market: flips in positioning, extreme levels and changes in open
interest. It is important to keep in mind, however, that techniques using these premises work better for
some currencies than for others.

237 ZC